JP6700234B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, and more particularly, to a gaming machine that displays variable identification information and can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player.

  In such a gaming machine, when the variable display of the identification information is executed, it is composed of the numerical information as the first identification information and the decoration information as the second identification information. During the variable display, only the numerical information is changed. However, there is a mode in which the decoration information is attached to the numerical information when the fluctuation stops (Patent Document 1). Further, there is a device in which decorative display is attached to the numerical information in the middle of the fluctuation by starting the variable display using the numerical information (Patent Document 2).

JP-A-2007-135800 (FIG. 31) JP-A-2004-173716 (FIGS. 8 and 9)

  However, in the above-mentioned gaming machines of Patent Document 1 and Patent Document 2, since the size of the numerical information as the first identification information when the fluctuation is stopped is uniform, the display mode of the decoration information as the second identification information. Depending on the situation, it may not be possible to display a suitable display.

  The present invention has been conceived in view of such circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably displaying the first identification information and the second identification information.

(A) A gaming machine capable of performing variable display of identification information and controlling in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
Equipped with a variable display means capable of performing variable display of identification information,
The identification information includes first information and second information,
The display pattern of the identification information is provided with a first display pattern that displays the first information without displaying the second information and a second display pattern that displays the first information and the second information. ,
The variable display means performs the variable display by the first display pattern after the identification information starts changing in a predetermined direction, and stops the variable display by the second display pattern,
The display mode is different between the first information when displayed in the first display pattern and the first information when displayed in the second display pattern,
The variable display means,
In the special reach that develops after a lapse of a predetermined time after reaching the reach state, the first information is reduced and displayed, and the first information is reduced and displayed according to the effect sound output during the special reach. Display the information by performing a specific action
When the variable display of the identification information is stopped, the first information is enlarged and then displayed, and then the first information is reduced and displayed,
When the variable display of the identification information is stopped, the second information is displayed so as to appear from the rear of the first information displayed in an enlarged manner,
further,
A specific display unit capable of displaying a specific display corresponding to the variable display of the identification information in a mode involving an operation, and a specific display unit capable of changing the display mode of the specific display;
And a suggestive effect execution means capable of executing a suggestive effect suggesting a change in the display mode of the specific display,
The specific display means is capable of changing the display mode of the specific display at a different rate depending on the operation mode of the specific display when the suggestive effect is executed.
(1) With a gaming machine (such as a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can perform variable display (variable display, etc.) of identification information (design information, design, etc.) and can be controlled in an advantageous state (big hit gaming state, etc.) that is advantageous to the player. There
A variation display means (effect display device 9, effect control microcomputer 100, etc.) capable of executing variable display of identification information is provided,
The identification information (design information, etc.) includes first information (numerical information, numbers, etc.) and second information (decoration information, characters, etc.),
The display pattern of the identification information includes a first display pattern that displays the first information without displaying the second information (a pattern that displays numbers, etc.) and a first display pattern that displays the first information and the second information. 2 display patterns (patterns for displaying numbers and characters, etc.) are provided,
The variation display means performs variation display according to the first display pattern (e.g., variation display according to numbers) after the identification information starts to fluctuate in a predetermined direction (downward direction), and the second display. The variable display is stopped by the pattern (the variable display is stopped by numbers and characters, etc.),
The display mode is different between the first information when displayed in the first display pattern and the first information when displayed in the second display pattern (as shown in FIG. (The number when displayed with only numbers is displayed larger than the number when displayed with numbers and characters, etc.),
further,
Fluctuation of identification information in a mode that involves an action (for example, a mode in which the display position is switched to the advance position or the retreat position, a mode in which the expressionless expression mode is switched to a display mode in which the eyes are opened and sweat is released or tears are displayed) It is possible to display a specific display corresponding to the display (for example, an active display corresponding to a change being executed, a hold display corresponding to a change that has not been started yet), and a display mode of the specific display (for example, a display color (white, (Blue, red). It may be a shape, pattern, position, range, etc. to be displayed.) Specific display means (for example, in the effect control microcomputer 90100, active display by performing steps S90663B and S90667B). Is displayed, the hold display is displayed by performing steps S903911 and S903929, and the display mode of the specific display is changed by performing step S904713),
Suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, change effect (first change effect, second change effect)) suggesting a change in the display mode of the specific display (for example, step S904506 in the effect control microcomputer 90100). In step S908004, a process table is selected according to the change effect, and steps S908006 and S908105 are performed to execute the change effect).
The specific display means is an operation mode of specific display when the suggestive effect is executed (for example, display position (advance position, retract position). Operation frequency (high frequency, low frequency) or display direction (for example, downward or rightward). It is possible to change the display mode of the specific display at a different rate depending on other operation modes such as (for example, the effect control microcomputer 90100 executes steps S904707 to S904709, When the display position of the specific display that is the execution target of the first change effect is the advance position, the display mode of the specific display is changed at a rate of 100%, while the display of the specific display that is the execution target of the first change effect is performed. When the position is the retracted position, the display mode of the specific display is not changed (the display mode of the specific display is changed at a rate of 0%).

  With such a configuration, it is possible to preferably display the first identification information and the second identification information. Further, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the operation mode of the specific display.

  In addition, in other embodiments described later, "variable display of identification information" may be referred to as "variable display of symbol" or simply "variable display".

(2) The gaming machine of (1) above,
The variable display means displays the second information (character A to character I and the like shown in FIG. 12) corresponding to the kind of the first information (numbers 1 to 9 and the like shown in FIG. 12) provided in plural kinds. The variable display is stopped by the second display pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. 13, the variable display is stopped by a pattern for displaying characters corresponding to numbers).

  With such a configuration, it is possible to preferably display the first identification information and the second identification information.

(3) The gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above,
When the reach state is reached, the variable display means displays the first information and the second information in a display mode different from the display mode prior to the reach state (as shown in FIG. 15, the reach mode). Characters that move greatly as an action during formation are displayed).

  With such a configuration, it is possible to preferably display the first identification information and the second identification information.

(4) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above,
The variable display means executes a first change effect when changing from the first display pattern to the second display pattern (executes an effect of changing only numbers from numbers to characters as an action at the time of fluctuation stop). , A second change effect is executed when changing from the second display pattern to the first display pattern (the effect of changing from a number and a character to only a number is executed as a change start action),
The execution mode is different between the first change effect and the second change effect (as shown in FIG. 14, in the variation stop time symbol action executed as the first change effect, the character displays the screen of the effect display device 9). From the depth direction when viewed from the front, the number jumps forward, the number moves downward, the character is displayed larger than the number, and in the variation start pattern action executed as the second change effect, the number and the character Is erased and only the numbers displayed larger than before change fluctuate downward).

  With such a configuration, it is possible to preferably display the first identification information and the second identification information.

(5) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above,
The variation display means displays identification information indicating that the advantageous state is controlled at the end of the reach effect by the first display pattern, and the confirmation display of the identification information after the end of the reach effect is displayed by the second display. It is displayed by a pattern (as shown in FIG. 15, the symbols are aligned only at the end of SP reach, and a determination operation is performed by numbers and characters at the time of final display after returning to the normal background).

  With such a configuration, it is possible to preferably display the first identification information and the second identification information.

(6) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above,
The variable display means, when stopping the variable display of the identification information, performs a display in which the second information appears in a wider display range than the first information before the stop (as shown in FIG. 13, When the variable display is stopped, the character is displayed so as to appear wider than the display range of the numbers before the stop).

  With such a configuration, it is possible to preferably display the first identification information and the second identification information.

(7) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above,
The variation display means, when stopping the variation display of the identification information, displays the second information so as to jump out from the rear of the gaming machine to the front (as shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, when the variation is stopped. As a symbol action, the character is displayed so as to jump forward from the depth direction when the screen of the effect display device 9 is viewed from the front).

  With this configuration, it is possible to perform a powerful display using the second identification information.

(8) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (7) above,
The advantageous state is provided with a first advantageous state having a high degree of advantage (probability variation big hit state etc.) and a second advantageous state having a degree of advantage lower than the first advantageous state (normal big hit state etc.),
The first information corresponding to the first advantageous state (number corresponding to the probability variation big hit) and the first information corresponding to the second advantageous state (number corresponding to the normal big hit) are provided,
The variable display means executes the second display pattern only in the first information corresponding to the first advantageous state (as shown in the modification, only in the numbers corresponding to the probability variation big hit, the numbers and the characters are displayed. And so on).

  With such a configuration, it is possible to give a special impression to the highly advantageous first information.

(9) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (8) above,
The variable display is started based on the fact that the game medium (game ball or the like) has entered the starting area (the first starting winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14 or the like),
A high-frequency state control capable of controlling a high-frequency state (time-saving state, etc.) in which the game medium is more likely to enter the starting region than a normal state until a predetermined condition (variation of 100 revolutions, etc.) is satisfied after the advantageous state is completed Means (game control microcomputer 560 or the like) is further provided,
In the high-frequency state, the variable display means starts the variable display with the first display pattern and stops the variable display with the first display pattern (in the time saving state, the variable display starts with only the number). Stop changing only with numbers).

  With such a configuration, it is possible to preferably display the first information in the high-frequency state.

(10) The gaming machine according to any one of (3) to (9) above,
It further comprises effect sound output means (production control microcomputer 100, sound output board 70, speaker 27, etc.) for outputting effect sound in accordance with effect,
It may develop into a special reach (SP reach, etc.) after a lapse of a predetermined time after entering the reach state,
In the special reach, the variable display means reduces and displays the first information (displayed as a small symbol, etc.), and the reduced and displayed first information according to the effect sound in the special reach. The information is displayed by performing a predetermined operation (as shown in FIG. 15, as the small symbol action pattern B, the small symbol is violently moved according to the effect sound during SP reach).

  With such a configuration, it is possible to preferably display the first information that is reduced and displayed.

(11) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (10),
Further, a notice effect execution means (effect control microcomputer 100, etc.) capable of executing a predetermined notice effect (full-screen notice effect, etc.),
The predetermined notice effect is executed so that the display mode of the identification information becomes invisible or difficult at the start of the variable display (see FIG. 18(B2), FIG. 20(B2) or FIG. 22(B2). Such as a blackout effect that makes the decorative pattern invisible),
When the predetermined notice effect is executed, the identification information can be displayed in a variable direction in a predetermined direction after the execution period of the predetermined notice effect has elapsed (FIG. 18(B2), FIG. 20(B2). ) Or after the execution period of the blackout effect shown in FIG. 22(B2) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 18(D2), (E2), FIG. 20(D), (E) or FIG. A change in the forward direction is started).

  With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the start of movement of the identification information from being difficult to understand, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Further, the modes for carrying out the invention described below include the inventions according to the following (12) to (18). Conventionally, in a gaming machine, a specific display corresponding to a variable display of identification information as disclosed in JP 2013-212136 A (for example, a pending display corresponding to a variable display which has not been executed yet, a running display) There is a display capable of displaying an active display corresponding to the variable display of the identification information of 1.), for example, a display in which the hold display is always rotated is known. However, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, the effect cannot be enhanced because only the specific display operates. In view of this point, it is required to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the effect of production.

  (12) In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to another aspect is a gaming machine capable of performing variable display of identification information, and is accompanied by an operation (for example, a display position at an advance position or a retreat position is displayed). A specific display corresponding to the variable display of the identification information (for example, corresponding to a change in execution) in a switching mode, a mode in which the expressionless display mode is switched to a display mode in which eyes are sweated and tears are displayed. It is possible to display active display, hold display corresponding to fluctuations that have not started yet, and display mode of specific display (for example, display color (white, blue, red). Display shape, pattern, position, range, etc.) The display may be changed by a specific display means (for example, in the effect control microcomputer 90100, steps S90663B and S90667B are performed to display the active display, and steps S903911 and S903929 are performed to display the hold display. Then, a portion that changes the display mode of the specific display by performing step S904713) and a suggestive effect that suggests a change in the display mode of the specific display (for example, change effect (first change effect, second change effect)). Executable suggestion effect execution means (for example, in the effect control microcomputer 90100, change effect is set in step S904506, a process table corresponding to the change effect is selected in step S908004, and change is performed by performing steps S90806 and S908105. The specific display means includes an operation mode of specific display when the suggestive effect is executed (for example, display position (advance position, retreat position). Operation frequency (high frequency, low frequency) It is possible to change the display mode of the specific display at different ratios according to other operation modes such as or display direction (for example, downward or rightward). By executing S904707 to S904709, when the display position of the specific display that is the execution target of the first change effect is the advance position, the display mode of the specific display is changed at a rate of 100%, while the first change. It is characterized in that the display mode of the specific display is not changed (the display mode of the specific display is changed at a rate of 0%) when the display position of the specific display which is the execution target of the effect is the retracted position. With such a configuration, the player can be made to pay attention to the operation mode of the specific display, and the effect of the effect can be improved.

  (13) In the above (12), the specific display means displays the specific display in a mode involving an operation regardless of whether or not the display mode is changed (for example, the display position (extended position for any specific display). , The retreat position) is switched), and the suggestion effect executing means can execute the suggestion effect at different rates depending on the operation mode of the specific display (for example, the effect control microcomputer 90100 is shown in FIG. By executing step S904508 by using the operation frequency determination lottery table shown in FIG. 4, change effect (first change effect, second change effect) is generated when the operation frequency is high compared to when the operation frequency is low. ) Is easy to execute). With such a configuration, the player can be focused on the operation mode of the specific display.

  (14) In the above (12) or (13), the specific display means can switch between the specific operation mode (for example, the advance position) and the non-specific operation mode (for example, the retracted position) to display the specific display ( For example, the effect control microcomputer 90100 can execute steps S904704, S904709, and S904710), and the display mode of the specific display when the operation mode of the specific display when the suggestion effect is executed is the specific operation mode Can be changed (for example, the effect control microcomputer 90100 executes steps S904707 to S904713 so that the specific display when the display position of the specific display that is the execution target of the first change effect is the advance position. The display mode of can be changed). With such a configuration, the player can be focused on the operation mode of the specific display.

  (15) In any one of (12) to (14) above, the suggestion effect producing means includes a first suggestion effect (for example, a first change effect) and a second suggestion effect (for example, a second change effect). Any one of a plurality of types of suggestive effects can be executed (for example, the effect control microcomputer 90100 executes any of the change effects by performing steps S90804, S908006, and S908105), and a specific display The means can switch between a specific operation mode (for example, an advancing position) and a non-specific operation mode (for example, a retracted position) to display a specific display (for example, the production control microcomputer 90100, steps S904704, S904709, If the operation mode of the specific display is the specific operation mode when the first suggestion effect is executed, the display mode of the specific display can be changed (for example, effect control microcomputer 90100). By executing steps S904707 to S904713, it is possible to change the display mode of the specific display when the display position of the specific display that is the execution target of the first change effect is the advance position) while the second suggestion When the effect is executed, the display mode of the specific display can be changed irrespective of the operation mode of the specific display (for example, the effect control microcomputer 90100 executes steps S904711 to S904713, whereby the second change effect is generated). It is possible to change the display mode of the specific display regardless of whether the display position of the specific display to be executed is the advance position or the retreat position). With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the effect of production.

  (16) In any one of (12) to (15) above, it can be suggested that the display state of the specific display controls the advantageous state (for example, the production control microcomputer 90100 executes steps S903906 and S903924). , The display mode pattern determination lottery table shown in FIG. 61 is used to determine the display mode pattern, so that the display mode indicates the degree of reliability (white<blue<red) for the big hit, and the specific display operation mode causes the specific display. It is possible to indicate whether or not the display mode of (1) changes (for example, the effect control microcomputer 90100 determines the operation frequency using the operation frequency determination lottery table shown in FIG. 68C in step S904508). Therefore, the reliability (low frequency<high frequency) for changing the display mode of the specific display depending on the operation frequency may be used. With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the effect of production.

  (17) In any one of the above (12) to (16), the suggestion effect executing means has a changed specific display (for example, the first one shown in FIGS. 74(1) and (2)) whose display mode has already been changed. Suggestion effect (for example, the second change effect shown in FIGS. 74(1) and (2)) that suggests a change in the display mode of the hold display 9052) and the changed specification in the state where the changed specification display is displayed. Suggestion effect (for example, FIG. 74(1), ((1), (4) in FIG. 74 (1), (4))) 4) and (2nd change effect shown in (5)) can be executed in a mode in which at least a part is common (for example, a mode in which the arrow Y flies as shown in FIG. 74(1)). May be According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the effect contents surprising and improve the effect.

  (18) In any one of the above (12) to (17), the specific display means displays at least a normal mode (for example, “white”) of the specific display (for example, hold display, active display) corresponding to the variable display. And a first specific mode (for example, "red") having a higher degree of expectation than the normal mode, and a second specific mode (for example, performance suggestion display mode (first special suggestion mode, second special suggestion) that suggests the effect content. Mode, pseudo-link suggestion mode, SP suggestion mode)) (for example, as shown in FIG. 75, "white" or "red" or a second special suggestion mode). And a hold display can be displayed), and an effect execution means capable of executing the effect of the content suggested by the specific display of the second specific mode (for example, as shown in FIGS. 75(5) and 75(6)), The specific display means is capable of executing the special zone effect suggested in the special suggestion mode, and the specific display means displays the specific display in the second specific mode, and then the content suggested by the specific display in the second specific mode. When the effect of is executed, the display mode of the specific display can be changed from the second specific mode to the first specific mode (for example, as shown in FIG. 75, 5 seconds after the special zone effect is started, The hold display 9053 displayed in the second special suggestion mode can be changed to “red”). With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the expectation for the specific aspect.

It is the front view which saw the pachinko game machine from the front. It is a figure which shows a hit classification table. It is a block diagram showing an example of a circuit configuration in a main board (game control board). It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is an explanatory view showing a big hit determination table and a big hit type determination table. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation pattern table used for determining a fluctuation pattern in a table format. It is the explanation drawing which shows one example of the contents of production control command. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is the flowchart which shows the special design process treatment. It is the flowchart which shows production control main processing. It is the flowchart which shows production control process treatment. It is a figure which shows the relationship between 1st information and 2nd information. It is a figure which shows the aspect of variable display. It is a timing chart of a symbol display pattern at the time of non-reach. It is a timing chart of a symbol display pattern at the time of SP reach big hit. It is the flowchart which shows production design fluctuation start processing. It is a timing chart showing the relationship between the variation of the decorative design and each notice effect. It is the figure which shows the production execution example. It is a timing chart showing the relationship between the variation of the decorative design and each notice effect. It is the figure which shows the production execution example. It is a timing chart showing the relationship between the variation of the decorative design and each notice effect. It is the figure which shows the production execution example. It is the front view which saw the pachinko game machine from the front. It is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration example of a game control board (main board). It is the block diagram which shows the circuit configuration example of the production control baseplate, the lamp driver baseplate and the audio output baseplate. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing which CPU in a main board performs. It is a flowchart which shows a 4 ms timer interruption process. It is the explanation drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern of the production design which is prepared beforehand. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is an explanatory view showing a big hit judgment table, a small hit judgment table, and a big hit type judgment table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern classification determination table for big hits. It is an explanatory view showing a variation pattern type determination table for deviation. It is explanatory drawing which shows a hit variation pattern determination table. It is an explanatory view showing a deviation variation pattern determination table. It is the explanation drawing which shows one example of the contents of production control command. It is the explanation drawing which shows one example of the contents of production control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the symbol designation command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the variation category command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the variation category command. It is a flowchart showing an example of a program of special symbol process processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of a program of special symbol process processing. It is a flow chart which shows starting opening switch passage processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a storage buffer. It is the flowchart which shows the production processing at the time of winning a prize. It is a flow chart which shows special design normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows special design normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows change pattern setting processing. 7 is a flowchart showing a display result designation command transmission process. It is a flowchart showing a process during special symbol fluctuation. It is a flowchart showing a special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart showing a big hit ending process. It is a flow chart showing an example of a program of special symbol display control processing. It is the flowchart which shows the production control main processing which CPU for production control executes. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a command receiving buffer. It is a flow chart which shows command analysis processing. It is a flow chart which shows command analysis processing. It is a flow chart which shows command analysis processing. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of a start winning a prize command storage area. It is the flowchart which shows production control process treatment. It is a flow chart which shows reservation display control processing. It is an explanatory view showing a display mode pattern determination lottery table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a change timing determination lottery table. It is a flow chart which shows change pattern command reception waiting processing. It is the flowchart which shows production design fluctuation start processing. It is the explanation drawing which shows one example of the stop design of production design. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of process data. It is a flow chart which shows operation frequency determination processing. It is an explanatory view showing a change effect execution lottery table, an execution target determination lottery table, and an operation frequency determination lottery table. It is the flowchart which shows the production design fluctuation process in production control process treatment. It is an explanatory view showing a display position switching lottery table. It is the flowchart which shows production design fluctuation stop processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display of the effect display apparatus when a change effect is performed. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display of the effect display apparatus when a change effect is performed. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display of the effect display apparatus at the time of performing a 2nd change effect in the modification 1. FIG. 14 is an explanatory diagram showing a display example in the case of displaying the hold display in the second special suggestion mode in the modified example 2.

  Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings. Although a pachinko gaming machine is shown as an example of a gaming machine, the present invention is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine, and may be a coin gaming machine, another gaming machine such as a slot machine, or the like. Any gaming machine may be used as long as it is a machine.

[First Embodiment]
Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 1, which is an example of a gaming machine, will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as viewed from the front. FIG. 2 is a hit type table.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 is a gaming machine in which a game is played by hitting a game ball as a game medium in the game area 7. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is composed of an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape, and a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be openable and closable. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a frame-shaped glass door frame 2 which is provided in the gaming frame so as to be openable and closable. The game frame is a front frame (not shown) installed to be openable and closable with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate (not shown) to which mechanical parts and the like are attached, and various parts attached to them (game described later). (Excluding the board 6). In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a game is played by hitting a game ball as a game medium into the game area.

  On the lower surface of the glass door frame 2, there is a hit ball supply plate (upper plate) 3. Below the hitting ball supply tray 3, there are provided a surplus ball receiving tray 4 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply tray 3, and a hitting ball operation handle (operation knob) 5 for firing the hit ball. A game board 6 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 2. The game board 6 is a structure including a plate-shaped body that constitutes the game board 6 and various parts attached to the plate-shaped body. Further, on the front surface of the game board 6, a game area 7 in which the driven game balls can flow down is formed.

  The member forming the surplus ball receiving tray (lower tray) 4 is configured in a stick shape (bar shape) at a predetermined position on the upper side of the lower tray body (for example, the central portion of the lower tray) or the like, for example. The stick controller 122 that can be gripped and tilted in a plurality of directions (front, rear, left and right) is attached. It should be noted that the stick controller 122 has a predetermined operating finger (for example, an index finger) when the player holds the operating rod of the stick controller 122 with an operating hand (for example, the left hand) and the like. A trigger button 125 (see FIG. 3) capable of performing an instruction operation is provided, and a trigger sensor 121 (FIG. 3) for detecting a predetermined instruction operation such as push-pull operation on the trigger button 125 is provided inside the operation rod of the stick controller 122. (See) is built in. Further, a tilt direction sensor unit 123 (see FIG. 3) for detecting a tilt operation with respect to the operating rod is provided inside the main body of the lower plate and the like below the stick controller 122. Further, the stick controller 122 includes a vibrator motor 126 (see FIG. 3) for vibrating the stick controller 122.

  In the member forming the hitting ball supply tray (upper tray) 3, the player performs a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation at a predetermined position on the upper surface of the upper tray body (for example, above the stick controller 122). A possible push button 120 is provided. The push button 120 may be configured to be capable of mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically detecting a predetermined instruction operation, such as a pressing operation by the player. A push sensor 124 (see FIG. 3) for detecting an operation action of the player performed on the push button 120 may be provided inside the main body of the upper plate or the like at the installation position of the push button 120. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 1, the attachment positions of the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 have a vertical positional relationship in the central portion of the upper plate and the lower plate. On the other hand, the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 may be attached to either the left or right side of the upper plate and the lower plate while maintaining the vertical positional relationship. Alternatively, the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 may not be attached at the upper and lower positions but in the left and right positions, for example. As the operating means, a lever switch and other operating means such as a jog dial may be provided.

  In the vicinity of the center of the game area 7, an effect display device 9 is provided as a display means capable of variably displaying (also referred to as variable display) effect symbols as a plurality of types of identification information capable of identifying each. The effect design as the identification information is composed of numerical information (for example, a number) as the first information and decoration information (for example, a character) as the second information. The display mode of the first identification information and the second identification information changes corresponding to the variable display. On the right side of the effect display device 9 in the game area 7, a first special symbol display (first variable display portion) 8a that variably displays the first special symbol as a plurality of types of identification information that can identify each, A second special symbol display (second variation display section) 8b that variably displays the second special symbol as a plurality of types of identification information capable of identifying each is provided.

  Each of the first special symbol display device 8a and the second special symbol display device 8b is composed of a simple and small-sized display device (for example, 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers and characters. The effect display device 9 is composed of a liquid crystal display device (LCD), and on the display screen, an effect symbol display area for performing variable display of effect symbols in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is provided. Be done. In the effect symbol display area, for example, a symbol display area in which three decorative (for effect) effect symbols for left, middle, and right are variably displayed is formed.

  Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol, and the first special symbol display device 8a and the second special symbol display device 8b are collectively referred to as a special symbol display device (variable display portion). I have something to do.

  In addition, in this embodiment, although the case where two special symbol display devices 8a and 8b are provided is shown, the gaming machine may be provided with only one special symbol display device.

  Each of the first special symbol display device 8a and the second special symbol display device 8b is controlled by the game control microcomputer mounted on the main board (game control board). The effect display device 9 is controlled by the effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. When the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed on the first special symbol display device 8a, the effect display is executed on the effect display device 9 in accordance with the variable display, and on the second special symbol display device 8b. When the variable display of the 2 special symbols is being executed, the effect display is executed on the effect display device 9 along with the variable display, so that it is possible to easily grasp the progress of the game.

  More specifically, the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is such that the first starting condition or the second starting condition that is the execution condition of the variable display is satisfied (for example, the game ball is the first starting winning opening 13). Or after having passed through the second starting winning opening 14 (including winning), the start condition of the variable display (for example, when the number of pending storage is not 0, the variation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol) Display is not being executed, and started based on the fact that the jackpot game is not being executed), and when the variable display time (variable time) has elapsed, the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. To do. It should be noted that passing a game ball means that the game ball has passed through a predetermined winning area, such as a winning opening or a gate, and includes a concept that the gaming ball has entered (winning) the winning opening. Is. Derivative display of the display result means that the symbol (an example of identification information) is finally stopped and displayed.

  When the big hit display result (big hit pattern) as the specific display result is displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, or the big hit display result (big hit symbol) is displayed as the specific display result on the second special symbol display 8b. When the derivation display is performed, the big hit display result (combination of big hit symbols) as the specific display result is also derivation displayed on the effect display device 9. In this way, when the specific display result is displayed as the display result of the variable display, it is controlled to a specific game state (big hit game state) as an advantageous state in which a value advantageous to the player (advantageous value) is given.

  Further, in the effect display device 9, the symbols other than the symbol which is the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol in the left and right middle symbols) are continued for a predetermined time, and the big hit symbols (for example, the symbols in the left, middle, and right are arranged in the same symbol). The combination of symbols) is stopped, oscillating, enlarged or reduced, or deformed in a state of being in agreement with each other, or a plurality of symbols are displayed in a variable manner in synchronization with each other, or the positions of the displayed symbols are exchanged. The production performed in a state in which the possibility of a big hit continues before the final result is displayed (hereinafter, these states are referred to as reach states) is called reach production.

  Here, in the reach state, when the effect symbols stopped and displayed in the display area of the effect display device 9 form a part of the big hit combination, the variable display of the effect symbols that are not yet stopped and displayed continues. It is a display state, or a display state in which all or a part of the effect symbols are variably displayed in synchronization while forming all or a part of the big hit combination. In other words, the reach means a state in which the identification information constitutes the specific display result in the plurality of variable display areas, but at least a part of the variable display areas is in the variable display. In this embodiment, the reach state is formed, for example, in a state where the same symbol is stopped in the left and right symbol display areas and the symbol is not stopped in the middle symbol display area. The symbols stopped in the left and right symbol display areas when the reach state is formed are called reach formation symbols, or reach symbols.

  The display effect in the reach state is the reach effect display (reach effect). In addition, at the time of reach, an effect different from usual may be performed by a lamp or a sound. This production is called reach production. In addition, at the time of reach, a character (a display effect imitating a person or the like and different from a design (effect design or the like)) is displayed, or a display mode of a background image of the effect display device 9 (for example, color or the like). ) May be changed. The display of the character and the change of the display mode of the background are referred to as reach effect display. In addition, some of the reach are set so that a big hit is more likely to occur when it appears than in a normal reach. Such a special reach is called super reach.

  Below the effect display device 9, a winning device having a first starting winning opening 13 is provided. The game ball that has won the first starting winning opening 13 is guided to the back surface of the game board 6 and detected by the first starting opening switch 13a.

  Further, below the winning device having the first starting winning opening (first starting opening) 13, there is provided a variable winning ball device 15 having a second starting winning opening 14 in which game balls can be won. The game ball that has won the second start winning opening (second starting opening) 14 is guided to the back surface of the game board 6 and detected by the second starting opening switch 14a. The variable winning ball device 15 is opened by the solenoid 16. When the variable winning ball device 15 is opened, the game balls can be won into the second starting winning port 14 (starting winning is easy), which is advantageous for the player. In the state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the game balls are easier to win in the second starting winning port 14 than in the first starting winning port 13. In addition, in the state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, the game ball does not win the second starting winning port 14. Therefore, in the state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, it is easier to win the game ball in the first starting winning port 13 than in the second starting winning port 14. In addition, while the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, it may be difficult to win the prize, but it may be possible to win the prize (that is, it is difficult for the game ball to win the prize). Hereinafter, the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 may be collectively referred to as a starting winning opening or a starting opening.

  Above the second special symbol display 8b, the second special symbol reservation storage display 18b consisting of four displays for displaying the number of effective winning balls that have entered the second starting winning opening 14, that is, the second storage storage number. It is provided. The second special symbol hold storage indicator 18b increases the number of indicators to be turned on by 1 each time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the second special symbol display device 8b is started, the number of lighted display devices is reduced by one.

  Further, above the second special symbol hold storage display 18b, the number of valid winning balls that have entered the first starting winning opening 13, that is, the first holding storage number (holding storage is also referred to as starting memory or starting winning storage. ) Is provided with a first special symbol reservation storage display 18a consisting of four displays. The 1st special symbol reservation storage indicator 18a increases the number of the indicator which lights up whenever there is an effective starting winning a prize. Then, each time the variable display on the first special symbol display device 8a is started, the number of lighted display devices is reduced by one.

  The game machine drives a drive motor in response to the player operating the ball operation handle 5, and uses a rotational force of the drive motor to shoot a game ball into the game area 7 (not shown). ) Is provided. The game ball shot from the hitting ball launching device enters the game area 7 through a hit ball rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 7, and then descends from the game area 7. When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening 13 and is detected by the first starting opening switch 13a, if the variable display of the first special symbol can be started (for example, the variable display of the special symbol ends, the first That 1 start condition is established), the first special symbol display 8a starts the variable display (variation) of the first special symbol, and the effect display device 9 starts the variable display of the effect symbol. That is, the variable display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to the winning in the first starting winning opening 13. Unless the variable display of the first special symbol can be started, the first reserved storage number is increased by 1 on condition that the first reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value.

  When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening 14 and is detected by the second starting opening switch 14a, if the variable display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the variable display of the special symbol ends, the first 2 start condition is satisfied), the variable display (variation) of the second special symbol is started on the second special symbol display 8b, and the variable display of the effect symbol is started on the effect display device 9. That is, the variable display of the second special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to the winning of the second start winning port 14. Unless the variable display of the second special symbol can be started, the second reserved storage number is increased by 1 on condition that the second reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value.

  The effect display device 9 is for decoration (for effect) during the variable display time of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display time of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 8b. Variable display of the effect design as the design of. The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 8a and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized. Further, the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized. In addition, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, and when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the effect display device 9 reminds of the big hit. The combination of is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, in a lower position on the display screen of the effect display device 9, a reserved storage display unit (a combined reserved storage display unit) that displays the total number of the first reserved memory and the second reserved memory (total reserved memory number). , A hold display area (not shown) is provided. In the total pending storage display unit, the number of pending storages can be specified as the pending storage display, for example, by the number of displayed predetermined images (by displaying one pending storage image corresponding to each pending storage information, Specify the number of pending storage.) is displayed. As described above, by providing the total pending storage display unit that displays the total number, it is possible to easily grasp the total number of satisfied execution conditions for which the variable display start condition is not satisfied. In each of the first special symbol hold storage display 18a, the second special symbol hold storage display 18b, and the effect display device 9, the light emission display and the image display for indicating the number of hold storage are hold display, or hold Called memory display.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a special variable winning ball device 20 is provided below the variable winning ball device 15. The special variable winning ball device 20 includes an opening/closing plate, and when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 8a, the specific display result (big hit symbol) on the second special symbol display device 8b. When the open/close plate is controlled to be opened by the solenoid 21 in the specific game state (big hit game state) that occurs when is displayed and displayed, the special winning opening serving as the winning area is opened. The game ball that has won the special winning opening is detected by the count switch 23.

  In the big hit game state, the repetitive continuation control in which the special variable winning ball device 20 repeats the open state and the closed state is performed. In the repeat continuation control, a state in which the special variable winning ball device 20 is opened is called a round. Therefore, the repeat continuation control is also called round control. In the present embodiment, a plurality of types of big hits are provided, and when it is decided to make a big hit, one of the big hit types is selected.

  On the left side of the effect display device 9, there is provided a normal symbol display 10 that variably displays ordinary symbols that can be identified. In this embodiment, the normal symbol display device 10 is realized by a simple and small-sized display device (for example, a 7-segment LED) that can variably display numbers 0-9. That is, the normal symbol display device 10 is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9. Further, the small-sized display is formed, for example, in a rectangular shape.

  When the game ball passes through the gate 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, the variable display of the display of the normal symbol display device 10 is started. And when the stop symbol in the normal symbol display device 10 is a predetermined symbol (hit symbol. For example, symbol "7"), the variable winning ball device 15 is in a closed state which is disadvantageous to the player for a predetermined number of times and a predetermined time. Changes to an open state that is advantageous for the player. In the vicinity of the normal symbol display device 10, there is provided a normal symbol reservation storage display device 41 having a display unit of four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 32. Every time there is a passage of the game ball to the gate 32, that is, every time the game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol reservation storage display 41 increases the number of LEDs to be turned on by one. Then, every time the variable display of the normal symbol display device 10 is started, the number of LEDs to be turned on is reduced by 1.

  Further, an accessory 12 is provided above the effect display device 9. The accessory 12 is located between the game board 6 and the effect display device 9 and can be displaced by the accessory motor 17. The accessory 12 is usually located in a place that is difficult for the player to visually recognize, and moves to a position (for example, a position in front of the effect display device 9) that can be visually recognized by the player when a predetermined effect is executed.

  At the lower part of the game board 6, there is an outlet 26 into which hit balls that have not been won are taken. Further, four speakers 27 are provided on the upper left and right sides and the lower left and right sides of the outside of the game area 7, for producing sound effects and voices as predetermined voice outputs. A frame LED 28 provided on the front frame is provided on the outer periphery of the game area 7.

  In addition, a prepaid card unit (hereinafter, also simply referred to as a “card unit”) that enables a ball lending by inserting a prepaid card is installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1 (not shown).

  In the hit type table of FIG. 2, the jackpot probability after the jackpot gaming state is finished, the base after the jackpot gaming state is finished, the variation time after the jackpot gaming state is finished, and the number of times of opening in the jackpot ( The number of rounds) and the opening time of each round are shown.

  Specifically, in the jackpot gaming state, after the special variable winning ball device 20 is opened, a predetermined ending condition of the opened state (a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) has elapsed in the opened state, or When a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls has been established, the closing condition is established. When the opening end condition is satisfied, the continuation right is generated and the special variable winning ball device 20 is opened again. The generation of the continuation right is repeated until the number of times of opening in the jackpot gaming state reaches 15 rounds (final round), which is a predetermined upper limit value.

  Among the "big hits", after being controlled to the big hit game state, as a special game state, there is a higher probability of being decided to be a big hit compared to the normal state (normal game state that is not the sure change state). The type (class) of the big hit that shifts to (the abbreviation of the probability variation state and also called the high probability state) is called “probable variation big hit”. Further, in the present embodiment, as the special gaming state, when the variation time (variation display period) of the special symbol or the effect symbol is controlled to be a time saving state which is shorter than the non-time saving state in association with the probability variation state There is. The special game state may be controlled to a time saving state independently of the probability variation state.

  In this way, by shifting to the time saving state, the variation time of the special symbol and the effect symbol is shortened, so when the time saving state is reached, an effective starting winning is likely to occur and a jackpot game may be performed. Increase. Note that, of the "big hits", the kind of big hits that are not shifted to the probability changing state after being controlled to the big hit game state for 15 rounds are called "normal big hits".

  Further, as the special game state, the frequency of the variable winning ball device 15 entering the variable winning ball device 15 is increased by increasing the frequency of opening the variable winning ball device 15 in association with the probability changing state or the time saving state. There is a case where the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be in a power control support state that facilitates winning (increasing entry and increasing frequency). Since the power control support state is a high base state as described later, it will be mainly referred to as a high base state in the following description.

  Here, the power control support control will be described. As the electric Chu support control, the variation time of the normal symbol (the time from the start of variation display to the time of deriving and displaying the display result) is shortened to derive and display the display result early (normal symbol shortening control), normal symbol Control to increase the probability that the stop symbol becomes a winning symbol (normal symbol probability variation control), control to lengthen the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 (opening time extension control), and increase the number of times the variable winning ball device 15 is opened. The control (control to increase the number of times of opening) is performed. When such control is performed, the ratio of time during which the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state is higher than when the control is not performed. Therefore, the winning frequency to the second start winning port 14 is increased. And the game ball is easy to start winning (the execution condition of the variable display on the special symbol display devices 8a and 8b and the effect display device 9 is easily established). By this control, the winning frequency to the second starting winning opening 14 increases, so that the gaming state in which the frequency of establishing the second starting condition and/or the execution frequency of the variable display of the second special symbol increases.

  The state (high-frequency state) in which the winning frequency to the second start winning port 14 is increased by the electric Chu support control is the ratio of the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls in accordance with the winning number to the number of shot balls. Since the "base" is in a higher state than when the control is not performed, it is called "high base state". Further, when such control is not performed, it is called "low base state". Further, such control is control for facilitating the winning of the variable winning ball device 15, that is, the variable winning ball device 15 by supporting the winning with the electric tulip.

  In this embodiment, as a term indicating a state of jackpot probability, a "high-probability state (probability variation state)" and a "low-probability state (non-probability variation state)" are used as a term indicating a combination of base states. , "High base state (electricity chew support control state)" and "low base state (non-electricity chew support control state)".

  In addition, in this embodiment, "low-probability low-base state", "low-probability high-base state", and "high-probability high-base state" are used as terms indicating the combination of the state of the jackpot probability and the state of the base. To use. The “low-probability low-base state” is a state in which a state with a big hit probability is a low-probability state, and a base state is a low-base state. The “low-probability high-base state” is a state in which a state with a big hit probability is a low-probability state, and a base state is a high-base state. The “high-probability-high-base state” is a state in which a state with a big hit probability is a high-probability state and a base state is a high-base state.

  As shown in FIG. 2, as the 15-round big hit, a plurality of kinds of big hits, a normal big hit and a probability variation big hit, are provided. The normal jackpot is a jackpot that is controlled to an uncertain variation state, a time saving state, and a high base state (low certainty high base state) after the 15 rounds of the jackpot game state have ended. In normal big hits, the non-probable variation state continues until the next big hit occurs, and the short-time state and the high base state are executed until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times 100 times, and the next big hit. The condition continues until the condition that occurs first, whichever is earlier, is satisfied. It should be noted that the normal big hit may be a big hit controlled to the non-probable variation state, the non-time saving state, and the non-electricity chew support control state (low accurate low base state).

  The probability variation jackpot is a jackpot in which control is performed to transition to the probability variation state, the time saving state, and the high base state (high-probability high base state) after the 15 rounds of the jackpot game state. In the probability variation big hit, such a condition that the high accuracy high base state is executed until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times 100 times or the condition until the next big hit occurs, whichever comes first. It continues for a period of time.

  FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an example of a circuit configuration in the main board (game control board) and the effect control board. The payout control board 37 and the like are also shown in FIG. A game control microcomputer (corresponding to game control means) 560 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the main board 31. The game control microcomputer 560 includes a ROM 54 for storing programs for game control (game progress control), a RAM 55 as a storage unit used as a work memory, a CPU 56 for performing control operations according to the programs, and an I/O port section. Including 57. The game control microcomputer 560 is a 1-chip microcomputer in which the ROM 54 and the RAM 55 are built. The game control microcomputer 560 further includes a random number circuit 503 that generates a hardware random number (random number generated by a hardware circuit).

  Further, the RAM 55 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means, a part or all of which is backed up by a backup power supply created on a power supply board (not shown). That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 55 are saved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot supply power). In particular, at least data according to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (such as a special symbol process flag) and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are stored in the backup RAM.

  In the game control microcomputer 560, the CPU 56 executes control according to the program stored in the ROM 54, so that hereinafter, the game control microcomputer 560 (or the CPU 56) executes (or performs processing). Specifically, the CPU 56 executes control according to a program. This also applies to the microcomputers mounted on other substrates than the main substrate 31.

  The random number circuit 503 is a hardware circuit used to generate a random number for determination to determine whether or not to make a big hit based on the display result of the variable display of the special symbol. The random number circuit 503 updates the numerical data according to the set update rule within the numerical range in which the initial value (for example, 0) and the upper limit value (for example, 65535) are set, and is generated at random timing. Based on the fact that the numerical value data is read (extracted) at the time of starting winning, a random number generating function is provided in which the numerical value data read becomes a random value. Further, the game control microcomputer 560 has a function of setting an initial value of the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503.

  Further, an input driver circuit 58 for giving a detection signal from the gate switch 32a, the first starting opening switch 13a, the second starting opening switch 14a and the count switch 23 to the game controlling microcomputer 560 is also mounted on the main board 31. In addition, the output circuit 59 that drives the solenoid 16 that opens and closes the variable winning ball device 15 and the solenoid 21 that opens and closes the special variable winning ball device 20 that forms the special winning opening in accordance with a command from the game control microcomputer 560 is also main. It is mounted on the substrate 31.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560, the first special symbol display device 8a, the second special symbol display device 8b that displays the special symbol in a variable manner, the normal symbol display device 10 that displays the ordinary symbol in a variable manner, the first special symbol reserved storage. The display control of the display 18a, the second special symbol hold storage display 18b and the normal symbol hold storage display 41 is performed.

  The effect control board 80 is equipped with the effect control microcomputer 100, the ROM 102, the RAM 103, the VDP 109, the I/O port unit 105, and the like. The ROM 102 stores programs and data for effect control such as display control. The RAM 103 is used as a work memory. The ROM 102 and the RAM 103 may be built in the effect control microcomputer 100. The VDP 109 cooperates with the effect control microcomputer 100 to control the display of the effect display device 9.

  The effect control microcomputer 100 instructs the effect control command from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay board 77 that passes the signal only in one direction from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80. In addition to performing the variable display control of the effect display device 9, the display control of the frame LED 28 provided on the frame side is performed via the lamp driver board 35 and the speaker 27 is performed via the audio output board 70. Various effect controls such as controlling the sound output of are performed.

  In addition, the effect control CPU 101 sends an operation detection signal, which is an information signal indicating that the player has operated the trigger button 125 of the stick controller 122, from the trigger sensor 121 to the input port of the I/O port unit 105. Enter via. In addition, the effect control CPU 101 inputs an operation detection signal, which is an information signal indicating that the player has operated the push button 120, from the push sensor 124 via the input port of the I/O port unit 105. To do. In addition, the effect control CPU 101 inputs an operation detection signal, which is an information signal indicating that the player has operated the operation rod of the stick controller 122, from the tilt direction sensor unit 123 to the I/O port unit 105. Enter through the port. Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs a drive signal to the vibrator motor 126 via the output port of the I/O port unit 105 to cause the stick controller 122 to vibrate. Further, the effect control CPU 101 drives the accessory motor 17 via the motor drive circuit (not shown) to operate the accessory 12.

  FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. In FIG. 4, types of random numbers, update ranges, uses, and addition conditions are shown. Each random number is used as follows.

  (1) Random R: A random counter for determining whether to make a big hit. Random R is updated by 1 at 10 MHz, added and updated from 0, and then updated up to 65535, which is the upper limit thereof, and then added and updated again from 0. (2) Random 1 (MR1): determine the type of jackpot (type, normal jackpot, and probability variation jackpot) and the jackpot symbol (for jackpot type determination and jackpot symbol determination). (3) Random 2 (MR2): The type (type) of the variation pattern is determined (for variation pattern type determination). (4) Random 3 (MR3): A variation pattern (variation time) is determined (for variation pattern determination). (5) Random 4 (MR4): It is determined whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol (for normal symbol hit determination). (6) Random 5 (MR5): Determines the initial value of random 4 (for determining random 4 initial value).

  In this embodiment, as the big hit that is the specific game state, a plurality of types including a normal big hit and a probability variation big hit are included. Therefore, when a big hit is determined based on the value of the big hit determination random number (random R), the big hit type is one of these big hits based on the value of the big hit type determination random number (random 1). Determined by type. Further, when the type of big hit is determined, at the same time, the big hit symbol is also determined based on the value of the random number for determining big hit type (random 1). Therefore, the random 1 is also a random number for jackpot symbol determination.

  In addition, the fluctuation pattern is first included in the fluctuation pattern type determined by using the fluctuation pattern type determination random number (random 2) to determine the fluctuation pattern type and using the fluctuation pattern determination random number (random 3). It decides on the fluctuation pattern. As such, in this embodiment, the variation pattern is determined by the two-stage lottery process. The fluctuation pattern type is a group of a plurality of fluctuation patterns grouped according to the characteristics of the fluctuation mode. One or more fluctuation patterns belong to the fluctuation pattern type. The variation pattern type may also be referred to as a variation type.

  In this embodiment, the variation patterns are classified into a normal variation pattern type which is a variation pattern type without reach and a reach variation pattern type which is a variation pattern type with reach.

  Such a variation pattern type is set in such a manner that the selection ratio of the variation pattern type is different between the time saving state and the time saving state when the display result is out of order. When, the fluctuation time is shortened as compared with the case where the time saving state is not set. For example, in the short-time state, in order to shorten the average time of the change time compared to when it is not in the short-time state, the change time of a predetermined change pattern is set shorter than when it is not the short time state, or the change of the most The variation pattern type with the shortest time is selected at a high rate, and even when the reach type is selected, the variation rate of the normal reach with the shortest variation time among the variation pattern types is set to be high. By doing so, the average time of the fluctuation time becomes shorter than when the time saving state is not set.

  By the way, such a variation pattern type is set such that the selection ratio is different when the number of reserved memories of each special symbol to be displayed in variation is greater than or equal to a predetermined number and when it is less than the predetermined number. When the number of reserved storage of each special symbol to be variably displayed is a predetermined number or more, compared with when the number of reserved storage of each special symbol is less than the predetermined number, the number-of-holds shortening control that shortens the variable display time is executed. You may do so. For example, in the number-of-holds-shortening control state, it is set so that the rate of selection of a variation pattern type having a shorter variation display time, such as a normal variation pattern type, is higher than in the case of not in the number-of-holds reduction control state. The average time of the variable display time may be shortened as compared with the case where the holding number reduction control state is not set. Further, in the hold number reduction control, even when the same change pattern type is selected, the change display time itself of the change pattern type may be shortened compared to when the hold number reduction control state is not set.

  Further, the variation pattern may be a one-step determination method in which the variation pattern is determined by one random number lottery, instead of the two-step determination method in which the variation pattern type is determined and then the variation pattern is determined.

  FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram showing a big hit determination table and a big hit type determination table. FIG. 5A is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table. The big hit determination table is a set of data stored in the ROM 54, and is a table in which a big hit determination value to be compared with the random R is set. The big hit judgment table includes a normal time (non-probability change time) big hit judgment table used in a normal state (a game state that is not a probability change state, that is, a non-probability change state), and a probability change time big hit judgment table used in a probability change state.

  In the normal-time jackpot determination table, each numerical value described in the left column of FIG. 5(A) is set as a jackpot determination value, and in the probability variation jackpot determination table, it is described in the right column of FIG. 5(A). Each numerical value is set as a jackpot judgment value. The big hit judgment value set in the big hit judgment table during the probability change is the same as the big hit judgment value set in the normal big hit judgment table (the big hit judgment value in normal time or the first big hit judgment value). Due to the addition of the unique jackpot determination value, a larger number (10 times the number) of jackpot determination values (referred to as a jackpot determination value or second jackpot determination value) than in the probability variation big hit determination table are set. . As a result, the probability variation state is determined to be a big hit with a higher probability than the normal state.

  The CPU 56 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 503 at a predetermined time and compares the extracted value with the value of the big hit judging random number (random R). The big hit judging random number value is shown in FIG. When it matches any of the jackpot determination values shown, it is determined to be a jackpot (normal jackpot or probability variation jackpot) for the special symbol. The “probability” shown in FIG. 5(A) indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit.

  5(B) and 5(C) are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 54. FIG. 5(B) is a case where the jackpot type is determined by using a reserved memory (also referred to as a first reserved memory) based on the fact that the game ball has won the first starting winning opening 13 (variable display of the first special symbol is It is a first special symbol big hit type determination table (for the first special symbol) to be used). FIG. 5(C) is a case where the jackpot type is determined by using a reserved memory (also referred to as a second reserved memory) based on the fact that the game ball has won the second starting winning opening 14 (the variable display of the second special symbol is It is a second special symbol jackpot type determination table used when performed).

  5(B), and each of the first and second special symbol big hit type determination table of FIG. 5(C), when it is determined that the variable display result is a big hit symbol, for big hit type determination Based on the random number (random 1), the type of jackpot is determined to be either "normal jackpot" or "probability variation jackpot", and is referred to for determining a jackpot symbol.

  In the first special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 5(B), a determination value corresponding to each of the "normal jackpot" and the "probability variation jackpot" (a jackpot type determination) Value) is set. In the second special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 5(C), a determination value corresponding to each of the "normal jackpot" and the "probability variation jackpot" (a jackpot type determination is a numerical value that is compared with the value of random 1). Value) is set.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 5(B) and (C), the jackpot type determination value is also used as a determination value (big hit symbol determination value) for determining the jackpot symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The judgment value corresponding to "normal big hit" is also set as the judgment value corresponding to "3" of the big hit symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The determination value corresponding to the "probable variation big hit" is also set as the determination value corresponding to "7" of the big hit symbol of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

  Using the jackpot type determination table, the CPU 56 determines the type corresponding to the jackpot type determination value with which the value of random 1 matches as the jackpot type, and also determines the jackpot pattern with the value of random 1 as the jackpot pattern. To do. Thereby, the big hit type and the big hit symbol corresponding to the big hit type are simultaneously determined.

  The first special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 5(B) and the second special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 5(C) have the same proportion determined for the probability variation jackpot. In such a case, it is not necessary to divide the big hit type determination table between the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Further, as the big hit type, when selecting the big hit type from a plurality of big hit types with different maximum round numbers in the big hit game state, the second special symbol big hit type determination table of FIG. It may be set so that the proportion of selection of the jackpot type having a larger number of rounds is higher than that in the first special symbol jackpot type determination table of (B). In this way, in the high base state, it is advantageous for the player to select the type of big hit, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved. Moreover, the second special symbol big hit type determination table of FIG. 5(C) may be set to have a higher rate of probability variation big hits than the first special symbol big hit type determination table of FIG. 5(B). . By doing so, the variable display of the second special symbol can make the probability of the probability variation big hit higher than the variable display of the first special symbol. Further, the first special symbol big hit type determination table may be higher than the second special symbol big hit type determination table, the ratio determined as the probability variation big hit.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 6, a variation pattern table used in the game control microcomputer 560 to select and determine variation patterns of special symbols and effect symbols will be described. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing, in a tabular form, a fluctuation pattern table used to determine a fluctuation pattern.

  In FIG. 6, (a) shows a determination table for deviation from the normal state, and (b) shows a determination table for deviation from the time saving state. Further, (c) shows a normal big hit time determination table, and (d) shows a probability variation big hit time determination table. The determination tables of FIGS. 6A to 6D are stored in the ROM 54, are selected according to the game state, and are used to determine (determine) the variation pattern type and the variation pattern.

  The determination table shown in FIG. 6 includes a variation pattern type determination table showing the relationship between random 2 and variation pattern types, and a variation pattern determination table showing the relationship between random 3 and variation patterns belonging to each type for each variation pattern type. Including.

  In the columns of “variation pattern type” or “variation pattern” in each table of FIG. 6, “normal” or “normal variation” indicates a normal variation pattern that does not reach.

  In addition, “normal reach” in each table in FIG. 6 indicates a variation pattern of normal reach in which a particularly flashy effect is not executed when the reach state is reached. "Super reach" (SP reach) indicates a variation pattern for performing a reach effect in which a special effect image is displayed when the reach state is reached.

  In addition, as described above, the “super reach” is a variation pattern that has a higher selection rate when a big hit occurs than the “normal reach” and has a high reliability of a big hit. Furthermore, “super reach” is a variation pattern in which the variation time is longer than that of “normal reach” (eg, normal reach 10 seconds, super reach 50 seconds to 80 seconds). In addition, four types of variation patterns are set in the super reach, and the jackpot expectation degree (be it a jackpot Possibility).

  Note that the “expectation degree” is a concept including the expectation degree for a big hit, the expectation degree for a probability change, and the like. Specifically, the degree of expectation (also called reliability) for a big hit is the degree of expectation that a big hit will occur when each reach variation pattern is selected (ratio of big hits). For example, the reach variation is performed 100 times. If a big hit occurs 60 times, the expectation level for the big hit is 60% (the appearance rate (probability) that the big hit appears is 60%). Further, the degree of expectation with respect to the probability change means the degree of expectation of transition to the probability change state (probability of probability change).

  The variation pattern shown in the out-of-range determination table is a variation pattern in which the final display result of the variable display is the display result of “out”. The fluctuation pattern shown in the normal big hit time determination table is a fluctuation pattern in which the final display result of the variable display is the display result of "normal big hit". The variation pattern shown in the probability variation big hit determination table is a variation pattern in which the final display result of the variation display is the display result of "probability variation big hit".

  Based on these pieces of information, for example, the variation pattern “4th super reach (80 seconds)” shown in the “variation pattern” column of FIG. The variation pattern of the fourth super reach executed in seconds” is shown.

  In the table of FIG. 6, the columns labeled “random 2 range” and “variation pattern type” indicate the function as a variation pattern type determination table section showing the relationship between “random 2 range” and “variation pattern type”. This is the column shown. For example, taking FIG. 6A as an example, all the values of random 2 (1-251) are plural for each of the plural fluctuation pattern types such as “normal”, “normal reach”, and “super reach”. It is divided into the numerical range of. For example, in the case of FIG. 6A, if the value of Random 2 extracted at a predetermined timing matches any one of the judgment values assigned to 140 to 229 among the random number values of 1 to 251. , "Normal reach" is determined as the variation pattern type.

  Further, in the table of FIG. 6, the columns described as “random 3 range” and “variation pattern” indicate the function as a fluctuation pattern determination table section showing the relationship between “random 3 range” and “variation pattern”. It is a column. The variation patterns shown in association with each type in the variation pattern type determination table are the variation patterns belonging to each type. For example, taking FIG. 6A as an example, the fluctuation patterns belonging to the type of “super reach” are “first super reach”, “second super reach”, “third super reach”, and “third super reach”. 4 Super reach”.

  All the values of Random 3 (1-220) are allocated to a plurality of numerical ranges and are assigned to each of the plurality of fluctuation patterns corresponding to each fluctuation pattern type. For example, taking FIG. 6A as an example, when it is determined that the variation pattern type of “super reach” is determined, the random number 3 extracted at a predetermined timing is 1 out of the random number values of 1 to 220. When any of the judgment values assigned to ˜70 matches, the fluctuation pattern of “first super reach (50 seconds)” is determined.

  When the variation display result is out of place for the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the determination table is selected as follows in order to determine the variation pattern. In the non-time saving state, when the variation display result is out of alignment, the out of position determination table in the normal state of FIG. 6A is selected. On the other hand, when the variable display result is out of the time saving state, the out of time saving state determination table in FIG. 6B is selected. By using the determination tables of FIGS. 6A and 6B, the reach ratio is constant when the normal state is lost and when the time saving state is lost, regardless of the number of holdings.

  When the variable display result is a big hit for the first special symbol or the second special symbol regardless of whether it is a time saving state, in order to determine the variation pattern, the determination table is selected as follows. When the variation display result is the normal big hit, the normal big hit time determination table of FIG. 6C is selected. When the variation display result is the probability variation big hit regardless of the time saving state, the probability variation big hit time determination table of FIG. 6D is selected.

  In the deviation determination table for the time saving state of FIG. 6B, the variation time of the normal fluctuation is set shorter than that for the deviation determination table for the normal state of FIG. 6A. 6B, the variation time is shorter than the reach variation (including the normal reach variation and the super reach variation) in the normal state deviation determination table of FIG. 6A as compared with the normal state deviation determination table. Normal fluctuations (non-reach deviation fluctuations (variations that cause deviation display results instead of reach)) are high, and the fluctuations that reach longer than normal fluctuations are less likely to be determined. The data is set.

  As a result, compared to the case of the non-time saving state (normal state), in the time saving state, the rate of selection of the variation pattern with the short variation time is higher, so that in the time saving state, the non-time saving state is more likely to be selected. The fluctuation display is performed on average in a shorter fluctuation time than the case. By selecting the determination table in this way, the time saving state can be realized. Further, by setting the normal fluctuation such that the fluctuation time is shorter in the time-saving state than in the non-time-saving state, it is possible to shorten the pending digestion during the time-saving state.

  In the determination tables of FIGS. 6A and 6B, which are selected when there is a deviation, the data is set so that the selection ratio of the type of reach is normal reach>super reach Has been done. On the other hand, in the determination tables of FIG. 6C and FIG. 6D that are selected when the jackpot is a big hit, the selection ratios of the types of reach are selected in the relationship of normal reach<super reach. The data is set. As a result, when the jackpot is hit, the ratio of the reach effect of the super reach (the ratio of the reach effect of the super reach when the reach is selected) is higher than when it is out of reach, so that the reach of the super reach is increased. The production can enhance the player's expectation.

  Further, in the determination table of FIG. 6(d), which is selected when the probability variation big hit of the big hits is made, compared to the determination table of FIG. 6(c) which is selected when the big hit is the normal big hit, the normal reach is achieved. On the other hand, the data is set so that the ratio of selecting the type of super reach production is high. As a result, when the probability variation jackpot is high, the proportion of the reach effect of super reach reached (the proportion of the reach effect of the super reach when the reach is selected) is higher than that of the normal jackpot. By performing the reach effect of the reach, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the probability variation big hit.

  In addition, such a variation pattern, when the total number of reserved storages (total value) of the first special symbol and the second special symbol which are displayed in a variable manner is a predetermined number or more (for example, the total number of reserved storages is 3 or more) When the total number of pending storages is greater than or equal to the predetermined number, the variation time is set to be different from that when the total number of pending storages is less than the predetermined number by setting the selection ratio differently when the total number is less than the predetermined number. You may make it perform the hold|maintenance number shortening control which is shortened. However, even under the condition that the hold number reduction control is executed (for example, the total hold storage number is 3 or more), by keeping the ratio of the reach (including the normal reach and the super reach) constant, the expectation for the reach is maintained. In addition, it is also possible to execute the hold number reduction time reduction control so that the variation time is not shortened only in the super reach among the reach. Furthermore, the number-of-holding time saving control may be executable by selecting a high rate of normal variation having a short variation time, or may be executable by shortening the variation time of each variation pattern itself, The combination may be sufficient.

  FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560. In the game control microcomputer 560, as shown in FIG. 7, various effect control commands are transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 according to the game control state.

  Main commands in FIG. 7 will be described. Command 80XX (H) is a production control command (variation pattern command) for designating a variation pattern of the effect symbol that is variably displayed on the effect display device 9 in response to the variable display of the special symbol (corresponding to each variation pattern XX. ). That is, when a unique number is given to each of the usable fluctuation patterns as shown in FIG. 6, there is a fluctuation pattern command corresponding to each of the fluctuation patterns specified by the number. “(H)” indicates a hexadecimal number. The effect control command for designating the variation pattern is also a command for designating the variation start. Therefore, when the effect control CPU 101 receives the command 80XX(H), the effect control CPU 101 controls the effect display device 9 to start the variable display of effect symbols.

  The commands 8C01(H) to 8C03(H) are display result designating commands indicating whether or not to make a big hit and a big hit type.

  Command 8D01 (H) is a first symbol variation designation command indicating that the variable display of the first special symbol is started. Command 8D02 (H) is a second symbol variation designation command indicating that the variable display of the second special symbol is started. The command 8F00 (H) is a command (designation designation command) for designating the end of the variation of the first and second special symbols.

  The commands A001 to A002 (H) are big hit start designation commands for designating the big hit game state start for each big hit type (normal big hit or probability variation big hit).

  The command A1XX(H) is a special winning opening open designation command which indicates a display during opening of the special winning opening for the number (round) indicated by XX. A2XX(H) is a command after opening the special winning opening indicating that the opening (closing) of the number (round) of the XX number of times is open.

  The commands A301 to A302 (H) are jackpot end designation commands that designate the jackpot gaming state end for each jackpot type (normal jackpot or probability variation jackpot).

  The command A 401 (H) is a first start winning a prize designating command that specifies that the first starting award has been won. The command A402(H) is a second start winning a prize designating command that specifies that the second starting award has been won.

  The command B000(H) is a normal state designation command that designates that the gaming state is the normal state (low probability state). The command B001 (H) is a time saving state designation command for designating that the gaming state is a time saving state (high base state). The command B002(H) is a probability variation state designation command that designates that the gaming state is a probability variation state (high probability state).

  The command C0XX(H) is a total reserved storage number designation command indicating the total reserved storage number. The command C100(H) is a total reserved storage number subtraction designation command indicating that the total reserved storage number is decremented by one. In this embodiment, the command for designating the total number of reserved storages is executed when the game ball is won into the first starting winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14 (for example, when the starting opening switch passing process described later is executed). , To the effect control microcomputer 100. Further, the summed reserved storage number subtraction designation command is sent to the effect control microcomputer 100 at the start of variable display (for example, at the time of execution of a special symbol variable display process described later). The total reserved storage designation command and the reserved storage number subtraction designation command may be used together. For example, the total reserved storage number designation command may be used as a command capable of specifying the reserved storage number after subtraction. It should be noted that commands for specifying the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number are respectively transmitted instead of the total reserved memory number, and the effect control microcomputer 100 causes the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. The total value of and may be specified as the total pending storage number.

  The command C2XX(H) and the command C3XX(H) are results of winning determination such as a big hit determination, a big hit type determination, a variation pattern type determination, etc. at the time of a start winning to the first starting winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14. It is a production control command indicating the contents. Of these, the command C2XX (H) is a symbol designating command indicating whether or not to be a big jackpot in the determination result at the time of winning, and the determination result of the type of the jackpot. Further, the command C3XX(H) is a variation type command indicating a determination result (variation pattern type determination result) of which determination value range the variation pattern type random number value is in the winning determination result. Is.

  In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not to be a big hit at the time of starting winning, whether to be a kind of big hit, and which range of judgment values of the random number for fluctuation pattern type judgment. .. Then, in the EXT data of the symbol designating command, a value designating a big hit and a value designating the type of the big hit are set, and the control for transmitting to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed. The EXT data of the variation type command is set to a value that specifies the range of the determination value as the determination result of the variation pattern type, and the control for transmitting to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed. In this embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 100 can recognize whether or not the display result is a big hit at the time of the start winning, and the type of the big hit, based on the value set in the symbol designating command, The variation pattern type can be recognized based on the variation type command.

  Next, a configuration example of an area (holding storage buffer) for storing data such as random numbers (holding storage data) corresponding to holding storage on the game control microcomputer 560 side will be described. The hold storage buffer is provided in the RAM 55.

  A storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the first reserved storage number is secured in the first reserved storage buffer. In addition, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the second reserved storage number is secured in the second reserved storage buffer. In the first pending storage buffer and the second pending storage buffer, a big hit determination random number (random R) that is a hardware random number, a big hit type determination random number (random 1) that is a software random number, and a fluctuation pattern type determination random number (Random 2) and a random number for fluctuation pattern determination (random 3) are stored.

  Based on the winning in the first starting winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14, the CPU 56 extracts such random number values from the random number circuit 503 and the random counter for generating the software random number, and outputs them to the A process of saving (storing) in the save area of the first pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer is executed. Specifically, these random number values are extracted and stored in the first reserved storage buffer based on the winning of the first starting winning opening 13. Further, based on the winning of the second starting winning opening 14, these random number values are extracted and stored in the second reserved storage buffer.

  Storing the above-described information regarding the starting winning in the first reserved storage buffer or the second reserved storage buffer may be referred to as “reserved storage”. It should be noted that the variation pattern type determination random number (random 2) and the variation pattern determination random number (random 3) are not extracted at the time of starting winning and stored in the storage area in advance, but a variation pattern setting process (special It may be extracted at the time of the start of the fluctuation of the symbol).

  As will be described later, the data thus stored in the hold storage buffer is read at the time of winning the start and used for the pre-reading notice effect, and is read at the start of the variable display and used for the variable display.

  When there is a starting winning prize to the first starting winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14, it is referred to as a symbol designating command, a variation type command, a first (second) starting winning designating command, and a total reserved memory number designating command. Such a command indicating the determination result of the start winning determination process is transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80. In the start winning prize reception command buffer provided in the RAM 103 of the effect control microcomputer 100, the received symbol designating command, variation type command, first (second) starting winning designating command, and total reserved memory number designating command. A storage area for storing data capable of specifying the received command is secured so that various commands such as can be stored in association with each other.

  In this embodiment, the effect control pattern of the effect symbol performed corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the variable display operation of the effect symbol, the reach, corresponding to a plurality of types of variation patterns. It is composed of data indicating the control contents of various effect operations such as effect display operation in effect, or various effect operations not accompanied by variable display of effect symbols. In addition, the notice production control pattern is composed of data or the like showing the control content of the production operation which is the notice production executed corresponding to the notice patterns prepared in advance. Various effect control patterns correspond to various effect operations executed according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and are composed of data indicating the control contents thereof.

  Next, the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the game control microcomputer 560 on the main board 31 executes a predetermined main process, a timer interrupt is periodically performed every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) to execute the timer interrupt process. By doing so, various game controls can be executed.

  In the main processing, for example, necessary initial setting processing, normal time initializing processing, game state recovery processing other than normal time, random number circuit setting processing (initializing the random number circuit 503), display random number updating processing (variation pattern) Type determination, update processing of various random numbers such as fluctuation pattern determination), and random number update processing for initial value (update processing of initial value of count value of random number generation counter for normal symbol determination) and the like are executed.

  FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process. When the timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 executes the timer interrupt process of steps S (hereinafter, simply referred to as “S”) 20 to S34 shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power-off detection process is performed to detect whether a power-off signal has been output (whether the power-on signal has been turned on) (S20). Then, the detection signals of the gate switch 32a, the first starting port switch 13a, the second starting port switch 14a, and the count switch 23 are input through the input driver circuit 58, and the states thereof are determined (switch process: S21). .

  Next, the CPU 56 is a first special symbol display device 8a, a second special symbol display device 8b, a normal symbol display device 10, a first special symbol reserved memory display device 18a, a second special symbol reserved memory display device 18b, a normal symbol. A display control process for controlling the display of the pending storage display 41 is executed (S22). About the first special symbol display device 8a, the second special symbol display device 8b and the normal symbol display device 10, a control for outputting a drive signal to each display device according to the contents of the output buffer set in S32 and S33. To execute.

  In addition, a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating each random number for determination such as a random number for ordinary symbol determination and a random number for determining jackpot type used for game control is performed (determination random number update process: S23). .. The CPU 56 further performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number (initial value random number update process, display random number update process: S24, S25).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a special symbol process process (S26). In the special symbol process process, the first special symbol display device 8a, the second special symbol display device 8b and the special symbol process flag for controlling the special winning opening in a predetermined order are executed according to the corresponding process, and the special symbol process. The value of the flag is updated according to the game state.

  Then, a normal symbol process process is performed (S27). In the normal symbol process processing, the CPU 56 executes the corresponding process according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display device 10 in a predetermined order, and the value of the normal symbol process flag is in the gaming state. Update accordingly.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a process of sending a production control command to the production control microcomputer 100 (production control command control process: S28). Further, the CPU 56 performs an information output process for outputting data such as big hit information, starting information, probability variation information, etc. supplied to the hall management computer (S29).

  Further, the CPU 56 executes prize ball processing for setting the number of prize balls based on the detection signals of the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a and the count switch 23 (S30).

  In this embodiment, the RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided, but the CPU 56 relates to ON/OFF of the solenoid in the RAM area corresponding to the output state of the output port. The content is output to the output port (S31: output process).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs special symbol display control processing for setting special symbol display control data for performing special symbol effect display according to the value of the special symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data ( S32).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a normal symbol display control process for setting the normal symbol display control data for performing the effect display of the normal symbol in the output buffer for setting the normal symbol display control data according to the value of the normal symbol process flag ( S33). Further, the CPU 56 outputs the drive signal in S22 in accordance with the display control data set in the output buffer to execute the effect display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display device 10.

  After that, the interrupt permission state is set (S34), and the process is terminated. According to the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is activated every predetermined time.

  FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing the special symbol process process (S26). In the special symbol process process, a process for controlling the first special symbol display device 8a or the second special symbol display device 8b and the special winning opening is executed. In the special symbol process process, the starting port switch passing process is executed (S312). Then, any one of S300 to S307 is performed according to the internal state.

  In the game control microcomputer 560, the RAM 55 stores the pending storage data (first pending storage data) such as the big hit determination random number obtained based on the starting winning into the first starting winning opening 13, as described above. A first reserved storage buffer, and a second reserved storage buffer for storing reserved storage data (second reserved storage data) such as a big hit determination random number obtained based on a winning start to the second starting winning opening 14 Is provided. A storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the number of storages of each pending storage is secured in each of the pending storage buffers.

  In the starting opening switch passage processing, if the first starting opening switch 13a is turned on, the number of stored first reserved storage data is provided on condition that the first reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value (for example, 4). The value of the first reserved storage number counter that counts the number is incremented by 1, and numerical data (for example, a big hit determination random number, a variation pattern type determination random number, and a variation pattern determination are obtained from a random number circuit 503 or a counter for generating a software random number. Random numbers) are extracted and stored (stored) in the storage area of the first pending storage buffer. Further, the value of the total pending storage number counter is incremented by 1, and a process of storing (storing) data indicating “first” in the pending specific area corresponding to the value of the total pending storage number counter after totaling is executed. On the other hand, if the second starting opening switch 14a is turned on, the number of stored second reserved storage data is counted on the condition that the second reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value (for example, 4). The value of the reserved memory number counter is incremented by 1, and numerical data (for example, a big hit determination random number, a variation pattern type determination random number, and a variation pattern determination random number) are extracted from a random number circuit 503 or a counter for generating a software random number. Then, a process of storing (storing) them in the storage area of the second reserved storage buffer is executed. Further, the value of the total pending storage number counter is incremented by 1, and a process of storing (storing) data indicating “second” in the pending specific area corresponding to the value of the total pending storage number counter after totaling is executed.

  The processing of S300 to S307 is the following processing. The special symbol normal process (S300) is a process of determining whether or not the display result of the variable display is a big hit, and determining a big hit type in the case of a big hit. The fluctuation pattern setting process (S301) determines a fluctuation pattern (a fluctuation pattern type determination random number and a fluctuation pattern determination using the fluctuation pattern determination random number), and measures a fluctuation time according to the determined fluctuation pattern. Is a process for performing control such as the start of timing of the variable time timer for.

  The display result designation command transmission process (S302) is a process for controlling the production control microcomputer 100 to transmit a display result designation command. The special symbol variation process (S303) is a process of advancing the process to the special symbol stop process when the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern setting process elapses. Special symbol stop process (S304), the variation display in the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b when the passage of the variation time corresponding to the determined variation pattern is timed by the variation time timer It is a process of stopping and deriving and displaying a stop symbol.

  The special winning opening opening pre-processing (S305) is processing for performing control of opening the special winning opening in the special variable winning a prize ball device 20 according to the type of the big hit. The special winning opening opening process (S306) confirms the control of transmitting the effect control command for the round display effect in the big hit game state to the effect control microcomputer 100, and the establishment of the closing condition of the special winning opening. This is processing for performing processing and the like. If the closing condition for the special winning opening is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the process proceeds to the pre-opening processing for the special winning opening (S305). When all rounds have been completed, the process shifts to the big hit ending process (S307). The big hit ending process (S307) is a process for causing the effect control microcomputer 100 to perform display control for notifying the player that the big hit game state has ended.

  Next, the operation of the effect control microcomputer 100 will be described. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the effect control main processing executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) mounted on the effect control board 80.

  When the power is turned on, the effect control CPU 101 starts execution of effect control main processing. In the production control main processing, first, initialization processing for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing a timer for determining the production control activation interval (for example, 2 ms) is performed (S701). ). After that, the effect control CPU 101 shifts to the loop processing for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (S702). When the timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 101 sets the timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the effect control main process, the effect control CPU 101 clears the flag (S703) and executes the following effect control process.

  In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 first analyzes the received effect control command and sets data such as a flag that can specify what the received effect control command is a command to instruct. Processing (for example, processing for storing data that can specify the received command in various command storage areas provided in the RAM 103) is performed (command analysis processing: S704). Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs effect control process processing (S705). In the effect control process process, in order to perform various effects such as variable display of effect symbols on the effect display device 9 in accordance with the content of the effect control command analyzed in S704, the current control among the processes corresponding to the control state is performed. A process corresponding to the state (production control process flag) is selected to execute production control.

  Next, a random number used by the production control microcomputer 100 (SR1-1 for determining the left stop symbol of the effect symbol, SR1-2 for determining the middle stop symbol of the effect symbol, SR1-3 for determining the right stop symbol of the effect symbol) Etc.) is executed to execute a random number update process for updating the count value of the counter (S706). Each of such random numbers SR1-1 to SR1-3 is generated by the count of a random counter that updates the count value by software, and each is cyclically updated within a predetermined range, and each of them is updated. It is used as a random number by being extracted at a specified timing.

  Next, a hold storage display control process for controlling the display state of the hold display in the hold display area (moving, deleting, etc. of the hold display) is executed (S707).

  By performing such effect control main processing, in the effect control microcomputer 100, the effect display device 9, various lamps, and the effect display device 9 are transmitted according to the effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 and received. By controlling the effect devices such as the speakers 27L and 27R, various effect controls according to the game state are performed.

  FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the effect control process process (S705) in the effect control main process shown in FIG. In the effect control process process, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not to execute the prefetch effect, and executes the prefetch effect process (S700) for selecting the type of the prefetch effect, and then the value of the effect control process flag. Depending on the, any one of S800 to S807 is performed.

  In the production control process processing, the following processing is executed. In the production control process process, the display state of the production display device 9 is controlled and the variable display of the production symbol is realized, but the control regarding the variable display of the production symbol in synchronization with the variation of the first special symbol is also the second special symbol. The control relating to the variable display of the effect symbol in synchronization with the change of is also executed in one effect control process process.

  The pre-reading effect process (S700) is a process of performing pre-reading determination such as whether to execute the pre-reading effect, and determining an effect mode when executing the pre-reading effect. Look-ahead production is, before the order of the variable display (symbol fluctuation) of the special symbol based on certain reserved information (reserved storage information) comes, the reserved information is pre-read and the fluctuation of the special symbol based on the reserved information. It is a production technique such as judging the contents of the display and giving an advance notice in advance of how the variable display of the future special symbol will be. For example, when the hold information is a big hit, before the variable display by the hold information is executed, the big hit may occur afterwards based on the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the hold information. An effect such as giving a notice is performed as a look-ahead effect. Hereinafter, the variable display based on the hold information that is the target of the prefetching effect is referred to as “target variable display”.

  The variation pattern command reception waiting process (S800) is a process of confirming whether or not the variation pattern command is received from the game control microcomputer 560. If the variation pattern command has been received, the process proceeds to effect symbol variation start processing.

  The effect symbol variation start process (S801) is a process for controlling so that the variable display of the effect symbol (decorative symbol) is started. The effect symbol fluctuating process (S802) is a process of controlling the switching timing of each fluctuating state (fluctuation speed) forming the fluctuating pattern. The effect symbol variation stop process (S803) is a process of stopping the variable display of the effect symbol (decorative symbol) and deriving and displaying the display result of the variable symbol (final stop symbol).

  The big hit display process (S804) is a process of performing display control such as control for displaying a fanfare effect for notifying the effect display device 9 of the occurrence of the big hit after the end of the variable time. The in-round process (S805) is a process for performing display control during the round. When the round end condition is satisfied, if the final round has not ended, the process proceeds to round post-processing, and if the final round has ended, the jackpot end process proceeds. The post-round processing (S806) is processing for performing display control between rounds. When the round start condition is satisfied, the process shifts to the in-round process. The big hit end effect process (S807) is a process of performing display control for notifying the player that the big hit game state has ended in the effect display device 9.

  Process control CPU101, from the start of the variable display to the stop of the variable display, and during the predetermined performance control period from the start of the big hit game state to the end of the big hit game state, the process stored in the ROM102 The production device (production component) such as the production display device 9 is controlled according to the process data set in the table.

  The process table is composed of process timer set values and data in which a plurality of combinations of display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data are collected. In the display control execution data, data and the like indicating the form of each variation that constitutes the variation mode during the variation time (variation display time) of the variation display of the effect design (decoration pattern) are described. Specifically, the data related to the change of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is described. Further, the process timer set value is set with the change time in the form of the change. The effect control CPU 101 refers to the process table, and performs control to display effect symbols in a variation mode set in the display control execution data only for the time set in the process timer set value. Such a process table is prepared according to each variation pattern.

[Identification information]
Next, the identification information used in this embodiment will be described. In the present embodiment, the effect display device 9 variably displays effect symbols as a plurality of types of identification information capable of identifying each. The effect design as the identification information is composed of numeral information (number) as the first information and decoration information (character) as the second information. An image showing a number as the first information and an image showing a character as the second information are in one-to-one correspondence with each other. The first information may be Chinese characters, English characters, predetermined marks or symbols, etc. The second information may be an effect display other than the character, and may be a decorative display that matches the motif of the first information.

  FIG. 12 is a diagram showing the relationship between the first information and the second information. As shown in FIG. 12, "character A" is associated with the number "1", "character B" is associated with the number "2", and is associated with the number "3". Then, "character C" is associated, "character D" is associated with the numeral "4", "character E" is associated with the numeral "5", and "character E" is associated with the numeral "5". "Character F" is associated with "6", "Character G" is associated with number "7", and "Character H" is associated with number "8". , "Character I" is associated with the number "9".

  The identification information display pattern includes a first display pattern that displays numeric information (numerals) without displaying decoration information (characters) and a second display pattern that displays numeric information (numerals) and decoration information (characters). Is provided. The numerical information (numerals) as the first information and the decoration information (characters) as the second information are changed in display mode by changing to the first display pattern or the second display pattern in the variable display. ing. A change in the display mode of the number as the first information and the character as the second information in the variable display will be described below.

[Regarding display mode of variable display]
FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a mode of variable display. In particular, FIG. 13 shows a display mode at the time of shortening variation. At the time of shortening change, all three symbols start changing at the same time, and all symbols stop changing at the same time within a short change time. On the other hand, at the time of normal fluctuation, the fluctuations are started simultaneously for the three symbols, and the fluctuation is stopped in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol. It should be noted that at the time of shortening variation, the same symbols as those at the time of normal variation may be stopped, or the symbols may start moving one by one at the start of variation.

  FIG. 13 shows the passage of time in the variable display in the order of FIGS. FIG. 13A shows the display screen of the effect display device 9 at the start of fluctuation. At the start of fluctuation shown in FIG. 13A, the effect symbol is stopped, and indicates a state immediately before fluctuation display is started. On the display screen of the effect display device 9, an effect pattern is displayed as identification information formed of numbers and characters. The effect design formed of numbers and characters is displayed in a wide display range on the display screen of the effect display device 9. Moreover, the display range of the number and the character is wider than that of the character.

  As shown in FIG. 13(b), the effect symbol formed by the number and the character as shown in FIG. 13(a) becomes only the number as the variation disclosure time symbol action. In this way, at the start of fluctuation, after the effect design starts to move downward, the variable display by the numeral which is the first display pattern is started. In FIGS. 13(a) to 13(b), after the movement at the start of variation such as the character is enlarged, the character is erased, the number becomes larger than before the variation starts, and only the downward numbers are used. The variable display is executed. FIG. 13C shows a display mode of the effect symbol that is changing. The downward arrow indicates that the numbers are moving downward.

  FIG. 13D shows the symbol action when the variable display of the effect symbol is stopped. At the time of variable stop, an operation is performed in which the three numbers that have been changing at high speed stop at the stop position in the center of the display screen. After that, the three numerical symbols move downward from the stop position of the symbol. As the variable stop time symbol action at this time, the characters B, C, and H viewed the screen of the effect display device 9 from the front so as to push down the symbol at the stop position shown by the dotted line in FIG. An effect that is displayed so as to fly forward from the depth direction is executed. Along with the effect, the numbers are further moved downward and displayed in a reduced display mode.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 13(f), when the fluctuation is stopped, the effect design is displayed in the second display pattern including the numbers and the characters. Here, the display mode at the time of changing from the second display pattern consisting of numbers and characters to the first display pattern consisting of only numbers as the variation start symbol action, and the first display consisting of only numbers as the variation stop symbol action. The display mode when changing from the pattern to the second display pattern consisting of numbers and characters is different. For example, when the fluctuation starts, the character is enlarged and displayed forward, and when the character disappears, when the fluctuation stops, the character appears forward from the depth direction (back) when the screen of the effect display device 9 is viewed from the front. The display mode is different from the movement of pushing down the numbers. By doing so, it is possible to preferably display the numbers and the characters.

  The movement at the time of fluctuation stop differs depending on the characters A to I, but the movement at the time of starting fluctuation may be common to all symbols. In this way, since the three symbols start moving at the same time when the fluctuation starts, the symbol actions can be unified and the appearance can be improved.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 13, the size of the numbers displayed in the second display pattern is different from the size of the numbers displayed in the first display pattern. For example, the size of the numbers displayed when the fluctuation starts and when the fluctuation stops displayed by the second display pattern has a smaller display range than the size of the changing numbers displayed by the first display pattern. In this way, when the fluctuation starts or stops, the player can be made to pay attention to the display mode consisting of numbers and characters, and during the fluctuation display, only the numbers are displayed in a display range larger than when the fluctuation stops. By performing the variable display, it is possible to easily recognize the transition of the effect design during the variable display, and it is possible to suitably display the numbers and the characters.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 13, as a symbol action at the time of fluctuation stop, the effect of stopping the variable display is executed by a pattern in which the character is displayed larger than the numeral by moving the number downward. In this way, the display mode when displaying numbers and characters can be made interesting, and numbers and characters can be displayed appropriately.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 13, when the variable display is stopped, the display is performed so that the character appears wider than the display range of the numbers before the stop. By doing so, it is possible to reduce a feeling of strangeness when the first display pattern is changed to the second display pattern. Therefore, it is possible to preferably display the numbers and the characters.

  As shown in FIGS. 13(d) and 13(e), as a variation stop symbol action, an effect is displayed in which the character is displayed so as to jump forward from the depth direction when the effect display device 9 is viewed from the front. To be done. By doing so, a powerful display using the character can be performed.

  Further, there is a correspondence relationship between numbers and characters as shown in FIG. 12, and as shown in FIG. 13, variable display is stopped in a pattern for displaying characters according to numbers. In this way, different characters will appear according to the numbers, so that the numbers and characters can be displayed appropriately.

[Regarding the pattern display pattern when non-reach is lost]
FIG. 14 is a timing chart of the symbol display pattern at the time of non-reach. The variable display shown in FIG. 13 is executed at the timing shown in FIG. At time t0, the variable display is started (see FIG. 13A). Next, the fluctuation start action is executed from time t0 to t1 (see FIG. 13B). In the action at the start of variation, the effect design consisting of the number and the character is only the number, and the variation display in which the number moves downward is executed. After that, in the period of T1, variable display using only numbers is executed (see FIG. 13C).

  From t2 to t3 after T1, the variation stop time symbol action is executed (see FIGS. 13D and 13E). In the variation stop time symbol action, when the symbol displayed only by numbers moves below the stop position when the variation stops, when the character views the screen of the effect display device 9 from the front in the empty space. The effect of jumping forward from the depth direction of is executed. Further, in the variable stop symbol action, when the number moves downward, the character is displayed larger than the number. Then, at t3, the variable display is stopped by the second display pattern consisting of numbers and characters (see FIG. 13(f)).

  As shown in FIG. 14, a first change effect of changing only numbers from numbers to characters is executed as an action at fluctuation stop, and a second change effect of changing only numbers to numbers from characters and characters is performed as an action at change start. Run. The execution modes are different between the first change effect and the second change effect. In the variable stop pattern action executed as the first change effect, the character jumps forward from the depth direction when the screen of the effect display device 9 is viewed from the front, the number moves downward, and the character is more than the number. In the variation start symbol action that is displayed in a large size and is executed as the second change effect, the characters are erased from the numbers and the characters, and only the numbers displayed larger than before the change fluctuate downward. By doing so, it is possible to preferably display the numbers and the characters.

[About the pattern display pattern at SP reach jackpot]
Next, a pattern display pattern when super reach (SP reach) occurs and a big hit is described. FIG. 15 is a timing chart of the SP reach jackpot symbol display pattern. At time t0, the variable display is started. Next, the fluctuation start action is executed from time t0 to t1. In the action at the start of variation, the effect design consisting of the number and the character is only the number, and the variation display in which the number moves downward is executed. After that, in the period of T1, variable display using only numbers is executed.

  After that, at t2, as a symbol action when the left symbol variation stops, the effect design changes from the first display pattern consisting of only numbers to the second display pattern consisting of numbers and characters, and the state is temporarily stopped (the symbol is not completely stopped. Then, it moves slightly up and down). The numbers and the movement of the character at this time are the same as those in the above-described action at the time of fluctuation stop. Next, at t3, as a right symbol fluctuation stop action, the effect design changes from the first display pattern consisting of only numbers to the second display pattern consisting of numbers and characters, and the state is temporarily stopped. The numbers and the movements of the character at this time are the same as those in the above-described action at the time of fluctuation stop.

  Then, the reach formation action is executed from the state of t3 to t4. In the reach formation action, an effect of greatly moving the character displayed as the second display pattern is executed. For example, an effect of rotating the character in the horizontal direction after the player has reached the reach state is executed, so that the effect of showing the front and the back of the character is executed. It should be noted that the action of the action during the reach formation of the character may be different for each character. Also, the movement of the character may be changed according to the jackpot expectation. In addition, the numeric symbols may be left as they are at the stages of t2 and t3 until reaching the reach state, and the left and right numeric symbols (reach symbols) may be the second display pattern consisting of the numbers and the characters at the timing of t4.

  After that, the middle symbol scrolls at high speed from the normal reach effect that is executed only with the numerical symbols, and at t5, the reach develops to the SP reach. When developing to SP reach, the effect symbol shown by a number is displayed as a small symbol in a reduced display mode at the corner (for example, the right corner) of the screen of the effect display device 9.

  In the period of T2 after developing to SP reach, the small symbol action pattern is executed. In the period of the small symbol action pattern, the SP reach effect is executed, and the effect that the small symbol moves drastically is executed. For example, during the small symbol action pattern, an effect in which the small symbol bounces up and down or an effect of rotating in the vertical and horizontal directions may be executed in accordance with the effect sound that flows in the SP reach effect. Then, at t6, the fact that the SP reach has ended and the big hit has been displayed is displayed by the symbol arrangement of only the numbers which are enlarged from the small symbols and become the normal size.

  The pattern of the small symbol action may be changed depending on the type of SP reach (first super reach to fourth super reach, etc.). Further, the operation of the small symbol may be different depending on the type of music played during SP reach. Further, the movement of the small symbol may be changed during the SP reach. Further, the operation mode of the small symbols may be changed depending on the degree of expectation of a big hit. Further, the small symbol may be displayed before the SP reach is developed, and the operation mode of the small symbol may be different before and after the SP reach development depending on the type of the SP reach. By doing so, the manner of operation of the small symbols is diversified, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  After that, at t7, an effect of returning from the SP reach background to the normal background is executed. Furthermore, after that, the symbols stop changing and are displayed in the second display pattern consisting of the numbers and the characters from the first display pattern of only the numbers until the fixed display (the state in which the symbols are completely stopped) is reached. Executes the decided action. As the character deciding operation, for example, an effect is shown in which the character makes a V sign and the number which is the jackpot display result is confirmed.

  As shown in FIG. 15, since the character moves greatly as an action during reach formation, the character's movement can be noticed, and the numbers and characters can be displayed appropriately.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 15, the symbols are aligned only with the numbers at the end of the SP reach, and the determination operation is performed with the numbers and the characters at the time of final display after returning to the normal background. By doing so, it is possible to provide a display mode of the effect design suitable for each scene of the effect, and it is possible to suitably display the numbers and the characters.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 15, as the small symbol action pattern B, an effect of violently moving the small symbol according to the effect sound during SP reach is executed. By doing so, it is possible to preferably display the numbers as the small symbols reduced and displayed.

  Before the SP reach, the small symbols may not be displayed. Specifically, before the SP reach is developed, it is possible to simply perform the effect of leaving the reach with only the numbers, and thereafter, when the SP reach is developed, the numerical symbol may be displayed as a small symbol.

  Next, a process for determining a symbol display pattern and the like will be described. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation start process (S801) in the effect control process process. In the effect symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 101 performs the following process.

  In the effect symbol variation start processing, it is confirmed whether or not it is determined that the variation display result is out of alignment (S601). Whether or not it is determined to be out is determined by, for example, whether or not the display result 1 designation command is stored in the display result designation command storage area. If it is determined to be out of alignment, it is confirmed whether or not a command corresponding to the non-reach fluctuation pattern is received as the fluctuation pattern command (S602). Whether or not the command corresponding to the non-reach fluctuation pattern is received is determined by, for example, the data stored in the fluctuation pattern command storage area.

  When it is determined that the command corresponding to the non-reach variation pattern has been received, the display result of the outlier that does not reach is determined as the final stop of the effect symbol using the outlier symbol determination data table stored in the ROM 102 (S604). , S616. In the outlier symbol determination data table, numerical data of SR1-1 to SR1-3 is associated with each of the plurality of types of effect symbols.

  In the processing of S604, numerical data (random number) is extracted from each of SR1-1 to SR1-3 at a predetermined timing, and a symbol table corresponding to the extracted numerical data is used for the left and the middle, respectively, using the outlier symbol determination data table. , It is determined as a combination of stop symbols that result in the variable display of the right effect symbols. In this way, when determining a combination of non-reach outliers, if the stop symbol corresponding to the extracted random number happens to coincide with the combination of the jackpot symbols, it is corrected to be a combination of outliers (for example, Each stop symbol is determined by correcting the right symbol by shifting it by one symbol). In addition, when the stop symbol corresponding to the extracted random number accidentally becomes a reach symbol, correction is made so as to be a combination of non-reach deviating symbols (for example, correction by shifting the right symbol by one symbol) and each stop symbol. Is determined.

  When it is determined that it is not the non-reach variation pattern in the processing of S602 (when it is determined to be the reach variation pattern), the stop symbol of the effect symbol that constitutes the combination of the reach symbol is determined (S605), and the process proceeds to S616. In the process of S605, numerical data (random number) is extracted from each of SR1-1 to SR1-3 at a predetermined timing, and a symbol corresponding to the random number extracted from SR1-1 is used by using the falling symbol determination data table. The symbols corresponding to the random numbers that match the value of the counter extracted from SR1-2 are determined as the stop symbols of the middle symbols, which are determined as the stop symbols of the left and right effect symbols forming the reach state. Further, also in this case, when it happens to be a combination of big hit symbols, each stop symbol is determined by correcting so as to be a combination of outlying symbols (for example, correction by shifting the middle symbol by one symbol).

  In addition, when it is not determined in the process of S601 to be a deviation (when it is determined to be a big hit) (N of S601), the effect control CPU 101 determines the big hit symbol according to the type of the big hit. The stop symbols of the effect symbols forming the combination are determined (S603), and the process proceeds to S616.

  In S603, the combination of winning symbols is determined according to the type of big hit as follows. Based on which of the display result 2 specified command and the display result 3 specified command is stored in the display result specific command storage area, the type of big hit from the probability variation big hit and the normal big hit When it is determined that it is determined to be a probability jackpot, numerical data (random number) is extracted from SR1-1 at a predetermined timing, and a combination of SR1-1 and a probability jackpot pattern (for example, left, Use the data table (probability variation big hit symbol determination table) in which the relationship between the middle and right is a combination of odd-numbered squares such as "7, 7, 7"), and use one of the probability variation jackpot symbols from the extracted values. The combination of is selected and determined. Further, when it is determined that it is determined to be a normal big hit, numerical data (random number) is extracted from SR1-1 at a predetermined timing, and a combination of SR1-1 and a normal big hit symbol (for example, left, middle, The right is a combination of even-numbered ditches such as "4, 4, 4") and a data table (normal big hit symbol determination table) in which a relationship is set, and a combination of any of the normal big hit symbols from the extracted values Select and decide. The symbol thus determined is used as the final stop symbol which is the variable display result before being controlled to the big hit game state.

  Next, after performing an effect setting process (S616) that performs a process for setting various effects in the variable display, the process proceeds to S617. In the effect setting process, a symbol display pattern or the like is determined based on the type of symbol determined in S603 to S605. At the time of determining the symbol display pattern, depending on whether the current variation display is out of normal variation, out of shortening variation, involves reach, or develops into SP reach, etc. The display pattern and display mode of the symbol are determined. It should be noted that these pieces of information may be determined by the variation pattern designation command stored in the command storage area provided in the storage area of the RAM 103.

  In S617, the effect control pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of kinds of effect control patterns. In S617, the pattern variation control pattern table according to the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command, and the various production control (production operation) patterns designated by the production control pattern of the production determined in S616. Of the plurality of types of symbol variation control patterns stored in, the production control pattern corresponding to the specified various production operation patterns is selected and determined as the use pattern.

  In the control pattern table stored in the ROM 102, for example, the effect display in the period from the start of the fluctuation of the effect symbol determined in the process of S616 to the stop display of the final effect symbol which is the final effect symbol. Data indicating the control content of various effect operations such as effect display operation of effect symbols in the display area of the device 9, effect display operation in reach effect, effect display operation in effect of pseudo-link, and effect display operation in notice effect. Plural types are stored as the pattern variation control patterns.

  Further, each symbol variation control pattern, for example, production control process timer set value, production control process timer judgment value, production display control data, voice control data, lamp control data, and end code such as variation display of production symbols. It includes control data for controlling various production operations in accordance with the contents, and the contents of various production controls, the switching timing of production control, and the like are set in time series.

  Next, a process table corresponding to the effect control pattern selected in S617 is selected (S618). Then, the process timer (production setting process timer) in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (S619).

  After executing the processing of S619, according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1), a rendering device (a rendering display device 9 as a rendering component, a rendering component Control of various lamps and the speaker 27) as a part for production is started (S620). For example, according to the display control execution data, a command is output to the VDP 109 in order to display an image (including the effect symbol) according to the variation pattern on the effect display device 9. In addition, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp driver board 35 in order to perform lighting/extinguishing control of light emitters such as various LEDs. Further, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound output board 70 in order to output sound from the speaker 27.

  Then, a value corresponding to the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern command is set in the fluctuation display time timer (S621), and the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the effect symbol fluctuation process (S802). A symbol variation start process is executed (S622). Then, the effect design variation start process ends.

[Other effects]
In the above-described embodiment, the following effects may be executed. For example, a full-screen notice effect may be executed. The full-screen notice effect is a blackout effect in which a cover image such as a darkened image DG is displayed on the entire display screen of the effect display device 9 at the start of variation to make it difficult to visually recognize the display mode of the decorative pattern (effect pattern). It is a notice effect that covers the screen. The covering image is not limited to the dark image DG or the black image, and may be an image of a predetermined color or pattern such as an image of a light emission mode or an image of a freeze mode, and a display pattern of a decorative pattern (particularly It is only necessary that the display contents of the decorative pattern are images that are difficult or invisible. The predetermined notice effect such as the full-screen notice effect may be a panel type (panel display format) step-up notice, cut-in notice, story notice, mini-game notice, development notice, etc. Or it is a notice effect displayed in a part (at least a part where the decorative pattern can be hidden), and at least the decorative pattern (for example, the display form or display contents of the decorative pattern) is completely invisible (transparency is zero). It may be a notice effect that makes it invisible, or a notice effect that makes it difficult to see, such as the display screen and the decorative pattern are transparent (low transparency).

  With reference to FIG. 17 and FIG. 18, an example of the case where the symbol advance notice effect and the reverse variation in the case of the presence or absence of the full-screen notice effect are displayed will be described. FIG. 17 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the variation of the decorative pattern and each notice effect, etc. In (A), there is no execution of the full screen notice effect, and in (B), there is the execution of the full screen notice effect. .. FIG. 18 shows a performance execution example in the case shown in FIG. 17 in the start period of the super reach variation display. Specifically, FIGS. 18(A), (B1) to (E1) are examples of performance execution in the case of FIG. 17(A), and FIGS. 18(A), (B2) to (E2) are shown in FIG. It is an example of performance execution in the case of B).

  As shown in FIG. 17(A), regarding the variation display of the decorative design, the backward variation of all the decorative patterns is started at the start of the variation (timing T01), and at the end of the backward variation (timing T03). After the change of the decorative pattern in the forward direction is started, it becomes a high-speed change, and thereafter, the change of the left and right decorative patterns is decelerated, and the reach display mode is established (reach is established), and the reach effect is executed. Further, regarding each notice effect, in FIG. 17A, it is determined that the full-screen notice effect is not executed, and at the timing T01, the reverse direction start display of the decorative symbol and the symbol notice effect are started. . The symbol notice effect ends at timing T02, and the backward fluctuation ends at timing T03. At the end of this backward movement (timing T03), the forward movement of the decorative pattern is started. Looking at the effect execution example at this time, as shown in FIG. 18(A), from the state in which the decorative pattern is confirmed and displayed at the reference position Ref in the previous variable display, as shown in FIG. 18(B1), In the opposite direction (upward direction) opposite to the direction (downward direction), a symbol advance notice effect as shown in FIG. 18(B1), that is, a predetermined color (for example, blue, green) around the decorative pattern is started. , An aura (backlight) image G is displayed. Then, at the end of the reverse direction fluctuation shown in FIG. 17A (timing T03), the reverse fluctuation of the decorative pattern is stopped as shown in FIG. 18C1, and the decoration is changed as shown in FIG. 18D1. The variation of the symbol in the forward direction is started, and the decorative symbol is variably displayed in the forward direction beyond the reference position Ref shown in FIG. 18(E1).

  On the other hand, in FIG. 17B, since it is determined that the full-screen notice effect is executed, the symbol notice effect is changed from the timing T01 as the initial value to the timing T03. Looking at the effect execution example at this time, the full-screen notice effect (blackout effect) is started as shown in FIG. 18(B2) and is included in the full-screen notice effect as shown in FIG. 18(C2). A notification image such as "Chance!" is displayed, and after the end of the full-screen notice effect of Fig. 18(C2), that is, when the forward change of the decorative design is started as shown in Fig. 18(D2), the design The notice production has been changed to start. That is, the start of the symbol notice effect is changed after the end of the full-screen notice effect (blackout effect) shown in FIG. 18(D2), not at the start of the change shown in FIG. 18(B1). As a result, it is possible to prevent the symbol notice effect from being hidden by the full-screen notice effect and being hidden. It should be noted that, although the reverse start display of the decorative pattern is executed without change, since it is hidden behind the full-screen notice effect (blackout effect) shown in (B2) and (C2) of FIG. can not see. Although the notification image shown in FIG. 18C2 is included in the full-screen notification effect, it may be a notification executed separately from the full-screen notification effect, or the notification image may not be displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 18(D2), the design notice production is started before the decorative design reaches the reference position Ref, but the decorative design is returned to the reference position Ref as indicated by the one-dot chain arrow. The symbol notice effect may be executed. The execution period of the symbol notice effect is shorter than the execution period of the backward fluctuation as shown in FIG. 17A, but may be the same as or longer than the execution period of the backward fluctuation. The same is true when the start is changed to timing T03 as shown in FIG. 17B.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 19 and FIG. 20, an example of a case in which the symbol advance notice effect is not executed and the reverse fluctuation is displayed in the presence or absence of the full-screen notice effect will be described. FIG. 19 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the variation of the decorative symbol and each notice effect, etc. In FIG. 19A, in the case where the symbol notice effect and the full-screen notice effect are not executed and the reverse variation is executed, (B). Then, the case where the symbol notice effect is not executed and the reverse variation with the full-screen notice effect is executed is shown. FIG. 20 shows an example of effect production in the case shown in FIG. 19 during the start period of the super reach variation display. Specifically, FIGS. 20(A), (B1), (C1), (D), and (E) are performance execution examples in the case of FIG. 19(A), FIGS. 20(A), (B2), ( C2), (D), and (E) are examples of effect execution in the case of FIG. 19(B).

  The variable display of the decorative pattern shown in FIG. 19A is the same as that in FIG. Further, regarding each notice effect, etc., in FIG. 19(A), execution of the full-screen notice effect and the design notice effect is determined not to be performed, and at the timing T01, the reverse direction start display of the decorative symbol is started, and the reverse direction is displayed. The direction change ends at timing T03. At the end of this backward movement (timing T03), the forward movement of the decorative pattern is started. Looking at the effect execution example at this time, as shown in FIG. 20(A), from the state in which the decorative pattern is fixedly displayed at the reference position Ref in the previous variable display, as shown in FIG. A reverse (upward) fluctuation opposite to the direction (downward) is started, and at the end of the reverse fluctuation (timing T03) shown in FIG. 19(A), as shown in FIG. 20(C1) The reverse variation of the design is stopped, and the variation of the decorative design is started in the forward direction as shown in FIG. 20(D1), and the decorative design is displayed in the forward direction beyond the reference position Ref shown in FIG. 20(E1). Will be done.

  On the other hand, in FIG. 19B, it is determined that the symbol advance notice effect is not executed, the full-screen notice effect and the reverse direction change are performed, and the full-screen notice effect and the reverse direction change are performed. Starts at the start of fluctuation (timing T01) and ends at timing T03. At the end of this backward movement (timing T03), the forward movement of the decorative pattern is started. Looking at the performance execution example at this time, the full-screen notice effect (blackout effect) is started as shown in FIG. 20(B2) and is included in the full-screen notice effect as shown in FIG. 20(C2). A notification image such as “Chance!” is displayed, and after the end of the full-screen notice effect of FIG. 20(C2), that is, as shown in FIG. 20(D), the forward movement of the decorative pattern is started. Although the reverse direction start display of the decorative pattern is executed, since it is hidden behind the full-screen notice effect (blackout effect) shown in (B2) and (C2) of FIG. I can't see the fluctuation. Although the notification image shown in FIG. 20(C2) is included in the full-screen preview effect, the notification image may be executed separately from the full-screen preview effect, or the notification image may not be displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 20D, the variable display in the forward direction can be visually recognized before the decorative pattern reaches the reference position Ref. The variable display in the forward direction from the returned state may be visible.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 21 and FIG. 22, an example of the case where the backward notice variation is not executed and the symbol notice effect is performed in the case of the presence or absence of the full-screen notice effect will be described. FIG. 21 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the variation of the decorative pattern and each notice effect, etc. In (A), there is no execution of the reverse direction variation with the full-screen notice effect, and there is no execution of the backward direction variation in (B). , Shows the case where there is execution of the full-screen notice effect and the pattern notice effect. FIG. 22 shows an example of the effect execution in the case shown in FIG. 21 in the start period of the super reach variation display. Specifically, FIGS. 22(A) and (B1) are examples of effect execution in the case of FIG. 21(A), and FIGS. 22(A), (B2), (C2), and (D2) are shown in FIG. It is an example of performance execution in the case of B).

  The variable display of the decorative design shown in FIG. 21A is the same as that in FIG. Further, regarding each notice effect, etc., in FIG. 21(A), it is determined that the full-screen notice effect and the variation in the backward direction of the decorative pattern are not executed, and the symbol notice effect at the start of the change (timing T01). Is started. The symbol notice effect ends at the subsequent timing T02. It should be noted that the change in the decorative pattern in the forward direction is also started at the start of the change (timing T01). Looking at the effect execution example at this time, as shown in FIG. 22(A), from the state in which the decorative pattern is fixedly displayed at the reference position Ref in the previous variable display, as shown in FIG. 22(B1), As the fluctuation in the direction (downward) is started, a symbol notice effect as shown in FIG. 22(B1), that is, an aura of a predetermined color (for example, blue, green, red, etc.) around the decorative symbol (rear) The notice effect in which the image G of (light) is displayed is also started.

  On the other hand, in FIG. 21(B), since it is determined that the symbol notice effect and the full-screen notice effect are executed, the symbol notice effect is changed from the timing T01 as the initial value to the timing T03. Looking at the effect execution example at this time, the full-screen notice effect (blackout effect) is started as shown in FIG. 22(B2) and is included in the full-screen notice effect as shown in FIG. 22(C2). A notification image such as “chance!” is displayed, and after the end of the full-screen notice effect of FIG. 22(C2), that is, when the forward movement of the decorative design is started as shown in FIG. 22(D2), the design The notice production has been changed to start. That is, the start of the symbol notice effect is changed after the end of the full-screen notice effect (blackout effect) shown in FIG. 22(D2), not at the start of the fluctuation shown in FIG. 22(B1). As a result, it is possible to prevent the symbol notice effect from being hidden by the full-screen notice effect and being hidden. As shown in FIG. 21(B), it is determined that the symbol notice effect and the full-screen notice effect are executed, and it is determined that the decorative pattern is not changed in the opposite direction. Therefore, FIG. In the execution period of the full-screen notice effect (blackout effect) shown in C2), the swinging of the decorative pattern is executed as shown in FIG. 21B, but it is hidden behind the full-screen notice effect. Therefore, the swing of the decorative pattern cannot be seen by the player. The start of variation of the decorative design in the forward direction is changed after the end of the execution period of all the design notice effects. The notification image shown in FIG. 22(C2) is included in the full-screen preview effect, but the notification image may be executed separately from the full-screen preview effect, or the notification image may not be displayed.

(1) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine of the present invention is
A gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like),
Variable display means (for example, effect display device 9 or the like) for displaying the identification information (for example, a decorative pattern or the like) in a predetermined direction in a variable manner,
A notice effect executing means (for example, CPU 101 for effect control) capable of executing a predetermined notice effect (for example, a notice effect for all screens);
Equipped with
The predetermined notice effect is executed so that the display mode of the identification information becomes invisible or difficult to visually recognize at the start of variable display (for example, in FIG. 18(B2), FIG. 20(B2) or FIG. 22(B2). (A blackout effect such as the decorative pattern shown is invisible),
When the predetermined notice effect is executed, the identification information can start the variable display in the predetermined direction after the execution period of the predetermined notice effect has elapsed (for example, FIG. 18(B2), FIG. As shown in FIG. 18(D2), (E2), FIG. 20(D), (E) or FIG. 22(D2) after the execution period of the blackout effect shown in 20(B2) or 22(B2) has elapsed. Decorative pattern starts to move in the forward direction).

  With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the start of movement of the identification information from becoming difficult to understand, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above,
The predetermined direction may be a normal direction (for example, a decorative pattern forward direction as shown in (D1), (D2), (E1), and (E2) of FIG. 18).

  With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the start of movement of the identification information from becoming difficult to understand.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above,
The predetermined notice effect is an effect that suggests the degree of expectation of being in an advantageous state, and is an effect that is executed in a mode of hiding a part or the whole of the identification information (for example, the full-screen notice effect is more than the case of the outlier). Also, in the case of a big hit, it is easier to display, and it is an effect of hiding the entire decorative pattern (see FIG. 18B2), for example.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the start of movement of the identification information from becoming difficult to understand.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above,
The variable display means can variably display the identification information in a specific direction (for example, a reverse direction) different from the predetermined direction (for example, shown in FIGS. 18B1 and 20B1). Thus, the decorative pattern is variably displayed in the reverse direction different from the forward direction), and so on.

  According to such a configuration, the direction of the variable display is diversified, and the interest of the game can be improved.

(5) In the gaming machine of (4) above,
The change display means changes and displays the identification information in the specific direction at least during the execution period of the predetermined notice effect (for example, at least during the execution period of the full-screen notice effect as shown in FIG. 17B). , The decorative pattern is variably displayed in the opposite direction, etc.).

  According to such a configuration, the identification information can be variably displayed in the specific direction and then variably displayed in the predetermined direction different from the specific direction, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above,
The identification information notice can be executed at the start of the variable display in the predetermined direction (for example, the effect control CPU 101 can execute the symbol notice effect as shown in FIGS. 18(B1) and 22(B1). Etc.)

  With such a configuration, the interest of the game can be improved by executing the identification information notice.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above,
When the notice of identification information and the predetermined notice effect are executed, the notice of the identification information is executed after the end of the predetermined notice effect (for example, full-screen notice shown in FIG. 18C2 and FIG. 22C2). After the effect is finished, the symbol notice effect is executed as shown in FIG. 18(D2) and FIG. 22(D2), for example.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the identification information notice and the predetermined notice effect from being executed simultaneously at the same time, and it is possible to prevent the identification information notice from being invisible or difficult to see due to the predetermined notice effect. It can be prevented.

Next, main effects obtained by the above-described embodiment will be described.
(1) As shown in FIG. 13, the size of the numbers displayed in the second display pattern is different from the size of the numbers displayed in the first display pattern. For example, the size of the numbers displayed when the fluctuation starts and when the fluctuation stops displayed by the second display pattern has a smaller display range than the size of the changing numbers displayed by the first display pattern. In this way, when the fluctuation starts or stops, the player can be made to pay attention to the display mode consisting of numbers and characters, and during the fluctuation display, only the numbers are displayed in a display range larger than when the fluctuation stops. By performing the variable display, it is possible to easily recognize the transition of the effect design during the variable display, and it is possible to suitably display the numbers and the characters.

  (2) There is a correspondence between numbers and characters as shown in FIG. 12, and as shown in FIG. 13, variable display is stopped in a pattern for displaying characters according to numbers. In this way, different characters will appear according to the numbers, so that the numbers and the characters can be displayed appropriately.

  (3) As shown in FIG. 13, an effect of stopping the variable display is executed by a pattern in which the character is displayed larger than the number by moving the number downward as a symbol action at the time of fluctuation stop. In this way, the display mode when displaying numbers and characters can be made interesting, and numbers and characters can be displayed appropriately.

  (4) As shown in FIG. 15, since the character moves greatly as an action during reach formation, the movement of the character can be noticed, and the numbers and characters can be displayed appropriately.

  (5) As shown in FIG. 14, a first change effect of changing only numbers to numbers and characters is executed as a change stop action, and a second change effect of changing numbers and characters to only numbers is a change start action. Execute change production. The execution modes are different between the first change effect and the second change effect. In the variable stop pattern action executed as the first change effect, the character jumps forward from the depth direction when the screen of the effect display device 9 is viewed from the front, the number moves downward, and the character is moved more than the number. In the variation start symbol action which is displayed in a large size and is executed as the second change effect, the characters are deleted from the numbers and the characters, and only the numbers displayed larger than before the change fluctuate downward. By doing so, it is possible to preferably display the numbers and the characters.

  (6) As shown in FIG. 15, at the end of SP reach, the symbols are aligned only with the numbers, and when the fixed background is displayed after returning to the normal background, the determination operation is performed with the numbers and the characters. By doing so, it is possible to provide a display mode of the effect design suitable for each scene of the effect, and it is possible to suitably display the numbers and the characters.

  (7) As shown in FIG. 13, when the variable display is stopped, the display is performed to make the character appear wider than the display range of the numbers before the stop. By doing so, it is possible to reduce a feeling of strangeness when the first display pattern is changed to the second display pattern. Therefore, it is possible to preferably display the numbers and the characters.

  (8) As shown in FIGS. 13D and 13E, as a variation stop symbol action, the character is displayed so as to jump forward from the depth direction when the screen of the effect display device 9 is viewed from the front. The performance is executed. By doing so, a powerful display using the character can be performed.

  (9) As shown in FIG. 15, as the small symbol action pattern B, an effect of violently moving the small symbol according to the effect sound during SP reach is executed. By doing so, it is possible to preferably display the numbers as the small symbols reduced and displayed.

Next, modifications and characteristic points of the embodiment described above will be listed below.
(1) In the above-described embodiment, the probability variation big hit state and the normal big hit state are provided. Further, as the effect design, odd design corresponding to the probability variation big hit, even design corresponding to normal big hit. Here, only the numbers corresponding to the probability variation big hits may be displayed in the second display pattern. For example, only the numbers corresponding to the probability big hit may be displayed with numbers and characters, and the numbers corresponding to the normal big hit may be displayed without displaying the characters. By doing so, it is possible to give a special feeling to the odd number pattern corresponding to the probability variation big hit, and to give a special impression to the odd number symbol having a high advantage. Of the odd-numbered symbols, only the “3” symbol or the “7” symbol may be the probability variation symbol, and the number of symbols displayed in the second display pattern can be appropriately changed.

  (2) In the above-described embodiment, the time saving state (high base state) is maintained until the variable display reaches 100 rotations after the end of the big hit. In such a time saving state, the fluctuation may be started only by the numeral and stopped by only the numeral. In the time saving state, the fluctuation time is shorter than in the normal state, so when a character with movement is displayed, displaying and deleting the character makes the movement of the symbol busy, resulting in a strange appearance. Therefore, the variable display may be difficult to see. Therefore, in the time saving state, the variable display may be executed by the first display pattern of only numbers unlike the normal state. With this configuration, it is possible to preferably display the numbers in the time saving state.

  (3) In the above-described embodiment, when the number display mode is different between the first display pattern that is displayed only with numbers and the second display pattern that is displayed with numbers and characters, the size of the numbers is different. Explained. However, when the display mode of the numbers is different, the position of the numbers, the color of the numbers, the type of the numbers, etc. may be used instead of the size of the numbers, and any two or more combinations may be used. Good. Also, the display mode of the numbers may be different depending on the jackpot expectation.

  (4) In the above-described embodiment, the case where the small symbol is displayed in the corner of the screen of the effect display device 9 is shown. However, one of the reachable small symbols may be displayed in the upper left corner of the screen and the other in the upper right corner of the screen. Further, as the small symbol action pattern, the case where the small symbol is moved up and down has been described. The movement of the small pattern is not limited to these, and the pattern may be shaken in accordance with music, rotated laterally, or bounced like a dance. Further, an effect image (for example, a flame image) may be added around the small symbol.

  (5) In the above-described embodiment, the effect of stopping the variable display is executed by the pattern in which the character is displayed larger than the number by moving the number downward as the symbol action at the time of the variable stop. However, as the symbol action when the fluctuation is stopped, the number may be moved diagonally instead of moving it downward. Specifically, when the variable display is stopped, the left symbol may be moved diagonally right, the middle symbol may be moved right below, and the right symbol may be diagonally moved left. In this way, the numerical symbols that are displayed small when the fluctuation is stopped are displayed so as to be gathered in the center, which is good-looking. The movement of the symbol action when the fluctuation is stopped is not limited to these, and may be moved in any direction.

  (6) In the above-described embodiment, the numbers and the characters have a one-to-one correspondence. However, the numbers and the characters do not have to have a one-to-one correspondence. For example, the same character may correspond to a plurality of numbers, or the corresponding character may change depending on the background. Further, when executing the prefetching notice, the variable display may be changed to a special stage for a plurality of variable displays until the variable display of the target to be prefetched is executed. In this case, special numbers or characters that are not normally displayed may be displayed. Further, it is desirable that the display pattern of the numbers and characters at this time be different from that in the normal time. In addition, you may make it provide the stage in which a variable display is performed only with a number.

  (7) In the above-described embodiment, the symbols are changed only by the numbers during the variable display so that the player can recognize whether or not the variable display is being performed. It is desirable that the numbers displayed in such a variable display be displayed in a lighter color than the display mode at the start of the change and at the time of the stop of the change. In this way, it is possible to prevent the effect executed in the background from being difficult to visually recognize by setting the density to be the same as that at the time of starting the fluctuation. And by displaying only numbers rather than numbers and characters, the display area of the symbol can be reduced, and while showing that the symbol is fluctuating, it is possible to reduce interference with other notices. can do.

  (8) In the embodiment described above, the symbol in the reach may be the same as the symbol shown in the first display pattern in the variable display, or is a symbol different from the symbol shown in the first display pattern. May be.

  (9) In the above-described embodiment, the first effect of changing only numbers from numbers to characters is executed as the action at the time of fluctuation stop, and the second change is performed from the numbers and characters to only numbers as the action at the time of fluctuation start. The case of executing the performance has been described. Although the character operated when the change effect was executed, another effect image may be added. Some changes may be made to the display mode.

  (10) In the above-described embodiment, as the variable stop symbol action, the number to be stopped may be once enlarged and displayed forward and then reduced. Then, the character may appear from behind the enlarged number. In this way, the characters are displayed as if they were suddenly displayed in a large display mode from the back of the enlarged numbers, so that it is possible to make the display of the characters more powerful and give a surprise to the player. it can.

  (11) In the above-described embodiment, a plurality of types of SP reach may be provided. The small symbol action may be different depending on the type of SP reach.

  (12) In the above-described embodiment, one character is displayed for one number. However, an image other than a character may be added to one number. For example, as the variable stop action, an image indicating that the hold display changes together with the character when the number stops (an image indicating that the hold display changes with high jackpot expectation) may be displayed. .. By doing this, it is possible to draw attention to the action at the time of fluctuation stop. Then, it is possible to give a pre-reading notice that the hold display is changed by displaying the image.

  (13) In the above-described embodiment, the jackpot gaming state has been described as a typical example as an advantageous state advantageous to the player. However, not limited to this, the advantageous state advantageous to the player may include a high probability state (probability change state), a time saving state, and another advantageous state such as a high base state.

  (14) In the above-described embodiment, the effect control board 80, the sound output board 70, and the lamp driver board 35 are provided as the boards on which the circuits for controlling the effect device are mounted. May be mounted on one substrate. Furthermore, a first effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling the effect display device 9 and the like is mounted, and a circuit for controlling other effect devices (lamps, LEDs, speakers 27R, 27L, etc.) are installed. You may make it provide two boards, such as the second effect control board.

  (15) In the above-described embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 directly sends a command to the effect control microcomputer 100, but the game control microcomputer 560 uses another board (for example, the figure 3 is a sound output board 70, a lamp driver board 35, or the like, or a sound/lamp board having a function of a circuit mounted on the sound output board 70 and a function of a circuit mounted on the lamp driver board 35). The effect control command may be transmitted and transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 in the effect control board 80 via another board. In that case, the command may simply pass through on another board, or control means such as a microcomputer may be mounted on the voice output board 70, the lamp driver board 35, and the sound/lamp board so that the control means receives the command. In response to this, control related to voice control or lamp control is executed, and the received command is changed as it is or for example to a simplified command to control the effect display device 9 for effect control microcomputer 100. It may be transmitted to. Even in that case, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the display control according to the effect control command directly received from the game control microcomputer 560 in the above-described embodiment, similarly to the sound output board 70 and the lamp driver. Display control can be performed in response to commands received from the board 35 or the sound/lamp board. In the case of such a configuration, various kinds of determinations performed by the effect control microcomputer 100 in the above-described embodiment may be similarly performed by the effect control microcomputer 100, or a voice output may be performed. It may be performed by the control means such as the board 70, the lamp driver board 35, or the microcomputer mounted on the sound/lamp board.

  (16) In the above-described embodiment, in order to notify the production control microcomputer of the variation pattern indicating the variation time and the variation mode such as the type of reach production and the presence/absence of pseudo-relation, one variation is set at the start of variation. Although the example of transmitting the variation pattern command is shown, the variation pattern may be notified to the effect control microcomputer by two or more commands. Specifically, in the case of notifying by two commands, the game control microcomputer determines whether or not there is a pseudo-relation with the first command, whether or not there is a sliding effect, and the like (before the reach, the so-called second A command indicating the change time and change mode before (before stop) is transmitted, and the second command indicates the type of reach and the presence/absence of re-lottery production, etc., after the reach (so-called second stop if not reached). It is also possible to transmit a command indicating the variation time or variation mode of (after). In this case, the effect control microcomputer may perform effect control in the variable display based on the variable time derived from the combination of the two commands. It should be noted that the game control microcomputer notifies each of the two commands of the variation time, and the effect control microcomputer selects the specific variation mode executed at each timing. Good. When sending two commands, two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt, and after a predetermined period has elapsed after sending the first command (for example, the next timer interrupt). (In) the second command may be transmitted. It should be noted that the variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the transmission order can be changed as appropriate. By thus notifying the variation pattern by using two or more commands, it is possible to reduce the amount of data that must be stored as the variation pattern command. As described above, in the configuration in which the variation pattern is notified to the effect control microcomputer by two commands, in the second command after the first command is transmitted, the determination result of the display result by the winning effect process, Alternatively, the prefetching announcement information may be executed based on the transmission of the prefetching determination information such as the variation pattern type and the reception of the second command. Here, the pseudo-relation is an effect display that is shown as if one change that originally corresponds to one reserved storage but a plurality of changes that correspond to a plurality of reserved storages are continuously performed. Abbreviation for continuous variation. In addition, the term “slip” refers to an effect display in which the symbol is slid from the predicted stop position immediately before the symbol stops in the variable display.

  (17) The above-described embodiment can be applied to a device such as a game machine that simulates the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The programs and data for realizing the above-described embodiments are not limited to the form in which they are distributed and provided to a computer device or the like by a removable recording medium, and a storage device included in the computer device or the like in advance. It may be distributed by pre-installed in. Further, the program and data for implementing the present invention may be distributed by being downloaded from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter. The game embodiment can be executed not only by mounting a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, the hardware resources of other devices may be directly used on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

  (18) As the present embodiment, the gaming machine that pays out the game medium to the player's hand in accordance with the occurrence of the winning prize has been described. An enclosed game machine that adds game points (scores) without paying it out may be adopted. The enclosed game machine has a circulation path that circulates a plurality of balls, which is an example of a game medium, inside the game machine, and is provided with a storage unit that stores the game points. The game points are added to the storage unit, the game points are subtracted from the storage unit according to the ball firing operation, and the game points are added to the storage unit according to the occurrence of a prize.

  (19) In the above-described embodiment, for example, a case has been described in which a plurality of types of special symbols or effect symbols “1” to “9” are variably displayed and the display result is derived and displayed. It is not limited to the mode. For example, the symbols that are variably displayed and the symbols that are derived and displayed do not necessarily have to be the same, and symbols that are different from the symbols that are variably displayed may be derived and displayed. Further, it is not always necessary to variably display a plurality of types of symbols, and variable display may be performed using only one type of symbol. In this case, for example, the variable display may be executed by alternately lighting and blinking the one type of symbol display. And, even in this case, one kind of symbol used for the variable display may be derived and displayed at the end, or a symbol different from the one kind of symbol may be finally derived and displayed. It may be one.

  (20) In the above-described embodiment, the “ratio (ratio, probability)” has been described with a specific example of a predetermined value exceeding 0%. However, the “ratio (ratio, probability)” may be 0%. For example, in the case where "the occurrence ratio of one is higher than the occurrence ratio of the other" by comparing the occurrence ratio of the predetermined game state 1 with the occurrence ratio of the other game state 2 in the predetermined game period, It also includes the case where the rate of occurrence of one game state is 0%.

  (21) In the above-described embodiment, after the variation display result when the display result of the variation display is determined to be the probability variation big hit is derived and displayed, and after the jackpot game state ends, the condition is changed to the probability variation state unconditionally. An example of controlled stochastic state control is given. However, not limited to this, when the detection means detects that the game ball has passed a specific area provided in the special winning opening of the special variable winning ball device 20, the probability variation determining device is controlled to the probability variation state. A type of probabilistic state control may be performed.

  The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes and additions within the scope not departing from the gist of the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiment and other examples of the embodiments described later.

  In addition, all or a part of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modified example and the configurations shown in the later-described exemplary embodiment and each modified example may be arbitrarily combined.

  In addition, it should be considered that the above-described embodiment and the below-described embodiments disclosed this time are exemplifications in all points and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown not by the above description and the following description but by the claims, and it is intended that all modifications within the meaning and range equivalent to the claims are included.

  As the gaming machine of the present invention, in addition, a variable display (variable display, etc.) of identification information (symbol information, symbol, etc.) is performed, and the game can be controlled to an advantageous state (big hit game state, etc.) advantageous to the player. A machine (pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like), which is provided with variable display means (effect display device 9, effect control microcomputer 100, etc.) capable of executing variable display of identification information, and the identification information (symbol information etc.) A first display that includes the first information (numerical information, numbers, etc.) and the second information (decoration information, characters, etc.), and displays the first information without displaying the second information in the display pattern of the identification information. A pattern (a pattern or the like displayed by numbers) and a second display pattern (a pattern or the like displayed by numbers and characters) for displaying the first information and the second information are provided, and the variable display means identifies After the information starts to fluctuate in a predetermined direction (downward direction, etc.), the fluctuating display is executed by the first display pattern (the fluctuating display is executed by a numeral, etc.) and the fluctuating display is stopped by the second display pattern. (The variable display is stopped by numbers and characters, etc.), the first information when displayed in the first display pattern and the first information when displayed in the second display pattern , The display mode is different (as shown in FIG. 13, the number when displayed only by numbers is displayed larger than the number when displayed by numbers and characters, etc.) , A specific display corresponding to the variable display of the identification information in a mode in which the display position is switched to the advance position or the retreat position, or a mode in which the expressionless display mode is switched to a display mode in which the eyes are opened and sweat is released and tears are displayed. (For example, an active display corresponding to a change being executed, a hold display corresponding to a change not started yet) can be displayed, and a display mode of the specific display (for example, display color (white, blue, red)). The specific display means (eg, shape, pattern, position, range, etc.) to be changed (for example, by performing steps S90663B and S90667B in the effect control microcomputer 90100, active display is displayed, and step S903911). , S903929 to display the hold display, and to perform step S904713 to change the display mode of the specific display) and a suggestive effect that suggests a change in the display mode of the specific display (for example, change effect (first Change effect, second change effect)) suggestive effect execution means (for example, In the effect control microcomputer 90100, a change effect is set in step S904506, a process table corresponding to the change effect is selected in step S908004, and a change effect is executed by performing steps S908006 and S908105). The specific display means is an operation mode of the specific display when the suggestive effect is executed (for example, display position (extended position, retracted position). Other operation modes such as operation frequency (high frequency, low frequency) and display direction (for example, downward or rightward) may be used. ), the display mode of the specific display can be changed at different rates (for example, the effect control microcomputer 90100 executes steps S904707 to S904709 to display the specific display that is the execution target of the first change effect). When the position is the advance position, the display mode of the specific display is changed at a rate of 100%, while when the display position of the specific display that is the execution target of the first change effect is the retreat position, the specific display is changed. A gaming machine that does not change the display mode (changes the display mode of the specific display at a rate of 0%) can be mentioned.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to preferably display the first identification information and the second identification information. Further, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the operation mode of the specific display.

  Further, in the above gaming machine, when the suggestive effect is executed, the specific display is displayed at different ratios depending on whether the variable display of the identification information is displayed in the first display pattern or the second display pattern. The mode may be changed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to at which timing during the variation display of the identification information the suggestive effect is performed, and the interest is improved.

  Furthermore, the first identification information and the second identification information can be preferably displayed, and the variation display of the identification information is performed as an example of the form of the gaming machine that allows the player to pay attention to the operation mode of the specific display. It is a game machine capable of performing, and a mode involving an operation (for example, a mode in which the display position is switched to an advance position or a retreat position, a display mode in which the eyes are opened to sweat and a tear mode is displayed). It is possible to display a specific display corresponding to the fluctuation display of the identification information (for example, an active display corresponding to the fluctuation being executed, a hold display corresponding to the fluctuation which has not been started yet) in the mode of switching to the specific display. A specific display unit (for example, in the effect control microcomputer 90100) capable of changing a display mode (for example, display color (white, blue, red). It may be a shape, pattern, position, range, etc. to be displayed.) The active display is displayed by performing steps S90663B and S90667B, the hold display is displayed by performing steps S903911 and S903929, and the display mode of the specific display by performing step S904713) and the specific display Suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, change effect (first change effect, second change effect)) that suggests a change in the aspect (for example, in the step S904506 in the effect control microcomputer 90100, the change effect is performed). And a step of selecting a process table corresponding to the change effect in step S908004 and executing the change effect by performing steps S908006 and S908105), and the specific display means specifies when the suggestion effect is executed. Depending on the display operation mode (for example, display position (advance position, retreat position). Operation frequency (high frequency, low frequency) or display direction (for example, downward, rightward) may be used). The display mode of the specific display can be changed at different ratios (for example, the effect control microcomputer 90100 executes steps S904707 to S904709 to change the display position of the specific display that is the execution target of the first change effect). The display mode of the specific display is changed at a rate of 100% when it is the advance position, while the display mode of the specific display is when the display position of the specific display which is the execution target of the first change effect is the retracted position. A gaming machine that does not change (the display mode of the specific display is changed at a rate of 0%). Hereinafter, an example of a form example of this gaming machine will be described as another form example.

(Other form examples)
Hereinafter, another embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 901, which is an example of a gaming machine, will be described. It should be noted that this other form example may be referred to as an “embodiment”. FIG. 23 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 901 as seen from the front.

  The pachinko gaming machine 901 includes an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape, and a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be openable and closable. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 901 has a frame-shaped glass door frame 902 that is openably and closably provided in the game frame. The game frame is a front frame (not shown) installed to be openable and closable with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate (not shown) to which mechanical parts and the like are attached, and various parts attached to them (game described later). (Excluding the board 906).

  On the lower surface of the glass door frame 902, there is a hit ball supply plate (upper plate) 903. Below the hitting ball supply plate 903, a surplus ball receiving tray 904 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply plate 903 and a hitting ball operation handle (operation knob) 905 for firing a hit ball are provided. A game board 906 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 902. The game board 906 is a structure including a plate-shaped body that constitutes the game board 906 and various parts attached to the plate-shaped body. Further, on the front surface of the game board 906, a game area 907 in which the driven game balls can flow down is formed.

  An effect display device 909 composed of a liquid crystal display device (LCD) is provided near the center of the game area 907. On the display screen of the effect display device 909, there is an effect symbol display area for performing variable display of effect symbols in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Therefore, the effect display device 909 corresponds to a variable display device that variably displays effect symbols. In the effect symbol display area, for example, there is a symbol display area that variably displays effect symbols for three decorations (for effect) of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. The symbol display area includes each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas, but the position of the symbol display area does not have to be fixed on the display screen of the effect display device 909, and the symbol The three areas of the display area may be separated. The effect display device 909 is controlled by the effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. When the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed by the first special symbol display device 908a, the effect control microcomputer causes the effect display device 909 to perform the effect display along with the variable display, and the second special symbol is displayed. When the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed on the symbol display device 908b, since the effect display is executed on the effect display device 909 along with the variable display, it is possible to easily grasp the progress of the game. ..

  Further, in the effect display device 909, the symbols other than the symbol which is the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol in the left and right middle symbols) are continued for a predetermined time, and the big hit symbols (for example, the symbols in the left, middle, and right are arranged in the same symbol). Stop, swing, scaling or deforming in a state that matches (combination of symbols), or multiple symbols fluctuate in synchronization with the same symbol, or the positions of the displayed symbols are swapped. Then, an effect performed in a state in which the possibility of a big hit continues before the final result is displayed (hereinafter, these states are referred to as reach states) is referred to as reach production. Further, the reach state and the state thereof are referred to as the reach mode. Furthermore, the variable display including the reach effect is called the reach variable display. Then, when the display result of the symbols variably displayed on the effect display device 909 is not the big hit symbol, the result is “out”, and the variable display state ends. A player plays a game while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

  In the upper right portion of the display screen of the effect display device 909, fourth symbol display areas 909c and 909d for displaying a fourth symbol next to the effect symbol and a special symbol and a normal symbol described later are provided. In this embodiment, the fourth symbol display area 909c for the first special symbol in which the variable display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol to be described later, and the second There is a fourth symbol display area 909d for the second special symbol in which the variable display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol.

  In this embodiment, the variable display of the effect symbol is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol (however, accurately, the variable display of the effect symbol changes on the effect control microcomputer 90100 side. It is performed by measuring the fluctuation time recognized based on the pattern command.), when performing the effect using the effect display device 909, for example, the effect contents including the variable display of the effect pattern disappears from the screen for a moment. The manner of production is diversified, such as production, or production in which a movable object shields all or part of the screen. Therefore, even when looking at the display screen on the effect display device 909, it may be difficult to recognize whether or not it is currently in the variable display state. Therefore, in this embodiment, by performing a variable display of the fourth symbol on a part of the display screen of the effect display device 909, by confirming the state of the fourth symbol, is it currently in the variable display state? Whether or not it can be surely recognized. The fourth symbol is always variably displayed in a constant operation, and is not visible on the screen or shielded by a shield, so that it can always be visually recognized.

  The fourth symbol for the first special symbol and the fourth symbol for the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as the fourth symbol, and the fourth symbol display area 909c and the second special symbol for the first special symbol. The fourth symbol display area 909d for symbols may be collectively referred to as the fourth symbol display area.

  The variation (variable display) of the fourth symbol is realized by continuing to turn on and off the fourth symbol display areas 909c and 909d in a predetermined display color (for example, blue) at regular time intervals. . The variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 908a and the variable display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 909c for the first special symbol are synchronized. The variable display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display 908b and the variable display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 909d for the second special symbol are synchronized. Note that “variable display is synchronized” means that the variable display start time and the variable display time are the same, and the variable display period is the same. Further, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 908a, a display color (a display color different from the deviating. For example, deviating) Sometimes it is displayed in blue, but when it is a big hit, it is displayed in red. When the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 908b, the display color reminding the big hit in the fourth symbol display area 909d for the second special symbol (a display color different from the off For example, when it is out of focus, it is displayed in blue, while when it is a big hit, it is displayed in red. The display color when the fourth symbol display areas 909c and 909d are turned off is the same as the background image when turned off, so as to prevent the background image from disappearing. It is desirable that the display color (for example, black) is different from that of the image.

  In addition, in this embodiment, the case where the fourth symbol display area is provided in a part of the display screen of the effect display device 909 is shown. You may make it implement|achieve the 4th symbol display area. In this case, for example, the variation (variable display) of the fourth symbol may be realized by continuing the state where the two LEDs are alternately turned on, and any one of the two LEDs is stopped. It may be possible to indicate whether or not the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed depending on whether it is displayed.

  Further, in this embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are shown to correspond to the respective fourth symbol display areas 909c and 909d, but the first special symbol and the second special symbol are shown. A fourth symbol display area common to the symbols may be provided in a part of the display screen of the effect display device 909. Moreover, you may make it implement|achieve the 4th symbol display area common to a 1st special symbol and a 2nd special symbol using light-emitting bodies, such as a lamp and LED. In this case, when the variable display of the fourth symbol is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol, and when the variable display of the fourth symbol is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the second special symbol, For example, the variable display of the fourth symbol may be distinguished and executed by performing a display in which the display of different display colors is repeatedly turned on and off at regular time intervals. Further, when the variable display of the fourth symbol is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol, and when the variable display of the fourth symbol is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the second special symbol, for example, Alternatively, the variable display of the fourth symbol may be distinguished and executed by performing display such that lighting and extinction are repeated at different time intervals. Further, for example, when the stop symbol corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is derived and displayed, and when the stop symbol corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is derived and displayed, it is the same big hit symbol. Alternatively, the stop symbols in different modes may be stopped and displayed.

  On the lower left side of the game board 906, a first special symbol display device (first variable display portion) 908a that variably displays the first special symbol as identification information is provided. In this embodiment, the first special symbol display device 908a is realized by a simple and small-sized display device (for example, 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying the numbers 0 to 9. That is, the first special symbol display 908a is configured to variably display the numbers (or symbols) of 0-9. On the lower right side of the game board 906, a second special symbol display (second variable display portion) 908b that variably displays the second special symbol as identification information is provided. The second special symbol display device 908b is realized by a simple and small-sized display device (for example, 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying the numbers 0 to 9. That is, the second special symbol display device 908b is configured to variably display the numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9.

  The small display is formed in a square shape, for example. Further, in this embodiment, the type of the first special symbol and the type of the second special symbol are the same (for example, both numbers 0 to 9), but the types may be different. Further, the first special symbol display device 908a and the second special symbol display device 908b may be respectively configured to variably display numbers (or two-digit symbols) of 00 to 99, for example.

  Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol, and the first special symbol indicator 908a and the second special symbol indicator 908b are collectively referred to as a special symbol indicator (variable display section). I have something to do.

  In addition, in this embodiment, although the case where two special symbol display devices 908a and 908b are provided is shown, the gaming machine may be provided with only one special symbol display device.

  The variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first start condition or the second start condition that is the execution condition of the variable display is satisfied (for example, the game ball is the first start winning opening 9013 or the second starting winning opening). After passing 9014 (including winning), the start condition of the variable display (for example, when the number of pending storage is not 0, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not executed It is a state, and started based on the fact that the jackpot game is not executed) is established, and when the variable display time (variation time) elapses, the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. It should be noted that passing a game ball means that the game ball has passed through a predetermined winning area such as a winning opening or a gate, and includes a concept that the gaming ball has entered (winning) the winning opening. Is. Derivative display of the display result means that the symbol (an example of identification information) is finally stopped and displayed.

  Below the effect display device 909, a winning device having a first starting winning opening 9013 is provided. The game ball that has won the first starting winning opening 9013 is guided to the back surface of the game board 906 and detected by the first starting opening switch 9013a.

  Further, below the winning device having the first starting winning opening (first starting opening) 9013, a variable winning ball device 9015 having a second starting winning opening 9014 in which a game ball can be won is provided. The game ball that has won the second start winning opening (second starting opening) 9014 is guided to the back surface of the game board 906 and detected by the second starting opening switch 9014a. The variable winning ball device 9015 is opened by a solenoid 9016. When the variable winning ball device 9015 is in the open state, the game ball can enter the second starting winning opening 9014 (it becomes easy to start winning), which is in an advantageous state for the player. When the variable winning ball device 9015 is in the open state, the game balls are easier to win in the second starting winning port 9014 than in the first starting winning port 9013. In addition, in the state where the variable winning ball device 9015 is in the closed state, the gaming ball does not win the second starting winning port 9014. Therefore, in the state where the variable winning ball device 9015 is in the closed state, the game ball is easier to win in the first starting winning port 9013 than in the second starting winning port 9014. In addition, while the variable winning ball device 9015 is in a closed state, it may be difficult to win the prize, but it may be possible to win the prize (that is, the game ball is hard to win).

  Hereinafter, the first start winning opening 9013 and the second starting winning opening 9014 may be collectively referred to as a starting winning opening or a starting opening.

  When the variable winning ball device 9015 is controlled to be in the open state, the game ball heading for the variable winning ball device 9015 is extremely easy to win the second start winning port 9014. Although the first start winning opening 9013 is provided directly below the effect display device 909, the interval between the lower end of the effect displaying device 909 and the first start winning opening 9013 can be further narrowed, or the first start winning opening 9013. The nails are densely arranged around 9013, or the nail arrangement around the first starting winning opening 9013 is difficult to guide the game ball to the first starting winning opening 9013, and the winning rate of the second starting winning opening 9014 is Alternatively, the winning rate of the first starting winning port 9013 may be set higher.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 23, the variable winning ball apparatus 9015 that opens and closes only the second starting winning opening 9014 is provided, but the first starting winning opening 9013 and the second winning opening 9013 are provided. A variable winning ball apparatus that opens and closes any of the starting winning openings 9014 may be provided.

  On the side of the first special symbol display device 908a, the number of effective winning balls that have entered the first starting winning opening 9013, that is, the first reserved memory number (reserved memory is also referred to as starting memory or starting winning memory) is displayed. A first special symbol reservation storage display 9018a composed of four displays is provided. The 1st special symbol reservation storage indicator 9018a increases the number of the indicator which lights each time there is an effective starting winning. Then, each time the variable display on the first special symbol display device 908a is started, the number of lighted display devices is reduced by one.

  On the side of the second special symbol display device 908b, a second special symbol reserved memory display device 9018b composed of four displays for displaying the number of effective winning balls that have entered the second start winning port 9014, that is, the second reserved memory number. Is provided. The second special symbol hold storage display 9018b increases the number of display devices to be turned on by 1 each time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the second special symbol display device 908b is started, the number of lighted display devices is reduced by one.

  In addition, in the lower part of the display screen of the effect display device 909, a holding storage display unit 9018c that displays one of the first holding storage number and the second holding storage number is provided. For example, the pending storage display unit 9018c displays the first pending storage number in the low base state, while displaying the second pending storage number in the high base state. It should be noted that the first pending storage number and the second pending storage number may be individually displayed. In addition, a configuration may be provided in which a total pending storage display unit that displays the total pending storage number that is the total number of the first pending storage number and the second pending storage number is provided. With such a configuration, it is possible to easily grasp the total number of satisfied execution conditions in which the variable display start condition is not satisfied. Further, in the case of such a configuration, the first reserved memory and the second reserved memory are displayed side by side in the winning order to the first starting winning opening 9013 and the second starting winning opening 9014 in the combined holding storage display unit. , So that it is recognizable whether it is the first reserved memory or the second reserved memory (for example, the first reserved memory is displayed in red and the second reserved memory is displayed in blue). You may comprise.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the pending storage display unit 9018c displays the pending display for the pending storage that has not yet been changed, and the pending storage is displayed from the start to the end of the variable display for the pending storage. The hold display for storage is continuously displayed on the active display portion 9018d different from the hold storage display portion 9018c. That is, on the active display portion 9018d, the active display (variable display corresponding image) corresponding to the variable display being executed is displayed.

  Hereinafter, the hold storage display unit 9018c, the active display unit 9018d, and the range surrounding the hold storage display unit 9018c and the active display unit 9018d may be collectively referred to as an “interface image”. This interface image is displayed regardless of whether there is a hold display or an active display, but it is erased in a specific situation (for example, during a big hit game state or during execution of a specific effect such as super reach). It is something. In addition, hereinafter, the hold display and the active display may be collectively referred to as “specific display”.

  Specifically, the mole character is displayed as a pending display and an active display on the pending storage display section 9018c and the active display section 9018d. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 23, one active display and three hold displays are displayed.

  In addition, "white", "blue", and "red" are provided as the display modes of the specific display, and the reliability of being a big hit in the corresponding variation is different. For example, the reliability of the big hit is red>blue>white.

  The display mode of the specific display can be changed by performing a predetermined change effect. As the change effect, a first change effect in which the hammer is swung down toward the target specific display and a second change effect in which an arrow flies toward the target specific display are provided. The display mode of the specific display that is hit or the specific display that the arrow hits is changed.

  Further, as a display position of the specific display, an advance position that seems to be jumping out of the ground (for example, the first display position of the hold display in FIG. 23) and a retreat position that seems to be submerged in the ground (for example, the figure The display positions of the 23 active displays and the second and third hold displays are provided. The display position of each specific display is controlled so as to switch randomly. For example, the frequency at which the display position is switched (operation frequency) is determined for each variation, and the display position is switched based on the determined operation frequency.

  Effect display device 909, during the variable display time of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 908a, and during the variable display time of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 908b, for decoration (for production) Variable display of the effect design as the design of. The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 908a and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 909 are synchronized. Further, the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 908b and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 909 are synchronized. Further, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 908a, and when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device 908b, a production symbol that reminds the big hit on the effect display device 909. The combination of is stopped and displayed.

  In this embodiment, as will be described later, the game control microcomputer 90560 for controlling the variable display of the special symbol transmits a variation pattern command capable of specifying the variation time, and the production control microcomputer 90100 receives it. The variable display of the effect design is controlled according to the variable time specified by the changed pattern command. Therefore, since the variation time is specified based on the variation pattern command, the variation display of the special symbol and the variation display of the effect symbol should be executed in synchronization in principle. However, in the unlikely event that the data of the variation pattern command is garbled, the variation time recognized by the game control microcomputer 90560 side and the variation time recognized by the effect control microcomputer 90100 side There may be a gap between them. Therefore, if an unexpected situation such as garbled command data occurs, the variable display of the special symbol and the variable display of the effect symbol may not be completely synchronized.

  A movable member 9078 that is attached to the rotation shaft of the motor 9086 and moves when the motor 9086 rotates is provided on the left side of the decoration portion around the effect display device 909. In this embodiment, the movable member 9078 operates when the notice effect (movable object notice effect) is executed. It should be noted that the movable member 9078 may be operated not only in the movable object notice effect but also in the pseudo-relation effect or the super reach effect, for example.

  In addition, in the decorative portion around the effect display device 909, the left and right lower parts are attached to the rotation shaft of the motor 9087 and move when the motor 9087 rotates, which is a blade-shaped movable member (hereinafter referred to as effect blade accessory). 9079a and 9079b are provided. The effect blade role products 9079a and 9079b operate, for example, when a notice effect (effect blade effect notice effect) is executed. It should be noted that the effect blade role objects 9079a and 9079b may be operated not only in the effect blade effect product notice effect, but also in the pseudo-relation effect or the super reach effect, for example.

  As shown in FIG. 23, a special variable winning ball device 9020 is provided below the variable winning ball device 9015. The special variable winning ball device 9020 includes an opening/closing plate, and when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 908a, the specific display result (big hit symbol) on the second special symbol display 908b. In the specific game state (big hit game state) that occurs when is displayed and displayed, the open/close plate is controlled by the solenoid 9021 to be in the open state, so that the special winning opening serving as the winning area is in the open state. The game ball that has won the special winning opening is detected by the count switch 9023.

  The gaming area 906 is also provided with winning holes (ordinary winning holes) 9029, 9030, 9033, 9039 for paying out a predetermined number of prize gaming balls determined in advance based on winning of the gaming balls. The gaming balls that have won the winning openings 9029, 9030, 9033, and 9039 are detected by the winning opening switches 9029a, 9030a, 9033a, and 9039a.

  On the right side of the game board 906, a normal symbol display 9010 is provided. The normal symbol display 9010 variably displays a plurality of types of identification information called normal symbols (for example, "○" and "x").

  When the game ball passes through the gate 9032 and is detected by the gate switch 9032a, the variable display of the display on the normal symbol display 9010 is started. In this embodiment, the upper and lower lamps (the pattern becomes visible when turned on) are alternately turned on to perform variable display. For example, if the lower lamp is turned on at the end of variable display, it is a win. .. And when the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 9010 is a predetermined symbol (hit symbol), the variable winning ball device 9015 is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time. That is, the state of the variable winning ball device 9015 is an advantageous state from a disadvantageous state to the player (a state in which the game ball can be won in the second starting winning port 9014) when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol. Changes to. In the vicinity of the normal symbol display device 9010, a normal symbol hold storage display device 9041 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 9032 is provided. Every time there is a passage of the game ball to the gate 9032, that is, every time the game ball is detected by the gate switch 9032a, the normal symbol reservation storage display 9041 increments the LED to be turned on by one. Then, each time the variable display of the normal symbol display device 9010 is started, the number of LEDs to be turned on is reduced by 1. Furthermore, compared to the normal state, the probability of being decided to be a big hit is a high probability state (compared to the normal state, a state in which the probability of being judged as a big hit as a variation display result of special symbols is increased. In the high probability state.), the probability that the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 9010 becomes a winning symbol is increased, and the opening time and the number of times of opening the variable winning ball device 9015 are increased.

  Around the left and right sides of the game area 907 of the game board 906, decoration LEDs 9025 that are displayed blinking during the game are provided, and at the bottom, there is an out port 9026 for taking in a hit ball that has not been won. Further, two speakers 9027 for producing a sound effect or a sound as a predetermined sound output are provided on the upper left and right sides outside the game area 907. A frame LED 9028 provided on the front frame is provided on the outer periphery of the game area 907.

  An operation button 90120 as an operation means that can be operated by the player is provided in a member forming the hit ball supply plate 903. The operation button 90120 is provided with a push button switch that can be pressed by the player. Note that the operation button 90120 is provided with not only a push button switch that can be pressed by the player, but also a dial that can be rotated by the player. The player can make a predetermined selection (for example, effect selection) by rotating the dial.

  The game machine drives a drive motor in response to a player operating a ball operation handle 905, and uses a rotational force of the drive motor to shoot a game ball into a game area 907 (not shown). ) Is provided. The game ball shot from the hitting ball launching device enters the game area 7 through a ball hitting rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 907, and then descends from the game area 7. When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening 9013 and is detected by the first starting opening switch 9013a, if the variable display of the first special symbol can be started (for example, the variable display of the special symbol ends, the first 1 start condition is satisfied), the variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 908a, and the variable display of the effect symbol is started on the effect display device 909. That is, the variable display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to the winning of the first starting winning opening 9013. Unless the variable display of the first special symbol can be started, the first reserved storage number is increased by 1 on condition that the first reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value.

  When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening 9014 and is detected by the second starting opening switch 9014a, if the variable display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the variable display of the special symbol ends, the first 2 start condition is satisfied), the variable display (variation) of the second special symbol is started on the second special symbol display device 908b, and the variable display of the effect symbol is started on the effect display device 909. That is, the variable display of the second special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to the winning of the second starting winning opening 9014. If the variable display of the second special symbol can not be started, the second reserved storage number is incremented by 1 on condition that the second reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value.

  In this embodiment, in the case of a probability variation big hit, after being transferred to the so-called probability variation state after the big hit game ends, the game state shifts to a high-probability state, and the game ball easily starts winning (that is, a special symbol). The execution condition of the variable display on the display devices 908a and 908b and the effect display device 909 is easily established. In the high base state, for example, the frequency of the variable winning ball apparatus 9015 being in the open state is increased, or the time when the variable winning ball apparatus 9015 is in the open state is longer than in the case of not being in the high base state. It will be easier to win the starting prize.

  Note that the variable winning ball device 9015 does not extend the time for which it is in an open state (also referred to as an open extension state), but shifts to a normal symbol probability changing state in which the probability that a stop symbol on the normal symbol display 9010 is a winning symbol is increased. Therefore, the high base state may be set. When the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 9010 becomes a predetermined symbol (hit symbol), the variable winning ball device 9015 is opened for a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined time. In this case, by controlling the transition to the normal symbol probability changing state, the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 9010 becomes a winning symbol is increased, and the frequency of the variable winning ball device 9015 being in the open state is increased. Therefore, if the state shifts to the normal symbol probability changing state, the opening time and the number of times of opening the variable winning ball device 9015 are increased, and it becomes a state (high base state) in which it is easy to start winning. That is, the opening time and the number of times of opening the variable winning ball device 9015 are increased when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol or the stop symbol of the special symbol is a probability variation symbol, and the like, which is disadvantageous to the player. It changes to an advantageous state (a state in which it is easy to start winning). In addition, increasing the number of times of opening is a concept including changing from a closed state to an open state.

  Further, by shifting to the normal symbol time saving state in which the variation time (variable display period) of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display 9010 is shortened, the high base state may be shifted. In the normal symbol time saving state, since the variation time of the normal symbol is shortened, the frequency of the variation of the normal symbol is increased, and as a result, the frequency of winning the normal symbol is increased. Therefore, as the frequency of winning the normal symbol increases, the frequency of the variable winning ball device 9015 becomes high and the starting winning easily occurs (high base state).

  Further, in this embodiment, when shifting to the high base state, it is also shifted to a time saving state (special symbol saving time state) in which the variation time (variable display period) of the special symbol or the effect symbol is shortened. By shifting to the time saving state in this way, the variation time of the special symbol and the effect symbol is shortened, so the frequency of the variation of the special symbol or effect symbol is increased (in other words, the storage of the reserved memory is exhausted. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the situation in which an invalid start winning occurs. Therefore, an effective starting winning is likely to occur, and as a result, the possibility of playing a big hit game is increased.

  Furthermore, by shifting to all the states shown above (open extension state, normal symbol probability changing state, normal symbol time saving state and special symbol time saving state), it becomes easier to start winning (transfer to high base state) May be. Also, by shifting to any one of the states shown above (open extension state, normal symbol probability changing state, normal symbol time saving state and special symbol time saving state), it becomes easier to start winning (high base State). In addition, by shifting to only one of the above-mentioned states (open extension state, normal symbol probability changing state, normal symbol time saving state and special symbol time saving state), it is easy to start winning. It is also possible to set).

  FIG. 24 is a block diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the main board (game control board) 9031. Note that FIG. 24 also shows the payout control board 9037, the effect control board 9080, and the like. A game control microcomputer (corresponding to game control means) 90560 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 901 according to a program is mounted on the main board 9031. The game control microcomputer 90560 includes a ROM 9054 for storing programs for game control (game progress control), a RAM 9055 as a storage unit used as a work memory, a CPU 9056 for performing control operations according to the programs, and an I/O port unit 9057. including. In this embodiment, the ROM 9054 and the RAM 9055 are built in the game control microcomputer 90560. That is, the game control microcomputer 90560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The 1-chip microcomputer has at least the RAM 9055 in addition to the CPU 9056, and the ROM 9054 may be external or internal. The I/O port unit 9057 may be externally attached. The game control microcomputer 90560 further includes a random number circuit 9053 that generates a hardware random number (random number generated by a hardware circuit).

  The RAM 9055 is a backup RAM serving as a non-volatile storage unit, which is partially or wholly backed up by a backup power supply created in the power supply board 90910. That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, a part or all of the content of the RAM 9055 is saved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot supply power). In particular, at least data according to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (such as a special symbol process flag) and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are stored in the backup RAM. The data according to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after the power failure or the like. Further, the data according to the control state and the data showing the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as the data showing the progress state of the game. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the entire RAM 9055 is backed up by power supply.

  In the game control microcomputer 90560, the CPU 9056 executes control in accordance with the program stored in the ROM 9054, and hence the game control microcomputer 90560 (or CPU 9056) executes (or performs processing). Specifically, the CPU 9056 executes control according to a program. This also applies to the microcomputers mounted on other boards than the main board 9031.

  The random number circuit 9053 is a hardware circuit used to generate a random number for determination for determining whether or not to make a big hit based on the display result of the variable display of the special symbol. The random number circuit 9053 updates the numerical data according to the set updating rule within the numerical range in which the initial value (for example, 0) and the upper limit value (for example, 65535) are set, and the start occurs at random timing. Based on that the time of winning is the time of reading (extracting) the numerical data, the numerical data read has a random number generating function.

  The random number circuit 9053 includes a selection setting function of an update range of numerical data (initial value selection setting function and upper limit selection setting function), a numerical data update rule selection setting function, and a numerical data update rule selection. It has various functions such as a switching function. With such a function, the randomness of the generated random numbers can be improved.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 90560 has a function of setting an initial value of the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 9053. For example, a predetermined calculation is performed using an ID number of the game control microcomputer 90560 (an ID number assigned with a different numerical value for each product of the game control microcomputer 90560) stored in a predetermined storage area such as the ROM 9054. The numerical data obtained by the operation is set as the initial value of the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 9053. By performing such processing, the randomness of the random numbers generated by the random number circuit 9053 can be further improved.

  In addition, an input driver circuit 9058 for providing the game control microcomputer 90560 with detection signals from the gate switch 9032a, the starting opening switch 9013a, the count switch 9023, and the winning opening switches 9029a, 9030a, 9033a, 9039a is also mounted on the main board 9031. There is. Further, the output circuit 9059 which drives the solenoid 9016 for opening and closing the variable winning ball device 9015 and the solenoid 9021 for opening and closing the special variable winning ball device 9020 forming the special winning opening in accordance with a command from the game controlling microcomputer 90560. It is mounted on the 9031.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 90560, the first special symbol display 908a, the second special symbol display 908b, which displays the special symbol variably, the normal symbol display 9010, which normally displays the variable variably, the first special symbol reservation storage Display control of the display 9018a, the second special symbol reservation storage display 9018b and the normal symbol reservation storage display 9041 is performed.

  An information output circuit (not shown) that outputs an information output signal such as big hit information indicating occurrence of a big hit game state to an external device such as a hall computer is also mounted on the main board 9031.

  In this embodiment, the effect control means (composed of effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 9080 instructs the effect contents from the game control microcomputer 90560 via the relay board 9077. The effect control command is received, and display control of the effect display device 909 that variably displays effect symbols is performed.

  In addition, the production control means mounted on the production control board 9080 controls the display of the decorative LED 9025 provided on the game board and the frame LED 9028 provided on the frame side via the lamp driver board 9035. The sound output from the speaker 9027 is controlled via the audio output board 9070.

  FIG. 25 is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration example of the relay board 9077, the effect control board 9080, the lamp driver board 9035, and the audio output board 9070. In the example shown in FIG. 25, the lamp driver board 9035 and the audio output board 9070 are not equipped with a microcomputer, but may be equipped with a microcomputer. Further, without providing the lamp driver board 9035 and the audio output board 9070, only the effect control board 9080 may be provided for effect control.

  The production control board 9080 is equipped with a production control CPU 90101 and a production control microcomputer 90100 including a RAM for storing information on production such as production symbol process flags. The RAM may be external. In this embodiment, the RAM in the effect control microcomputer 90100 is not backed up by power supply. In the effect control board 9080, the effect control CPU 90101 operates according to a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown), and receives a signal from the main board 9031 input via the relay board 9077 ( In response to the effect control INT signal), the effect control command is received via the input driver 90102 and the input port 90103. Further, the effect control CPU 90101 causes the VDP (video display processor) 90109 to perform display control of the effect display device 909 based on the effect control command.

  In this embodiment, a VDP 90109 that cooperates with the effect control microcomputer 90100 to control the display of the effect display device 909 is mounted on the effect control board 9080. The VDP 90109 has an address space independent of the effect control microcomputer 90100, and maps the VRAM therein. VRAM is a buffer memory for expanding image data. Then, the VDP 90109 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 909 via the frame memory.

  The effect control CPU 90101 outputs to the VDP 90109 a command for reading necessary data from a CGROM (not shown) in accordance with the received effect control command. The CGROM stores in advance character image data and moving image data displayed on the effect display device 909, specifically, people, characters, figures and symbols (including effect patterns), and background image data. ROM for this. The VDP 90109 reads the image data from the CGROM according to the instruction from the effect control CPU 90101. Then, the VDP 90109 executes display control based on the read image data.

  The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver 90102 on the effect control board 9080. The input driver 90102 passes the signal input from the relay board 9077 only in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 9080 (does not pass the signal in the direction from the inside of the effect control board 9080 to the relay board 9077). It is also a unidirectional circuit as a regulation means.

  As a signal direction restricting means that allows the signal input from the main board 9031 to pass through the relay board 9077 only in the direction toward the effect control board 9080 (does not pass the signal in the direction from the effect control board 9080 to the relay board 9077). The unidirectional circuit 9074 is mounted. For example, a diode or a transistor is used as the unidirectional circuit. A diode is illustrated in FIG. 25. Further, the unidirectional circuit is provided for each signal. Furthermore, since the production control command and the production control INT signal are output from the main board 9031 via the output port 90571 which is a unidirectional circuit, the signal from the relay board 9077 to the inside of the main board 9031 is restricted. That is, the signal from the relay board 9077 does not enter the inside of the main board 9031 (on the side of the game control microcomputer 90560). The output port 90571 is a part of the I/O port unit 9057 shown in FIG. Further, a signal driver circuit which is a unidirectional circuit may be further provided outside the output port 90571 (on the side of the relay substrate 9077).

  Further, the effect control CPU 90101 drives a motor 9086 to operate the movable member 9078 via the output port 90106. Further, the effect control CPU 90101 drives a motor 9087 for operating the effect blade accessory 9079a, 9079b via the output port 90106.

  In addition, the effect control CPU 90101 inputs a signal from the operation button 90120 through the input port 90107 in response to a pressing operation of the operation button 90120 by the player.

  Further, the effect control CPU 90101 outputs a signal for driving an LED or a lamp to the lamp driver board 9035 via the output port 90105. Further, the effect control CPU 90101 outputs sound number data to the audio output board 9070 via the output port 90104.

  In the lamp driver board 9035, signals for driving LEDs and lamps are input to the LED/lamp driver 90352 via the input driver 90351. The LED/lamp driver 90352 supplies a current to a light emitting body provided on the frame side such as the frame LED 9028 based on a signal for driving the LED or the lamp. In addition, electric current is supplied to the decorative LED 9025 and the like provided on the game board side.

  In the voice output board 9070, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 90703 via the input driver 90702. The voice synthesizing IC 90703 generates a voice or sound effect corresponding to the sound number data and outputs it to the amplifier circuit 90705. The amplifier circuit 90705 amplifies the output level of the voice synthesis IC 90703 to a level according to the volume set in the volume 90706, and outputs the audio signal to the speaker 9027. The voice data ROM 90704 stores control data according to the sound number data. The control data according to the sound number data is a collection of data indicating the output mode of the sound effect or the sound in a predetermined period (for example, the variation period of the effect symbol) in time series.

  Next, the operation of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the main processing executed by the game control microcomputer 90560 on the main board 9031. When power is supplied to the gaming machine and power supply is started, the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is input becomes high level, and the gaming control microcomputer 90560 (specifically, CPU 9056) After executing a security check process for confirming whether the content of the program is valid or not, the main process after step S901 is started. In the main processing, the CPU 9056 first makes necessary initial settings.

  In the initial setting process, the CPU 9056 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S901). Next, the interrupt mode is set to the interrupt mode 2 (step S902), and the stack pointer designated address is set to the stack pointer (step S903). After initialization of the built-in device (initialization of the CTC (counter/timer) and PIO (parallel input/output port) which are built-in devices (built-in peripheral circuits)) (step S904), the RAM can be accessed. Is set (step S905). In the interrupt mode 2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) built in the CPU 9056 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output by the built-in device is This is a mode indicating an interrupt address.

  Next, the CPU 9056 confirms the state of the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (for example, mounted on the power supply board) input through the input port (step S906). If the CPU 9056 detects ON in the confirmation, the CPU 9056 executes normal initialization processing (steps S9010 to S9015).

  If the clear switch is not turned on, check whether the data protection processing of the backup RAM area (for example, processing when power supply is stopped such as addition of parity data) is performed when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped. Yes (step S907). If it is confirmed that such protection processing is not performed, the CPU 9056 executes initialization processing. Whether or not there is backup data in the backup RAM area is confirmed, for example, by the state of the backup flag set in the backup RAM area in the power supply stoppage process.

  After confirming that the power supply stop processing has been performed, the CPU 9056 checks the data in the backup RAM area (step S908). In this embodiment, a parity check is performed as a data check. Therefore, in step S908, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and stored by the same process in the power supply stop process. When the power is restored after an unexpected power failure such as a power failure, the data in the backup RAM area should have been saved, so the check result (comparison result) becomes normal (match). If the check result is not normal, it means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply was stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply was stopped, the initialization process that is executed when the power is turned on, not when the power supply is restored from the stop, is executed.

  If the check result is normal, the CPU 9056 causes the game state recovery process (steps S9041 to S9043) for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electric component control means such as the effect control means to the state when the power supply was stopped. Processing). Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 9054 is set to the pointer (step S9041), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set to the work area (area in the RAM 9055) (step S9042). ). The work area is backed up by a backup power supply. In the backup setting table, the initialization data of the area that may be initialized in the work area is set. As a result of the processing in steps S9041 and S9042, the stored contents of the work area that should not be initialized remain. The part that should not be initialized is, for example, data indicating the game state before the power supply is stopped (special symbol process flag, probability variation flag, time saving flag, etc.), the area where the output state of the output port is saved (output port buffer ), a part in which data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls is set.

  Further, the CPU 9056 transmits a power failure recovery designation command as an initialization command at the time of power supply recovery (step S9043). Further, the CPU 9056 transmits a display result designation command designating a display result (normal big hit, probability variation big hit, sudden variation big hit, small hit, or out) to the effect control board 9080 (step. S9044). Then, the process proceeds to step S9014. In step S9044, the CPU 9056 also transmits the first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command (see FIG. 35) when the value of a special symbol pointer described later is also stored in the backup RAM. You may do so. In this case, the production control microcomputer 90100 may restart the variable display of the fourth symbol based on the reception of the first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command.

  In this embodiment, the backup RAM area also stores the value of the variable time timer described later. Therefore, when the power failure is restored, after the display result designation command is transmitted in step S9044, the measurement of the value of the variable time timer that has been saved is restarted and the variable display of the special symbol is restarted and saved. When the value of the variable time timer that has been used has timed out, a symbol confirmation designation command to be described later is transmitted. Further, in this embodiment, the value of a special symbol process flag described later is also stored in the backup RAM area. Therefore, when the power failure is restored, the special symbol process process is restarted from the process corresponding to the value of the special symbol process flag that is saved.

  It should be noted that the CPU 9056 may first check whether the value of the variable time timer stored in the backup RAM area is 0, instead of sending the display result designation command without fail when power is restored. .. If the value of the variable time timer is not 0, it is determined that a power failure has occurred during the change, and a display result designation command is transmitted. It may be determined that the state has not been reached and the display result designation command may not be transmitted.

  Further, the CPU 9056 may first check whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag stored in the backup RAM area is 3. Then, if the value of the special symbol process flag is 3, it is determined that there is a power outage during fluctuation, and the display result designation command is transmitted. If the special symbol process flag is not 3, it fluctuates during a power failure. It may be determined that the display result designation command has not been received, and the display result designation command may not be transmitted.

  In this embodiment, both the backup flag and the check data are used to check whether the data in the backup RAM area is stored, but only one of them may be used. That is, either the backup flag or the check data may be used as a trigger for executing the game state recovery process.

  In the initialization process, the CPU 9056 first performs a RAM clear process (step S9010). By the RAM clearing process, predetermined data (for example, the data of the count value of the counter for generating the random number for normal symbol determination) is initialized to 0, but an arbitrary value or a predetermined value It may be initialized to. Further, the predetermined area (for example, the data of the count value of the counter for generating the normal symbol per determination random number) may be left as it is without initializing the entire area of the RAM 9055. Further, the start address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 9054 is set to the pointer (step S9011), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set to the work area (step S9012).

  By the processing of steps S9011 and S9012, for example, a normal symbol per determination random number counter, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, etc. Initially set to a flag for selectively performing processing according to the control state. The value is set.

  Further, the CPU 9056 is an initialization designation command for initializing a sub-board (a board on which a microcomputer other than the main board 9031 is mounted) (a command indicating that the game control microcomputer 90560 has executed initialization processing). Is also transmitted) to the sub-board (step S9013). For example, when the effect control microcomputer 90100 receives the initialization designation command, the effect display device 909 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized, that is, performs initialization notification.

  Further, the CPU 9056 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 9053 (step S9014). The CPU 9056 makes settings for causing the random number circuit 9053 to update the value of the random R′, for example, by executing processing according to the random number circuit setting program.

  Then, in step S9015, the CPU 9056 sets the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 90560 so that a timer interrupt is taken periodically at predetermined time intervals (for example, 4 ms). That is, a value corresponding to, for example, 4 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is taken every 4 ms.

  When the execution of the initialization process (steps S9010 to S9015) is completed, the CPU 9056 repeatedly executes the display random number updating process (step S9017) and the initial value random number updating process (step S9018) in the main process. When the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are executed, the interrupt prohibited state is set (step S9016), and when the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are completed, the interrupt permitted state is set. It is set (step S9019). In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining the stop symbol of the special symbol when the big hit is not made, and a random number for determining whether or not the reach is made when the big hit is not made. The random number updating process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number. The initial value random number updating process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random numbers. In this embodiment, the random number for the initial value is the initial value of the count value of the counter for generating a random number for deciding whether or not to win the normal symbol (normal symbol per-determination random number generation counter). It is a random number for determining. A game control process for controlling the progress of a game to be described later (the game control microcomputer 90560 controls the game display device, the variable winning ball device, the ball payout device, and other game devices provided in the game machine by itself. In the process of, or the process of transmitting a command signal to control other microcomputer, also referred to as the game device control process), the count value of the random number per ordinary symbol is one round (normal random number for per symbol determination) When the number of numerical values between the minimum value and the maximum value of the possible values has been increased), the initial value is set to the counter.

  In this embodiment, the reach effect is executed using effect symbols variably displayed on the effect display device 909. Further, when the display result of the special symbol is a big hit symbol, the reach effect is always executed (however, in the case of the sudden probability jackpot, the reach does not occur and the sudden probability jackpot symbol (eg, "135") is not reached. May be displayed as a stop). When the display result of the special symbol is not a big hit symbol, the game control microcomputer 90560 determines whether or not the reach effect is executed by performing a lottery for determining the variation pattern type and the variation pattern using random numbers. To do. However, it is the production control microcomputer 90100 that actually executes the reach production control.

  When the timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 9056 executes the timer interrupt process of steps S9020 to S9034 shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power-off detection process is executed to detect whether a power-off signal has been output (whether or not the power-on signal has been turned on) (step S9020). The power-off signal is output, for example, when the power supply monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply board detects a decrease in the voltage of the power supply supplied to the gaming machine. Then, in the power-off detection process, when the CPU 9056 detects that the power-off signal has been output, the CPU 9056 executes a power supply stop process for saving necessary data in the backup RAM area. Next, the detection signals of the gate switch 9032a, the first starting port switch 9013a, the second starting port switch 9014a, and the count switch 9023 are input via the input driver circuit 9058, and the states of these are determined (switch processing: step S9021). ).

  Next, the CPU 9056 is the first special symbol display device 908a, the second special symbol display device 908b, the normal symbol display device 9010, the first special symbol hold storage display device 9018a, the second special symbol hold storage display device 9018b, the normal symbol. A display control process for controlling the display of the pending storage display 9041 is executed (step S9022). Regarding the first special symbol display device 908a, the second special symbol display device 908b and the normal symbol display device 9010, a drive signal is output to each display device according to the contents of the output buffer set in steps S9032 and S9033. Execute control.

  In addition, a process for updating the count value of each counter for generating each determination random number such as a normal symbol per determination random number used for game control is performed (determination random number update process: step S9023). The CPU 9056 further performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number (initial value random number update process, display random number update process: steps S9024 and S9025).

  Further, the CPU 9056 performs special symbol process processing (step S9026). In the special symbol process processing, the first special symbol display device 908a, the second special symbol display device 908b and the special symbol process flag for controlling the special winning opening in a predetermined order, the corresponding process is executed. CPU9056 updates the value of the special symbol process flag according to the gaming state.

  Next, normal symbol process processing is performed (step S9027). In the normal symbol process process, the CPU 9056 executes the corresponding process according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 9010 in a predetermined order. The CPU 9056 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag according to the gaming state. In the normal symbol process process of step S9027, the variable display of the normal symbol is executed based on the detection of the passage of the game ball to the gate 9032, and the variable display result is derived and displayed, or the variable display result of the normal symbol is displayed. When is hit, a process of controlling the variable winning ball device 9015 to an open state or a closed state is executed.

  Further, the CPU 9056 performs a process of sending a production control command to the production control microcomputer 90100 (production control command control process: step S9028).

  Further, the CPU 9056 performs information output processing for outputting data such as big hit information, start information, and probability variation information supplied to the hall management computer (step S9029).

  Further, the CPU 9056 executes prize ball processing such as setting the number of prize balls based on the detection signals of the first starting port switch 9013a, the second starting port switch 9014a and the count switch 9023 (step S9030). Specifically, the payout control micro controller mounted on the payout control board 9037 according to the winning detection based on that any one of the first start opening switch 9013a, the second start opening switch 9014a and the count switch 9023 is turned on. A payout control command (award ball number signal) indicating the number of award balls is output to the computer. The payout control microcomputer drives the ball payout device 9097 in response to a payout control command indicating the number of prize balls.

  In this embodiment, the RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided. However, the CPU 9056 is concerned with turning on/off the solenoid in the RAM area corresponding to the output state of the output port. The content is output to the output port (step S9031: output process).

  Further, the CPU 9056 performs special symbol display control processing for setting special symbol display control data for performing special symbol effect display according to the value of the special symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data ( Step S9032).

  Further, the CPU 9056 performs a normal symbol display control process for setting the normal symbol display control data for performing the effect display of the normal symbol in the output buffer for setting the normal symbol display control data according to the value of the normal symbol process flag ( Step S9033). CPU9056, for example, until the end flag is set when the start flag for the variation of the normal symbol is set, the variation speed of the normal symbol is switched between display states (“○” and “x”) every 0.2 seconds. At such a speed, the value of the display control data set in the output buffer (for example, 1 indicating “◯” and 0 indicating “x”) is switched every 0.2 seconds. Further, the CPU 9056 outputs the drive signal in step S9022 in accordance with the display control data set in the output buffer, thereby performing the effect display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 9010.

  After that, the interrupt permission state is set (step S9034), and the process ends.

  By the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is activated every 4 ms. The game control process corresponds to the process of steps S9021 to S9033 (excluding step S9029) in the timer interrupt process. Further, in this embodiment, the game control process is executed in the timer interrupt process, but in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set, and the game control process is the main process. May be executed in.

  If the first special symbol display device 908a or the second special symbol display device 908b and the effect display device 909 displaces the stop symbol, the variable display state of the effect symbol is changed after the variable display of the effect symbol is started. A predetermined combination of effect symbols that does not reach may be stopped and displayed without reaching the reach state. Such a variable display mode of the effect symbol is referred to as a variable display mode of "non-reach" (also referred to as "normal loss") in the case where the variable display result is a deviating symbol.

  If the first special symbol display device 908a or the second special symbol display device 908b and the effect display device 909 displaces the stop symbol, the variable display state of the effect symbol is changed after the variable display of the effect symbol is started. The reach effect may be executed after the reach state is reached, and a combination of predetermined effect symbols that are not the big hit symbols may be stopped and displayed. The variable display result of such effect symbols is referred to as a variable display mode of “reach” (also referred to as “reach loss”) when the variable display result is “off”.

  In this embodiment, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 908a or the second special symbol display device 908b, the reach effect is executed after the variable display state of the effect symbol becomes the reach state. Finally, the production symbols are finally stopped and displayed in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" symbol display areas 909L, 909C, 909R on the effect display device 9 (however, in the case of a sudden probability big hit). In some cases, sudden change jackpot pattern (for example, "135") may be stopped and displayed without reaching.

  When "5", which is a small hit, is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 908a or the second special symbol display device 908b, in the effect display device 909, the variable display mode of the effect symbol is "a sudden sudden change big hit". After the variable display of the effect symbol is performed as in the case of, the predetermined small hit symbol (the same symbol as the sudden probability big hit symbol. For example, "135") may be stopped and displayed. The display effect on the effect display device 9 corresponding to the small display "5" which is a small hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 908a or the second special symbol display device 908b is referred to as a variable display mode of "small hit". .

  Here, the small hit is a hit that is allowed up to the number of times of opening the special winning opening is smaller than that of the big hit (in this embodiment, the opening for 0.1 seconds is twice). When the small hit game is over, the game state does not change. That is, there is no transition from the probability changing state to the normal state or from the normal state to the probability changing state. Further, the sudden probability sudden big hit is allowed up to a small number of times the big winning opening is opened in the big hit game state (two times for 0.1 second in this embodiment), but the opening time of the big winning opening is extremely large. It is a short big hit, and it is a big hit that shifts the game state after the big hit game to the probability variation state (that is, by doing so, it looks to the player as if it suddenly changed to the probability variation state. Is). That is, in this embodiment, the sudden winning big hit and the small hit have the same opening pattern of the special winning opening. By controlling in this way, when the special winning opening is opened twice for 0.1 seconds, it is impossible to recognize whether it is a sudden change big hit or a small hit, so a high probability state for the player. (Probably changed state) can be expected, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

  When the gaming machine is configured such that all types of big hits are probability-change big hits, it is not necessary to provide a small hit. Also, when the big hit types are all probability varying big hits, if a small hit is provided, it is only changed to the probability varying state (high-probability state), and the sudden probability big hit is not accompanied by a time-saving state (high base state). Is preferably provided.

  FIG. 28 is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern of the effect symbol prepared in advance. As shown in FIG. 28, in this embodiment, as the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “out” and the variable display mode of the effect design is “non-reach”, non-reach PA1′-1 to A variation pattern of non-reach PA1'-4 is prepared. In addition, as a variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “out” and the variable display mode of the effect design is “reach”, normal PA2′-1 to normal PA2′-2, normal PB2′-1 to normal Variation patterns of PB2'-2, super PA3'-1 to super PA3'-2, and super PB3'-1 to super PB3'-2 are prepared. As shown in FIG. 28, the variation pattern of the non-reach PA1′-4 that is used when the reach is not performed and involves the effect of pseudo-relation is re-varied once. When the normal PB2′-1 is used among the variation patterns used when reaching and with the effect of pseudo-relation, the re-variation is performed once. Also, in the case of using the normal PB2′-2 among the variation patterns used for reach and involving the effect of pseudo-relation, the re-variation is performed twice. Furthermore, when the super PA3'-1 to the super PA3'-2 are used among the variation patterns that are used when reaching and the pseudo rendition is performed, the revariation is performed three times. It should be noted that the re-variation is to temporarily execute an effect symbol that is once out from the start of variable display of the effect symbol until the display result is derived and displayed, and then execute the variable display of the effect symbol again. .

  Further, as shown in FIG. 28, in this embodiment, as a variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result of the special symbol becomes the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol, the normal PA2′-3 to the normal PA2′-4, Normal PB2'-3 to Normal PB2'-4, Super PA3'-3 to Super PA3'-4, Super PB3'-3 to Super PB3'-4, Special PG1'-1 to Special PG1'-3, Special PG2 Variation patterns of -1' to special PG2'-2 are prepared. In FIG. 28, the variation patterns of the special PG1'-1 to the special PG1'-3 and the special PG2'-1 to the special PG2'-2 are the variation patterns used in the case of sudden probability big hit or small hit. is there. Further, as shown in FIG. 28, when the normal PB2′-3 is used among the variation patterns which are used when the sudden variation big hit or the small hit is not accompanied by the effect of pseudo-relation, the re-variation is performed once. Further, in the case of using the normal PB2′-4 among the fluctuation patterns used when reaching and with the effect of pseudo-relation, the re-changing is performed twice. Further, in the case of using the super PA3'-3 to the super PA3'-4 among the fluctuation patterns used for reach and accompanied by the effect of pseudo-relation, the re-changing is performed three times. In addition, the variation pattern of the special PG 1'-3 used in the case of the sudden variation big hit or the small hit and accompanied by the effect of pseudo-repetition is re-varied once.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 28, when the variation time is fixedly set according to the type of reach (for example, in the case of super reach A with pseudo-linkage, the variation time is 32). The fixed time is fixed at 0.75 seconds, and the variable time is fixed at 22.75 seconds in the case of the super reach A without pseudo-link.) However, even in the case of the same type of super reach, The varying time may be different according to the total number of pending storages. For example, even when the same type of super reach is involved, the variation time may be shortened as the number of total pending storage increases. Further, for example, even in the case of the same type of super reach, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, the variable time may be different depending on the first number of reserved memories, When the variable display of the two special symbols is performed, the variable time may be different depending on the second number of reserved memories. In this case, a separate determination table is prepared for each value of the first pending storage number and the second pending storage number (for example, the variation pattern type determination table for the pending storage numbers 0 to 2 and the pending storage numbers 3 and 4). A variation pattern type determination table for use in advance) may be prepared, and the determination time may be selected according to the value of the first number of pending storages or the second number of pending storages, and the varying time may be different.

FIG. 29 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. Each random number is used as follows.
(1) Random 1'(MR1'): The type of big hit (normal big hit, probability variation big hit, sudden probability variation big hit described later) is determined (for big hit type determination)
(2) Random 2'(MR2'): Determines the type (type) of variation pattern (for variation pattern type determination)
(3) Random 3'(MR3'): Determine the variation pattern (variation time) (for variation pattern determination)
(4) Random 4'(MR4'): Determine whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol (for normal symbol hit determination)
(5) Random 5'(MR5'): Determine the initial value of random 4'(for determining random 4'initial value)

  In this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern is first determined by using the fluctuation pattern type determination random number (random 2′) and then determined by using the fluctuation pattern determination random number (random 3′). One of the fluctuation patterns included in the fluctuation pattern type is determined. As such, in this embodiment, the variation pattern is determined by the two-stage lottery process.

  The variation pattern type is a group of a plurality of variation patterns grouped according to the characteristics of the variation mode. For example, a plurality of variation patterns are grouped by the type of reach, and a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with normal reach, a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with super reach A, and a variation pattern with super reach B are included. It may be divided into fluctuation pattern types. Further, for example, a plurality of variation patterns are grouped by the number of times of re-variation of pseudo-repeating, and a variation pattern type including a variation pattern without pseudo-reaction, a variation pattern type including one variation pattern, and It may be divided into a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of two variations and a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of three re-variations. Further, for example, a plurality of variation patterns may be grouped according to the presence/absence of effects such as pseudo-relations and slip effects.

  In this embodiment, as will be described later, in the case of the normal big hit and the probability variation big hit, the normal CA3'-1, which is the change pattern type including the change pattern involving only the normal reach, and the normal reach and the pseudo-relation are included. The classification is classified into a normal CA3'-2 which is a fluctuation pattern type including a fluctuation pattern and a super CA3'-3 which is a fluctuation pattern type involving super reach. Further, in the case of a sudden probability big hit, it is classified into a special CA4′-1 which is a fluctuation pattern type including a non-reach fluctuation pattern and a special CA4′-2 which is a fluctuation pattern type including a fluctuation pattern with reach. It is divided. Further, in the case of a small hit, it is classified into a special CA4′-1 which is a fluctuation pattern type including a non-reach fluctuation pattern. Further, in the case of being out of alignment, a non-reach CA2′-1 that is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern that does not involve a reach, a pseudo-relation, or a sliding effect, and a variation pattern that does not involve reach but that includes a pseudo-relation or a sliding effect. The non-reach CA2'-2 that is a variation pattern type including a change pattern, the non-reach CA2'-3 that is a variation pattern type that includes a variation pattern of a shortened variation that does not involve a reach, a pseudo-relation, or a sliding effect, and a variation that includes only a normal reach. Normal CA2'-4, which is a variation pattern type including a pattern, normal CA2'-5, which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with normal reach and re-variation two times, and normal reach and one variation again. It is classified into a normal CA2'-6, which is a fluctuation pattern type including a fluctuation pattern involving a series, and a super CA2'-7, which is a fluctuation pattern type including super reach.

  In step S9023 in the game control process shown in FIG. 27, the game control microcomputer 90560 is a counter for generating the random number for jackpot type determination of (1) and the random number for normal symbol determination of (4). Count up (add 1). That is, those are the judgment random numbers, and the other random numbers are the display random numbers (random 2', random 3') or the initial value random numbers (random 5'). Note that random numbers other than the above random numbers may be used to enhance the game effect. In addition, in this embodiment, a random number generated by hardware built in the game control microcomputer 90560 (or hardware external to the game control microcomputer 90560) may be used as the big hit determination random number. Note that the random numbers for jackpot determination may be software random numbers instead of hardware random numbers.

  FIG. 30A is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 9054, and is a table in which jackpot determination values to be compared with the random R′ are set. The big hit determination table includes a normal big hit determination table used in a normal state (a game state that is not the probability changed state) and a probability variation time big hit determination table used in the probability changed state. The numerical values described in the left column of FIG. 30(A) are set in the normal time jackpot determination table, and the numerical values described in the right column of FIG. 30(A) are set in the probability variation jackpot determination table. Is set. The numerical value described in FIG. 30(A) is a jackpot determination value.

  30B and 30C are explanatory diagrams showing a small hit determination table. The small hitting determination table is a set of data stored in the ROM 9054, and is a table in which a small hitting determination value to be compared with the random R'is set. The small hit determination table, the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) used when performing the variable display of the first special symbol, and the small hit determination table used when performing the variable display of the second special symbol There is (for the second special symbol). The small hitting determination table (for the first special symbol) is set to each numerical value described in FIG. 30(B), and the small hitting determination table (for the second special symbol) is shown in FIG. 30(C). Each listed numerical value is set. In addition, the numerical values described in FIGS. 30B and 30C are small hit determination values.

  The small hit may be determined only when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, and the small hit may not be provided when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed. In this case, the small hit determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 30(C) may not be provided. In this embodiment, the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed when the game state is shifted to the probability change state. Even if the gaming state is shifted to the probability variation state, a small hit occurs so that if the configuration is performed to inspire whether or not the probability variation will occur, the current gaming state is the probability variation state. On the contrary, it makes the player feel annoyed. Therefore, if the small hit does not occur during the variable display of the second special symbol, the small hit is less likely to occur when the game state is the positive changed state, and the stirrer effect against the positive change is not performed more than necessary. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player feels troublesome.

  The CPU 9056 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 9053 at a predetermined time and uses the extracted value as the value of the big hit determination random number (random R′). The big hit determination random number value is shown in FIG. When it matches any of the jackpot determination values shown, it is determined to be a jackpot (normal jackpot, probability variation jackpot, sudden probability variation jackpot, which will be described later) for the special symbol. Also, when the big hit determination random number value matches any of the small hit determination values shown in FIGS. 30(B) and 30(C), it is determined to make a small hit for the special symbol. The “probability” shown in FIG. 30(A) indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit. Further, the "probability" shown in FIGS. 30(B) and 30(C) indicates the probability (ratio) of a small hit. Also, to determine whether to make a big hit, it is to make a decision to move to the big hit gaming state, the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 908a or the second special symbol display 908b It also means deciding whether or not to make a jackpot design. Also, to determine whether to make a small hit, it is to determine whether to shift to the small hit game state, stop in the first special symbol display 908a or the second special symbol display 908b It is also to decide whether or not to make the symbol a small hit symbol.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 30(B) and 30(C), when the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) is used, the small hit is determined at a rate of 1/300. On the other hand, when the small hit determination table (second special symbol) is used, a case where the small hit is determined at a rate of 1/3000 will be described. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the start winning a prize is given to the first starting winning opening 9013 and the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the starting winning is given to the second starting winning a prize opening 9014 and the second special symbol is displayed. Compared to the case where the variable display is executed, the percentage of the “small hit” is determined.

  30D and 30E are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination tables 90131a and 90131b stored in the ROM 9054. Of these, FIG. 30(D) determines the jackpot type by using the pending storage based on the fact that the game ball has won the first starting winning opening 9013 (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed). It is a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) 90131a in the case. Further, FIG. 30(E) is a case where the jackpot type is determined by using the pending storage based on the fact that the game ball has won the second starting winning opening 9014 (that is, when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed). Is a big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol) 90131b.

  The jackpot type determination tables 90131a and 90131b, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot pattern, the jackpot type is "normal jackpot" based on a random number (random 1') for jackpot type determination, It is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of the "probability variation jackpot" and the "probability variation jackpot". Note that in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 30D and 30E, the jackpot type determination table 90131a is assigned eight determination values for “sudden probability big hit” (40 minutes). 8 is determined to be a sudden probability big jackpot), whereas the jackpot type determination table 90131b is assigned two determination values for “a sudden probability big jackpot” (ratio 2/40). Suddenly decided as a sudden change jackpot in)) Explain the case. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the start winning a prize is given to the first starting winning opening 9013 and the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the starting winning is given to the second starting winning a prize opening 9014 and the second special symbol is displayed. Compared with the case where the variable display is executed, the rate of being determined as “a sudden probability big hit” is high. It should be noted that the "sudden probability sudden big hit" is distributed only to the jackpot type determination table 90131a for the first special symbol, and the "sudden probability large jackpot" is not distributed to the jackpot type determination table 90131b for the second special symbol (that is, , The "special sudden change big hit" may be determined only when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed).

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 30(D) and 30(E), a sudden certainty variation jackpot (two-round jackpot) as the first specific game state in which a predetermined amount of game value is given, and the game. There is a case where it is determined to be a normal jackpot and a probability variation jackpot (15 round jackpot) as the second specific game state in which a game value of a larger amount than the value is given, and when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed Although the case of deciding to be the first specific game state at a high rate is shown, the game value to be given is not limited to the number of rounds as shown in this embodiment. For example, as compared with the first specific game state, the second specific game state in which the permissible amount of the winning number (count number) of game balls to the big winning opening per round is increased as the game value is determined. Good. Further, for example, as compared with the first specific game state, the second specific game state in which the opening time of the special winning opening per one big hit during the big hit is extended may be determined. Further, for example, even in the case of the same 15 round big hit, the first specific game state in which the special winning opening is opened once per round and the second specific game state in which the special winning opening is opened multiple times per round are set. It is possible to prepare and increase the game value in the second specific game state by substantially increasing the number of times the special winning opening is opened. In this case, for example, in either the case of the first specific game state or the second specific game state, when the special winning opening is opened 15 times (in this case, all 15 rounds in the case of the first specific game state) May be ended, and in the case of the second specific game state, the undigested round remains), and an effect may be executed in a manner that fuels whether or not the big hit continues. Then, in the case of the first specific game state, since all 15 rounds have been internally ended, the jackpot game is ended, and in the case of the second specific game state, the undigested round remains internally. Therefore, the jackpot game may be continued (an effect in which the jackpot opening is additionally started by a bonus after finishing the jackpot opening 15 times).

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 30(D) and 30(E), the types of big hits include “normal big hit”, “probably odd big hit”, and “suddenly sudden big hit”. In this embodiment, the number of rounds executed in the big hit game is two types, 15 rounds and 2 rounds, but the number of rounds executed in the big hit game is shown in this embodiment. Not limited to For example, a 7R certainty variation jackpot for controlling a seven-round jackpot game and a 5R certainty variation jackpot for controlling a five-round jackpot game may be provided. Further, in this embodiment, there are three types of big hit types, namely, “normal big hit”, “probability change big hit”, and “sudden probability change big hit”. A jackpot type may be provided. On the contrary, the number of types of big hits may be less than three, and for example, only two types of big hits may be provided.

  The "normal big hit" is a big hit that is controlled to a big hit game state of 15 rounds and shifts to a time saving state (high base state) after the end of the big hit game state (see steps S90167 and 90168 described later). Then, after shifting to the time saving state, when the variable display is completed 100 times, the time saving state ends (see steps S90168 and S90137 to 90140 described later). In the present embodiment, the time saving state is also ended when a big hit occurs after the shift to the time saving state and before the execution of the variable display 100 times is ended (see step S90132 described later).

  The "probable variation big hit" is a big jackpot which is controlled to a big hit game state of 15 rounds and shifts to the probability variation state (high probability state) after the end of the big hit game state (in this embodiment, it is shifted to the probability variation state. The time saving state (high base state) is also entered (see steps S90169 and S90170 to be described later). After the transition to the probability variation state, the probability variation state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see step S90132 described later).

  In addition, the “sudden probability big hit” is allowed up to a number of times when the special winning opening is opened less than “normal big hit” or “probably large hit” (in this embodiment, the opening is 0.1 second twice). It is a big hit. That is, in the case of "a sudden sudden big hit", the big hit game state of two rounds is controlled. In addition, in "normal big hit" and "probability variation big hit", the opening time of the big winning opening per round is as long as 29 seconds, whereas in "sudden probability variation jackpot", the opening time of the big winning opening per round It is extremely short at 0.1 seconds, and it can hardly be expected that a game ball will win the big winning opening during a big hit game. Then, in this embodiment, after the sudden probability big hit game state is suddenly changed to the probability variation state (high probability state) (in this embodiment, the probability variation state is changed to the time saving state (high base state). (See steps S90169 and S90170 described later). After the transition to the probability variation state, the probability variation state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see step S90132 described later).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, even when a "small hit" occurs, the special winning opening is opened twice for 0.1 seconds each, and a big hit game state due to "a sudden sudden change big hit" occurs. Similar control is performed. Then, in the case of "small hit", the game state does not change after the opening of the special winning opening twice, and the game state before the "small hit" is maintained. By doing so, it is made impossible to recognize whether it is a "sudden variation big hit" or a "small hit", and the enjoyment of the game is improved.

  The jackpot type determination tables 90131a and 90131b have numerical values that are compared with the value of random 1', and the determination values (the jackpot type determination that correspond to each of the "normal jackpot", "probability variation jackpot", and "sudden confirmation variation jackpot". Value) is set. When the value of Random 1′ matches any of the jackpot type determination values, the CPU 9056 determines the type of the jackpot as the type corresponding to the matched jackpot type determination value.

  31(A) to (C) are explanatory diagrams showing the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 90132A to 90132C. The jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 90132A to 90132C indicate that when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot pattern, the variation pattern type is a random number for variation pattern type determination according to the determination result of the jackpot type. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine any one of a plurality of types based on (random 2').

  Each of the jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 90132A to 90132C is a numerical value (determination value) that is compared with the value of a random number (random 2') for variation pattern type determination, and is normal CA3'-1 to normal CA3'. -2, super CA3'-3, special CA4'-1, and special CA4'-2, the determination value corresponding to any of the variation pattern types is set.

  For example, the jackpot variation pattern classification determination table 90132A shown in FIG. 31(A) used when the jackpot type is “normal jackpot” and FIG. 31B used when the jackpot type is “probable variation jackpot”. The assignment of determination values to the variation pattern types of normal CA3′-1 to normal CA3′-2 and super CA3′-3 is different from the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 90132B.

  In this way, when comparing the jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 90132A to 90132C selected according to the jackpot type, the assignment of the determination value to each variation pattern type differs depending on the jackpot type. Further, the determination value is assigned to the variation pattern type that differs depending on the jackpot type. Therefore, different fluctuation pattern types can be determined according to the result of the determination as to which of the plurality of types the big hit type can be, and the ratios determined for the same fluctuation pattern type can be different.

  As shown in FIGS. 31(A) and 31(B), in this embodiment, in the case of "normal big hit" or "probable variation big hit", a random number (random 2') for determining the variation pattern type is used. If the value is 150 to 251, it is understood that the variable display with at least the super reach (super reach A, super reach B) is executed.

  In addition, regarding the super reach jackpot, the variation pattern type (variation pattern type that includes the variation patterns of the super PA3′-3 and super PA3′-4) and the variation pattern type that does not include the pseudo association (super PB3′−). 3 and variation pattern types including variation patterns of super PB3'-4). In this case, in both of the large hit variation pattern type determination table 90132A for the normal big hit and the large hit variation pattern type determination table 90132B for the probability variation big hit, the variation pattern type accompanied by the super reach and the pseudo continuous and the super reach and the pseudo continuous are defined. A variation pattern type that is not accompanied by this is assigned.

  In addition, in the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 90132C used when the jackpot type is the "abrupt probability sudden big hit", for example, the jackpot types such as the special CA4'-1 and the special CA4'-2 are other than the "sudden sudden change jackpot". In some cases, the determination value is assigned to the variation pattern type to which the determination value is not assigned. Therefore, when the variable display result is "big hit" and the type of big hit is "sudden probability big hit", the sudden big hit control is different from the normal big hit or the positive big hit. It can be determined by the variation pattern type.

  Further, FIG. 31D is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit variation pattern type determination table 90132D. The small hit variation pattern type determination table 90132D includes a plurality of variation pattern types based on a random number (random 2') for determining a variation pattern type when it is determined that the variable display result is a small hit pattern. It is a table that is referred to to determine any of the types. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 31(D), when it is decided to make a small hit, a case where special CA4′-1 is decided as the variation pattern type is shown. There is.

  32A to 32C are explanatory diagrams showing the variation pattern classification determination tables 90135A to 90135C for deviation. Of these, FIG. 32(A) shows the out-of-range variation pattern type determination table 90135A used when the game state is the normal state and the total number of pending storages is less than three. Further, FIG. 32B shows a variation pattern type determination table 90135B for outliers used when the gaming state is the normal state and the total number of pending storages is 3 or more. Further, FIG. 32C shows a variation pattern type determination table 90135C for out-of-sync used when the gaming state is the probability variation state or the time saving state. The fluctuation pattern type determination tables 90135A to 90135C for deviation include a plurality of fluctuation pattern types based on a random number (random 2′) for fluctuation pattern type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a deviation pattern. It is a table that is referenced to determine any of the types.

  Note that the example shown in FIG. 32 shows a case where different out-of-range variation pattern type determination tables 90135B to 90135C are used when the gaming state is the probability variation state or the time saving state and when the total pending storage number is 3 or more. However, it may be configured to use the common out-of-range variation pattern type determination table in the case of the probability change state or the time saving state and in the case of the total pending storage number being 3 or more. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 32C, the common variation pattern type determination table 90135C for probability variation/time saving is used regardless of the total pending storage number. As the variation pattern type determination table, a plurality of out-of-range variation pattern determination tables (tables with different determination values) according to the total number of pending storages may be used.

  In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, the stagger variation pattern type determination table 90135A used when the total pending storage number is less than 3 and the total pending storage number is 3 or more Although the case of using two types of tables, that is, the deviation variation pattern type determination table 90135B, is used, the method of dividing the deviation variation pattern type determination table is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, separate outlier fluctuation pattern type determination tables may be provided for each value of the total pending storage number (that is, for the total pending storage number 0, the total pending storage number 1, and the total pending storage number 2). , The deviation variation pattern type determination tables for the total sum storage memory number 3 and the total sum storage memory number 4 may be separately used). Further, for example, a deviation variation pattern type determination table corresponding to a combination of a plurality of other values of the total pending storage number may be used. For example, a deviation variation pattern type determination table for the total pending storage numbers 0 to 2, the total pending storage number 3, the total pending storage number 4,... May be used.

  Further, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which a plurality of deviation variation pattern type determination tables are provided according to the total pending storage number, but the deviation variation pattern type determination is performed according to the first pending storage number and the second pending storage number. A plurality of tables may be provided. For example, when performing the variable display of the first special symbol, it is possible to use a deviation variation pattern type determination table prepared separately for each value of the first reserved storage number (that is, the first reserved storage number). A deviation variation pattern type determination table for 0, first reserved memory number 1, first reserved memory number 2, first reserved memory number 3, first reserved memory number 4... You may use each separately). Further, for example, a deviation variation pattern type determination table corresponding to a combination of a plurality of other values of the first reserved storage number may be used. For example, a deviation variation pattern type determination table for the first number of reserved storages 0 to 2, for the first number of reserved storages 3, for the first number of reserved storages 4 may be used. Even in this case, if the number of first pending storages or the number of second pending storages is large (for example, 3 or more), the variation pattern type including the variation pattern with the short variation time may be easily selected. .. Even in such a case, a common determination value may be assigned to a variation pattern type including a variation pattern accompanied by super reach as a specific variable display pattern.

  The "particular effect mode" is a variation pattern type or variation pattern in which at least a high expectation for a big hit is set, such as a variation pattern involving super reach, and which can make a player have an expectation for a big hit. Is. Further, the “expectation degree (reliability) for the big hit” indicates an appearance rate (probability) at which the big hit appears when a variable display (for example, a variable display accompanied by super reach) is executed in the particular presentation mode. ing. For example, when a variable display accompanied by super reach is executed, the jackpot expectation is (proportion of executing super reach when it is decided to be big hit)/(when it is decided to be big hit and is determined to be lost). The rate at which superreach is performed in both cases) is calculated by calculating.

  Each of the out-of-range variation pattern type determination tables 90135A to 90135B is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number (random 2') for variation pattern type determination. A determination value corresponding to any of the fluctuation pattern types of CA2'-3, normal CA2'-4 to normal CA2'-6, and super CA2'-7 is set.

  As shown in FIGS. 32(A) and 32(B), in this embodiment, when the game state is out of order and the game state is the normal state, a random number (random 2') for determining the variation pattern type is used. If the value is 230 to 251, it is understood that the variable display involving at least the super-reach (super-reach A, super-reach B) is executed regardless of the total pending storage number.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 32(A) and 32(B), in this embodiment, when the game state is off and the game state is the normal state, a random number (random 2') for determining the variation pattern type is used. If the value is 1 to 79, it can be seen that, regardless of the total number of pending storages, the variable display of the normal fluctuation is executed at least without the reach (and without the effects such as the pseudo-relation and the sliding effect). With such a table configuration, in the present embodiment, the determination table (displacement variation pattern type determination tables 90135A and 90135B) includes at least variable display patterns other than the reach variable display pattern (variation pattern with reach). For some, regardless of the number of rights (the first reserved memory number, the second reserved memory number, the total reserved memory number) stored in the reserved storage means (first reserved memory buffer or second reserved memory buffer), A common determination value (1 to 79 in the example shown in FIGS. 32A and 32B) is assigned. Note that the "variable display pattern other than the reach variable display pattern" means, for example, that the variable display result is not accompanied by reach, accompanied by effects such as pseudo-relation and sliding effect, as shown in this embodiment. It is a variable display pattern (variation pattern) used when a big hit does not occur.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 31, the common big hit variation pattern type determination table is used regardless of the current game state, but is the current game state a sure change state? The big hit variation pattern type determination tables, which are separately prepared, may be used according to the normal state. Further, in this embodiment, when the total pending storage number is 3 or more, the shortening variation pattern type determination table for shortening shown in FIG. 32B is selected to determine the variation pattern of the shortening variation. Although the case where it is configured so that there is a case is shown, the total pending storage number (the first pending storage number or the second pending storage number may be used when the variation pattern of the shortened variation can be selected according to the current game state. ), the threshold value may be different. For example, when the gaming state is the normal state, when the total pending storage number is 3 (or, for example, when the first pending storage number or the second pending storage number is 2), for shortening The variation pattern type for deviation is selected so that the variation pattern of the shortening variation may be determined, and when the gaming state is the probability variation state or the time saving state, the total number of pending storages is 1 or 2 In the case of (or, for example, even when the number of first pending storages or the number of second pending storages is 0 or 1), the fluctuation pattern type for shortening fluctuation is selected and the fluctuation pattern of the shortening fluctuation is selected. It may be decided in some cases.

  33A and 33B are explanatory diagrams showing the hit variation pattern determination tables 90137A to 90137B stored in the ROM 9054. The hit variation pattern determination tables 90137A to 90137B determine the variation pattern according to the determination result of the jackpot type or the variation pattern type when it is determined that the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine the variation pattern to any one of a plurality of types based on a random number (random 3') for use. Each hit variation pattern determination table 90137A to 90137B is selected as a usage table according to the determination result of the variation pattern type. That is, the hit variation pattern determination table 90137A is selected as the use table in accordance with the determination result that the variation pattern type is any one of the normal CA3′-1 to the normal CA3′-2 and the super CA3′-3, and the variation pattern is selected. The hit variation pattern determination table 90137B is selected as the usage table in accordance with the determination result indicating that the type is either special CA4'-1 or special CA4'-2. Each hit variation pattern determination table 90137A to 90137B is a numerical value (determination value) that is compared with the value of the random number (random 3') for variation pattern determination according to the variation pattern type, and the variable display result of the effect symbols. Includes the data (judgment value) corresponding to any of a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the case of "big hit".

  In the example shown in FIG. 33A, as the variation pattern types, a normal CA3′-1 which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern involving only normal reach and a variation pattern type including a variation pattern involving normal reach and pseudo-link. And the normal CA3'-2 that is a change pattern type and the super CA3'-3 that is a change pattern type that includes a change pattern with super-reach (sometimes accompanied by pseudo-relation with super-reach) are shown. ing. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 33(B), as the variation pattern types, a special CA4′-1 which is a variation pattern type including a non-reach variation pattern and a special CA4 which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with reach. The case is shown in which the classification is made into'-2'. In FIG. 33(B), the variation pattern types may not be divided according to the presence or absence of reach, but may be divided according to the presence or absence of effects such as pseudo-relation and sliding effects. In this case, for example, the special CA4'-1 includes the special PG1'-1 and the special PG2'-1, which are the variation patterns that do not accompany the pseudo-relation and the sliding effect, and the special CA4'-2 includes the pseudo-reconnection and the special-relation. You may comprise so that special PG1'-2, special PG1'-3, and special PG2'-2 with a sliding effect may be included.

  FIG. 34 is an explanatory diagram showing the deviation variation pattern determination table 90138A stored in the ROM 9054. When it is determined that the variable display result is “out”, the outlier variation pattern determination table 90138A is based on the random number (random 3′) for determining the variation pattern according to the determination result of the variation pattern type. , A table that is referred to in order to determine the variation pattern as one of a plurality of types. The deviation variation pattern determination table 90138A is selected as the usage table according to the determination result of the variation pattern type.

  35 and 36 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of contents of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 90560. In the example shown in FIG. 35 and FIG. 36, the command 80XX (H) is a production control command (fluctuation pattern command) for designating a variation pattern of the effect symbol that is variably displayed on the effect display device 909 corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol. ) (Each corresponding to the variation pattern XX). That is, when a unique number is given to each of the usable fluctuation patterns shown in FIG. 28, there is a fluctuation pattern command corresponding to each of the fluctuation patterns specified by the number. In addition, "(H)" indicates that it is a hexadecimal number. The effect control command for designating the variation pattern is also a command for designating the variation start. Therefore, when the effect control microcomputer 90100 receives the command 80XX(H), the effect control microcomputer 90100 controls the effect display device 909 to start the variable display of effect symbols.

  Commands 8C01(H) to 8C05(H) are effect control commands indicating whether to make a big hit, whether to make a small hit, and a big hit type. Since the effect control microcomputer 90100 determines the display result of the effect symbol in response to the reception of the commands 8C01(H) to 8C05(H), the commands 8C01(H) to 8C05(H) are referred to as display result designation commands.

  Command 8D01 (H) is a production control command (first symbol variation designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started. Command 8D02 (H) is a production control command (second symbol variation designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the second special symbol is started. The first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command may be collectively referred to as a special symbol identification command (or symbol variation designation command). The variable pattern command may include information indicating whether to start the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol.

  Command 8F00 (H) is an effect control command (symbol confirmation designation command) indicating that the variable display (variation) of the fourth symbol is ended and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. When the effect control microcomputer 90100 receives the symbol fixing designation command, the variable display (fluctuation) of the fourth symbol is ended and the display result is derived and displayed.

  The command 9000 (H) is an effect control command (initialization designation command: power-on designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Command 9200 (H) is an effect control command (power failure recovery designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is restarted. The gaming control microcomputer 90560 transmits a power failure recovery designation command when data is stored in the backup RAM when power supply to the gaming machine is started, and otherwise, initialization designation Send a command.

  The command 9F00 (H) is a production control command (customer waiting demo designation command) that specifies a customer waiting demonstration.

  Commands A001 to A003 (H) are display control commands for displaying the fanfare screen, that is, designating the start of the big hit game (big hit start designation command: fanfare design command). In this embodiment, a big hit start 1 designation command, a big hit start 2 designation command, or a small hit/sudden variation big hit big start designation command is used according to the type of big hit. Specifically, the jackpot start 1 designation command (A001(H)) is used in the case of “normal jackpot”, and the jackpot start 2 designation command (A002(H)) is used in the case of “normal jackpot”. In the case of "sudden sudden change big hit" or "small hit", a small hit/sudden sudden change big hit start designation command (A003(H)) is used. It should be noted that the game control microcomputer 90560 may be configured to send a fanfare designating command for suddenly changing a sudden big hit to specify a fanfare designating command in the case of a sudden big hit, but not to send a fanfare designating command in the case of a small hit. Good.

  The command A1XX(H) is an effect control command (a special winning opening open designation command) indicating a display during opening of the special winning opening for the number (round) indicated by XX. Note that the special winning opening opening designation command is transmitted for each round with a value designating that round set in the EXT data, and therefore a different special winning opening opening designation command is transmitted for each round. For example, when executing the first round during the big hit game, a special winning opening open designation command (A101(H)) designating round 1 is transmitted, and when executing the tenth round during the big hit game. Sends a special winning opening open designation command (A10A(H)) designating round 10. A2XX(H) is an effect control command (designated command after opening the special winning opening) indicating the closing of the special winning opening for the number (round) indicated by XX. Since the special winning opening after-opening designation command is transmitted with the value designating that round being set in the EXT data for each round, a different special winning opening after-opening designation command is transmitted for each round. For example, when finishing the first round during the big hit game, a designation command (A201 (H)) after opening the special winning opening designating round 1 is transmitted, and when finishing the tenth round during the big hit game. Sends a special winning opening open designation command (A30A(H)) designating round 10.

  Command A301(H) is a production control command (big hit end 1 designation command: ending 1 designation command) for displaying the big hit end screen, that is, designating the end of the big hit game. The big hit end 1 designation command (A301 (H)) is used when the big hit game by the "normal big hit" is ended. Command A302 (H) is a production control command (big hit end 2 designation command: ending 2 designation command) for displaying the big hit end screen, that is, designating the end of the big hit game. The big hit end 2 designation command (A302 (H)) is used when the big hit game by "probably strange big hit" is ended. The command A303 (H) is a production control command (small hit/sudden sudden change big hit end designation command: ending 3 designation command) for designating the end of the game of small hit or the sudden sudden change big hit. Incidentally, the game control microcomputer 90560 is configured to send an ending designation command for sudden change jackpot end designation when it is a sudden probability big hit, but not to send an ending designation command when it is a small hit. Good.

  Command B000 (H) is an effect control command (normal state background designation command) that designates the background display when the game state is the normal state. The command B001 (H) is an effect control command (time saving state background specifying command) that specifies the background display when the game state is the time saving state. Command B002 (H) is a production control command (probability variation state background designation command) that designates the background display when the game state is the probability variation state.

  Command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first reserved memory number addition designating command) that specifies that the first reserved memory number has increased by 1. Command C100 (H) is a production control command (second reserved storage number addition designating command) that specifies that the second reserved storage number has increased by 1. Command C200 (H) is an effect control command (first reserved storage number subtraction designation command) that specifies that the first reserved storage number has decreased by 1. Command C300 (H) is an effect control command (second reserved storage number subtraction designation command) that specifies that the second reserved storage number has decreased by 1.

  In this embodiment, as the reserved storage information, for the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number, an effect control command (first reserved storage number addition designation) indicating that the reserved storage number has increased or decreased, respectively. Command, second reserved storage number addition designation command) is transmitted. However, the form of reserved storage information is not limited to that shown in this embodiment, and for example, the reserved storage in the following mode The information may be transmitted.

(1) As the reserved storage information, only one command is transmitted, which one of the first reserved memory and the second reserved memory is increased in the one command is specified, and the increased number of reserved memories (First reserved memory number or second reserved memory number) may be set as EXT data and transmitted.

(2) As the reserved storage information, only one command is transmitted, which one of the first reserved memory and the second reserved memory is increased in the one command is specified, and the total reserved memory number is set to the EXT data. May be set and transmitted.

(3) As the reserved memory information, which one of the first start winning opening 9013 and the second starting winning opening 9014 has the starting winning prize (whether the first holding memory or the second holding memory has increased) is designated. The production control command (the first start winning award designation command, the second starting award designation command) is transmitted, and in addition to that, a reserved storage number designation command for designating the number of reserved storages is transmitted. The total number of pending storages may be set as EXT data and transmitted.

(4) As the reserved memory information, which one of the first starting winning opening 9013 and the second starting winning opening 9014 has the starting winning a prize (whether the first holding memory or the second holding memory has increased) is designated. The production control command (the first start winning award designation command, the second starting award designation command) is transmitted, and in addition to that, the reserved storage number designation command for designating the reserved storage number is transmitted. The increased storage number (first storage number or second storage number) may be set as EXT data and transmitted.

  The command C4XX(H) and the command C6XX(H) are effect control commands (winning time determination result designating command) indicating the contents of the winning determination result. Of these, the command C4XX (H) is a production control command (symbol design command) that indicates the result of determination of whether or not to be a big hit, whether or not to be a small hit, and a type of big hit among the determination results at the time of winning. is there. Further, the command C6XX(H) is an effect control command indicating a determination result (fluctuation pattern type determination result) of which determination value range the variation pattern type random number value is in the winning determination result. (Variable category command).

  In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 90560 determines whether or not it is a big hit, whether or not it is a small hit, and a big hit type in a winning effect production process (see FIG. 44) described later. Then, it is determined which judgment value range the random number for fluctuation pattern type judgment falls within. Then, in the EXT data of the symbol designating command, a value designating a big hit or a small hit and a value designating the type of the big hit are set, and control is performed to transmit to the effect control microcomputer 90100. In addition, the EXT data of the variation category command is set to a value that specifies the range of the determination value as the determination result, and the control is performed to transmit the value to the effect control microcomputer 90100. In this embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 90100 can recognize the type of big hit, whether or not the display result is a big hit or a small hit, based on the value set in the symbol designating command. Based on the variation category command, the variation pattern type can be recognized when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number becomes a predetermined determination value.

  FIG. 37 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the symbol designating command. As shown in FIG. 37, in this embodiment, EXT data is set and a symbol designating command is transmitted according to whether or not a big hit or a small hit occurs and the type of the big hit.

  For example, in the winning effect process described later, if it is determined that the "out", the CPU 9056 transmits a symbol designating command (designation 1 designating command) in which "00 (H)" is set in the EXT data. In addition, for example, when it is determined that the "normal big hit" is determined, the CPU 9056 transmits a symbol designating command (designation 2 designating command) in which "01 (H)" is set in the EXT data. Further, for example, when it is determined that the "probable variation big hit" is determined, the CPU 9056 transmits a symbol designating command (designation 3 designating command) in which "02 (H)" is set in the EXT data. Further, for example, when it is determined that the "sudden probability big hit", the CPU 9056 transmits a symbol designation command (symbol 4 designation command) in which "03 (H)" is set in the EXT data. Further, for example, when it is determined that the "small hit" is determined, the CPU 9056 transmits a symbol designating command (designation 5 designating command) in which "04 (H)" is set in the EXT data. The EXT data set in the symbol designating command and the EXT data set in the display result designating command may be shared. With such a configuration, the data to be read can be made common when setting the symbol designating command and when setting the display result designating command.

  38 and 39 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the content of the variation category command. As shown in FIG. 38 and FIG. 39, in this embodiment, which gaming state, which display result the display result of the special symbol or the effect symbol is, and the random number for fluctuation pattern type determination at the time of starting winning. A value is set in the EXT data depending on whether or not it is determined that the range of the determination value is within the range, and the variation category command is transmitted.

  For example, when it is determined that the game state is in the normal state and out of the way at the time of starting winning, the CPU 9056 first determines whether the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 1 to 79 in step S90232 of the effect processing at the time of winning, which will be described later. Determine whether or not. When the value of the random number for fluctuation pattern type determination is 1 to 79, the CPU 9056 transmits a fluctuation category 1 command in which “00 (H)” is set in the EXT data. In this embodiment, when the game state is the normal state, the variation pattern type of non-reach CA2′-1 is commonly assigned to the range of the determination values 1 to 79 regardless of the total number of reserved memories. Therefore, the effect control microcomputer 90100 can recognize that the variation pattern type is at least non-reach CA2′-1 based on the receipt of the variation category 1 command. Next, when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 80 to 89, the CPU 9056 transmits a variation category 2 command in which “01(H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the value of the random number for fluctuation pattern type determination is 90 to 99, the CPU 9056 transmits the fluctuation category 3 command in which “02(H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 100 to 169, the CPU 9056 transmits a variation category 4 command in which “03(H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the value of the fluctuation pattern type determination random number is 170 to 199, the CPU 9056 transmits the fluctuation category 5 command in which “04 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 200 to 214, the CPU 9056 transmits a variation category 6 command in which “05(H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 215 to 229, the CPU 9056 transmits a variation category 7 command in which “06 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the value of the fluctuation pattern type determination random number is 230 to 251, the CPU 9056 transmits a fluctuation category 8 command in which “07 (H)” is set in the EXT data. In addition, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, the variation pattern type of the super CA 2′-7 is commonly assigned to the range of the determination values 230 to 251 regardless of the total number of pending storages. Therefore, the effect control microcomputer 90100 can recognize that the variation pattern type is at least Super CA2′-7 based on the reception of the variation category 8 command.

  The thresholds 79, 89, 99, 169, 169, 199, 214 and 229 used to determine which of the above-mentioned variation categories belongs are specifically shown in FIGS. 32(A) and 32(B). It is derived by picking up a value that can be the boundary of the range of the judgment value assigned to each fluctuation pattern type in the deviation variation pattern type judgment table. This also applies to the subsequent variation categories 9 to 10 and 21 to 29, and is assigned to each variation pattern type in the variation pattern type determination table shown in FIGS. 31(A) to (D) and FIG. 32(C). A threshold value used for category determination is derived by picking up a value that can be a boundary of the determined determination value range.

  In addition, for example, when it is determined that the gaming state is a probable variation state, a time saving state, or a deviation at the time of starting winning, the CPU 9056 first sets the value of the variation pattern type determination random number to 1 in step S90232 of the winning effect process described later. .About.219 is determined. When the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 1 to 219 (that is, the variation pattern type of non-reach CA2′-3), the CPU 9056 sets “08 (H)” in the EXT data. The variable category 9 command is transmitted. Then, the CPU 9056 sets “09 (H)” to the EXT data when the value of the fluctuation pattern type determination random number is 220 to 251 (that is, when it is the fluctuation pattern type of Super CA 2′-7). The variable category 10 command is transmitted.

  It should be noted that even when the game state is the probability change state or the time saving state, the variation pattern type of the super CA 2′-7 may be assigned to the range of the determination values 230 to 251. By doing so, it is possible to assign a common determination value to the variation pattern types of the super CA 2'-7 regardless of the gaming state. Therefore, when executing the process of step S90232 of the effect process at the time of winning, which will be described later, if it is not correct, the common determination process may be performed regardless of the gaming state, and the program capacity can be further reduced. Further, in this case, the game state determination process in step S90226 can be omitted.

  In addition, for example, when it is determined that a "normal big hit" is obtained at the time of starting winning, the CPU 9056 first determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determining random number is 1 to 74 in step S90232 of the winning effect process described below. To determine. When the value of the fluctuation pattern type determination random number is 1 to 74 (that is, when it is the normal CA3′-1 fluctuation pattern type), the CPU 9056 changes the EXT data by setting “10 (H)”. Send a category 21 command. Then, the CPU 9056 sets “11 (H)” to the EXT data when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 75 to 149 (that is, when it is the variation pattern type of normal CA3′-2). The changed category 22 command is transmitted. Then, the CPU 9056 sets “12 (H)” to the EXT data when the value of the random number for fluctuation pattern type determination is 150 to 251 (that is, when it is the fluctuation pattern type of Super CA3′-3). The changed category 23 command is transmitted.

  In addition, for example, when it is determined that the "probable variation big hit" is obtained at the time of starting winning, the CPU 9056 first determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determining random number is 1 to 38 in step S90232 of the effect processing at the time of winning described later. Determine whether. When the value of the fluctuation pattern type determination random number is 1 to 38 (that is, when it is the normal CA3′-1 fluctuation pattern type), the CPU 9056 changes the EXT data by setting “13 (H)”. Send a category 24 command. Then, the CPU 9056 sets “14 (H)” to the EXT data when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 39 to 79 (that is, the variation pattern type of the normal CA3′-2). The changed category 25 command is transmitted. Next, when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 80 to 251 (that is, when it is the variation pattern type of Super CA3′-3), the CPU 9056 sets “15 (H)” in the EXT data. The changed category 26 command is transmitted.

  In addition, for example, when it is determined that the sudden variation big hit is suddenly generated at the time of starting winning, the CPU 9056 first determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determining random number is 1 to 100 in step S90232 of the winning effect process described below. To judge. When the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 1 to 100 (that is, the variation pattern type of the special CA4′-1), the CPU 9056 changes the EXT data set to “16 (H)”. Send a category 27 command. Then, the CPU 9056 sets “17 (H)” to the EXT data when the value of the random number for fluctuation pattern type determination is 101 to 251 (that is, when it is the fluctuation pattern type of special CA4′-2). The changed category 28 command is transmitted.

  In addition, for example, when it is determined that a small hit will occur at the time of starting winning, the CPU 9056 transmits a variation category 29 command in which “18 (H)” is set in the EXT data.

  It should be noted that the total number of pending storages is not necessarily the same when the winning determination is made at the time of starting winning and when the actual variable display is started. There may be a case where the pattern type does not match the variation pattern type actually used in the variable display. However, in this embodiment, a common determination value is assigned to at least the variation pattern types of non-reach CA2′-1, super CA2′-7, and super CA3′-3 regardless of the total number of pending storages. Therefore (see FIGS. 31 and 32), there is no inconsistency between the winning determination result and the variation pattern type of the variation display that is actually executed. Therefore, in this embodiment, a look-ahead advance notice effect described later is executed for the variable display determined at the time of winning when the variation pattern type is Super CA2'-7 or Super CA3'-3. Note that only when it is determined that the variation pattern types are non-reach CA2′-1, super CA2′-7, and super CA3′-3, the variation category commands shown in FIGS. 38 and 39 (specifically, variation categories 1 command, variation category 8 command, variation category 23 command, variation category 26 command) may be transmitted, and variation category command may not be transmitted in the case of winning determination results of other variation pattern types. Further, when it is determined at the time of winning that it is other than the non-reach CA2′-1, super CA2′-7, and super CA3′-3, a variation category command indicating that the variation pattern type cannot be specified is transmitted. You can

  In addition, in this embodiment, in the case of the time saving state (high base state), when the starting winning prize to the first starting winning hole 9013 occurs, or the starting winning prize to the first starting winning hole 9013 during the big hit game, Except when it occurs (see steps S901215A and S901216A), the winning determination process is executed every time a start winning occurs, and the symbol designating command shown in FIG. 37 is transmitted and the fluctuations shown in FIGS. 38 and 39. Category command is sent. Then, the effect control microcomputer 90100 executes the pre-reading notice effect based on the received symbol designating command or variation category command.

  The effect control microcomputer 90100 (specifically, effect control CPU 90101) mounted on the effect control board 9080 receives the above-described effect control commands from the game control microcomputer 90560 installed on the main board 9031. Then, according to the contents shown in FIGS. 35 and 36, the display state of the image display device 909 is changed, the display state of the lamp is changed, and the sound number data is output to the voice output board 9070. To do.

  For example, the game control microcomputer 90560, the start winning a prize, each time the variable display of the special symbol is started in the first special symbol display 908a or the second special symbol display 908b, to specify the variation pattern of the effect symbol The variation pattern command and the display result designation command are transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 90100.

  In this embodiment, the effect control command has a 2-byte structure, the first byte indicates MODE (command classification), and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit (bit 7) of EXT data is always set to "0". Note that such a command form is an example, and other command forms may be used. For example, a control command composed of 1 byte or 3 bytes or more may be used.

  As a production control command transmission method, the production control command data is output to the production control board 9080 from the main board 9031 via the relay board 9077 by one byte by eight parallel signal lines of the production control signals CD0 to CD7. In addition to the production control command data, a method of outputting a pulse-shaped (rectangular wave) capture signal (production control INT signal) for instructing capture of the production control command data is used. 8-bit production control command data of the production control command is output in synchronization with the production control INT signal. The effect control microcomputer 90100 mounted on the effect control board 9080 detects that the effect control INT signal has risen, and starts the process of fetching 1-byte data by the interrupt process.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 35 and 36, the variation pattern command and the display result designation command are the variable display (variation) and the second special of the effect symbol corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 908a. The image display that can be used in common with the variable display (fluctuation) of the effect symbol corresponding to the variation of the second special symbol on the symbol display device 908b, and the effect is performed along with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. When controlling the production parts such as the device 909, it is possible not to increase the types of commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 90560 to the production control microcomputer 90100.

  40 and 41 are flowcharts showing an example of a program of special symbol process processing (step S9026) executed by the game control microcomputer 90560 (specifically, CPU 9056) mounted on the main board 9031. As described above, in the special symbol process process, the process for controlling the first special symbol display device 908a or the second special symbol display device 908b and the special winning opening is executed. In the special symbol process processing, the CPU 9056, if the first starting opening switch 9013a for detecting that the game ball has won the first starting winning opening 9013 is turned on, that is, starting to the first starting winning opening 9013 If a winning has occurred, a first starting opening switch passage process is executed (steps S90311 and S90312). Further, the CPU 9056, if the second start opening switch 9014a for detecting that the game ball is won in the second start winning opening 9014 is turned on, that is, the start winning to the second start winning opening 9014 has occurred. Then, the second starting opening switch passage processing is executed (steps S90313 and S90314). Then, any one of steps S90300 to S90310 is performed. If the first start winning opening switch 9013a or the second starting opening switch 9014a is not turned on, any one of steps S90300 to S90310 is performed according to the internal state.

  The processes of steps S903O to S90310 are the following processes.

  Special symbol normal processing (step S90300): is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 0. When the variable display of the special symbol can be started, the game control microcomputer 90560 confirms the number of stored numerical data (total number of reserved storages) stored in the reserved storage buffer. The storage number of the numerical data stored in the storage buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the total storage number counter. Also, if the count value of the total pending storage number counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit. When making a big hit, the big hit flag is set. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (1 in this example) according to step S90301. The jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game is over.

  Variation pattern setting process (step S90301): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 1. In addition, the variation pattern is determined, and the variation time in the variation pattern (variable display time: the time from the start of the variable display until the derived display (stop display) of the display result) is defined as the variation time of the variable display of the special symbol. Decide to do. In addition, the control for transmitting the variation pattern command according to the determined variation pattern to the effect control microcomputer 90100 is performed, and the variation time timer for measuring the variation time of the special symbol is started. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (2 in this example) corresponding to step S90302.

  Display result designation command transmission process (step S90302): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 2. The control for transmitting the display result designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90100 is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (3 in this example) corresponding to step S90303.

  Special symbol fluctuation during processing (step S90303): is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 3. When the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern setting process elapses (the variation time timer set in step S90301 times out, that is, the value of the variation time timer becomes 0), the effect control microcomputer 90100 determines the symbol. Control to transmit the designated command is performed, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90304 (4 in this example). Note that the effect control microcomputer 90100 controls the effect display device 909 so that the fourth symbol is stopped when the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 90560 is received.

  Special symbol stop process (step S90304): is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. When the big hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S90305. If the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90308 (8 in this example). When neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S90300. In this embodiment, based on the value of the special symbol process flag being 4, as will be described later, special symbol display control for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol in the special symbol display control process. The data is set in the output buffer for the special symbol display control data setting (see FIG. 52), and the stop symbol of the special symbol is actually stopped and displayed in accordance with the setting contents of the output buffer in the display control process of step S9022.

  Special winning opening opening preprocessing (step S90305): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 5. In the special winning opening opening pre-processing, control for opening the special winning opening is performed. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the special winning opening) is initialized, and the solenoid 9021 is driven to open the special winning opening. In addition, while controlling to send the special winning opening opening designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90100, the execution time of the special winning opening opening process is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set to step S90306. To a value corresponding to (6 in this example). The special winning opening opening pre-processing is executed for each round, but when the first round is started, the special winning opening opening pre-processing is also processing for starting a big hit game. In addition, the special winning opening opening designation command is transmitted for each round with a value designating that round set in the EXT data, so that a different special winning opening opening designation command is transmitted for each round. For example, when executing the first round during the big hit game, a special winning opening open designation command (A101(H)) designating round 1 is transmitted, and when executing the tenth round during the big hit game. Sends a special winning opening open designation command (A10A(H)) designating round 10.

  Special winning opening opening process (step S90306): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 6. In the process of opening the special winning opening, a process of confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the special winning opening is performed. If the closing condition for the special winning opening is satisfied, and if there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to the value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S90305. In addition, while performing control to send the designation command after opening during the big hit to the production control microcomputer 90100, when all rounds have been completed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set to a value corresponding to step S90307 (this In the example, update to 7).

  Big hit end processing (step S90307): is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 7. The control for causing the effect control microcomputer 90100 to perform display control for notifying the player that the jackpot gaming state has ended. Also, a process of setting a flag indicating the gaming state (for example, a probability variation flag or a time saving flag) is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S90300.

  Small hit opening pre-processing (step S90308): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 8. In the small hit opening pre-processing, control for opening the special winning opening is performed. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the special winning opening) is initialized, and the solenoid 9021 is driven to open the special winning opening. In addition, the execution time of the special winning opening opening process is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to the value (9 in this example) corresponding to step S90309. In addition, the small hit opening pre-processing is executed every time the big winning opening is opened during the small hit game, but when the first opening during the small hit game is started, the small hit opening pre-processing is the small hit game. It is also the process to start.

  Small hitting open process (step S90309): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 9. The process of confirming the establishment of the closing conditions for the special winning opening is performed. If the closing condition of the special winning opening is satisfied, and if the number of times of opening the special winning opening still remains, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set to a value (8 in this example) corresponding to step S90308. Update. In addition, when all opening is completed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (10 in this example) corresponding to step S90310.

  Small hit end processing (step S90310): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 10. The control for causing the effect control microcomputer 90100 to perform the display control for notifying the player that the small hitting game state has ended. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S90300.

  FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the starting port switch passage processing in steps S90312 and S90314. Of these, FIG. 42(A) is a flowchart showing the first starting port switch passage processing in step S90312. Further, FIG. 42B is a flowchart showing the second starting opening switch passage processing of step S90314.

  First, the first starting port switch passage processing will be described with reference to FIG. In the first start opening switch passage process executed when the first start opening switch 9013a is in the ON state, the CPU 9056 first determines whether or not the first reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, It is confirmed whether or not the value of the first reserved storage number counter for counting the number of 1 reserved storage is 4 (step S901121A). If the first number of reserved storages has reached the upper limit value, the processing is ended as it is.

  If the first pending storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 9056 increments the value of the first pending storage number counter by 1 (step S901212A), and at the same time, the value of the total pending storage number counter for counting the total pending storage number. Is incremented by 1 (step S901213A). Next, the CPU 9056 executes a process of extracting values from the random number circuit 9053 and a counter for generating a software random number, and storing them in the storage area of the first pending storage buffer (see FIG. 43(B)) ( Step S901214A). In the process of step S901214A, a random number R'(random number for jackpot determination) that is a hardware random number, a jackpot type determination random number (random 1') that is a software random number, and a variation pattern type determination random number (random 2'). And a random number for random pattern determination (random 3') is extracted and stored in the storage area. Random pattern determination random number (random 3') is not extracted and stored in advance in the first starting opening switch passage process (at the time of winning a prize) and saved in the storage area, but is extracted at the start of the variation of the first special symbol. You may do so. For example, the game control microcomputer 90560 may directly extract a value from a fluctuation pattern determination random number counter for generating a fluctuation pattern determination random number (random 3') in a fluctuation pattern setting process described later. .

  FIG. 43 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of an area (reserved storage buffer) for storing random numbers and the like corresponding to the reserved storage. As shown in FIG. 43, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the first reserved storage number is secured in the first reserved storage buffer. In addition, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the second reserved storage number is secured in the second reserved storage buffer. In this embodiment, in the first pending storage buffer and the second pending storage buffer, a random number R'(big hit determination random number) that is a hardware random number and a big hit type determination random number (random 1') that is a software random number. The random number for determining the variation pattern type (random 2′) and the random number for determining the variation pattern (random 3′) are stored. The first pending storage buffer and the second pending storage buffer are formed in the RAM 9055.

  In this embodiment, a random number value such as a big hit determination random number is stored in the first pending storage buffer and the second pending storage buffer as pending storage, but the predetermined information stored as pending storage is Not limited to random numbers. For example, whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit may be determined in advance based on a big hit determination random number and the determination result may be stored as a hold storage in the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer. .

  Next, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the time saving flag indicating that the gaming state is the time saving state (high base state) is set (step S901215A). If it is set, the process directly proceeds to step S901220A. If the time saving flag is not set, the CPU 9056 confirms whether the value of the special symbol process flag is 5 or more (step S901216A). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 5 or more (that is, in the big hit game state or the small hit game state), the CPU 9056 proceeds to step S901220A as it is.

  If the value of the special symbol process flag is less than 5, the winning display effect process for determining the variation display result and the variation pattern type when the variation based on the detected starting winning is subsequently executed is executed (step) S901217A). Then, the CPU 9056 performs control of transmitting a symbol designating command to the effect control microcomputer 90100 based on the determination result of the winning effect process (step S901218A), and also transmits a variation category command to the effect control microcomputer 90100. Control is performed (step S901219A). Further, the CPU 9056 performs control to transmit the first reserved storage number addition designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90100 (step S901220A).

  In addition, by executing the processing of steps S901218A and S901219A, in this embodiment, the CPU 9056 always designates the symbol every time the start winning prize is given to the first starting winning opening 9013 and the winning effect processing of step S901217A is executed. Both the command and the variation category command are transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 90100.

  In addition, in this embodiment, when the process of steps S901218A to S901202A is executed, a start winning is generated in the first starting winning opening 9013, and when the winning effect process of step S901217A is executed, a symbol is designated. A set of three commands, that is, a command, a variable category command, and a first reserved storage number addition designation command are collectively transmitted within one timer interrupt.

  However, when the winning effect process of step S901217A is not executed by determining Y in step S901215A or step S901216A, the CPU 9056 controls in step S901220A to transmit only the first reserved storage number addition designation command. The winning determination result designation command (symbol designation command, variation category command) is not controlled. In addition, when the winning effect processing of step S901217A is not executed, a winning determination result specification in which a value (for example, "FF(H)") indicating that the winning determination result cannot be specified is set as the EXT data is designated. You may make it transmit a command (designation command, variation category command).

  In addition, in this embodiment, the process of step S901215A is executed, so that when there is a start winning a prize to the first start winning hole 9013, only when the game state is the low base state, the step S901217A The winning production process is executed. In addition, in this embodiment, the process of step S901216A is executed, so that when there is a start winning a prize in the first start winning hole 9013, only in a case where it is not in the big hit game state or the small hit game state, step S901217A. The winning effect production process is executed. It should be noted that it is possible not to shift to step S901217A only in the big hit game state, and to shift to step S901217A in the small hit game state to execute the winning effect processing.

  Further, in this embodiment, the jackpot gaming state (specific gaming state) is a control in which the jackpot is opened for a predetermined number of rounds (for example, 15 rounds) after being notified that the jackpot is started. It is the state until the end of opening the special winning opening of the final round and the notification of the end of the big hit. Specifically, it is a state in which the processes from the special winning opening opening pre-process (see step S90305) to the big hit ending process (see step S90307) in the special symbol process process are being executed.

  Next, the second starting opening switch passage processing will be described with reference to FIG. In the second starting opening switch passing process executed when the second starting opening switch 9014a is in the ON state, the CPU 9056 determines whether or not the number of second reserved storages reaches the upper limit value (specifically, the second holding). It is confirmed whether or not the value of the second reserved storage number counter for counting the storage number is 4 (step S901121B). If the second number of reserved storages has reached the upper limit value, the processing is ended as it is.

  If the second reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit, the CPU 9056 increments the value of the second reserved storage number counter by 1 (step S901212B), and at the same time, the value of the total reserved storage number counter for counting the total reserved storage number. Is incremented by 1 (step S901213B). Next, the CPU 9056 executes a process of extracting values from the random number circuit 9053 and a counter for generating a software random number, and storing them in the storage area in the second reserved storage buffer (see FIG. 43(B)) ( Step S901214B). In the process of step S901214B, random number R'(random number for jackpot determination) that is a hardware random number, jackpot type determination random number (random 1') that is a software random number, fluctuation pattern type determination random number (random 2'). And a random number for random pattern determination (random 3') is extracted and stored in the storage area. Random pattern determination random number (random 3') is not extracted and stored in the storage area in advance in the second starting opening switch passage process (at the time of starting winning), but is extracted at the start of the variation of the second special symbol. You may do so. For example, the game control microcomputer 90560 may directly extract a value from a fluctuation pattern determination random number counter for generating a fluctuation pattern determination random number (random 3') in a fluctuation pattern setting process described later. ..

  Next, the CPU 9056 executes a winning effect process (step S901217B). Then, the CPU 9056 performs control to send a symbol designating command to the effect control microcomputer 90100 based on the determination result of the winning effect process (step S901218B), and also sends a variation category command to the effect control microcomputer 90100. Control is performed (step S901219B). Further, the CPU 9056 performs control to transmit the second reserved storage number addition designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90100 (step S901220B).

  In addition, by executing the processes of steps S901218B and S901219B, in this embodiment, the CPU 9056 always designates the symbol every time the start winning a prize is given to the second starting winning opening 9014 and the winning effect process of step S901217B is executed. Both the command and the variation category command are transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 90100.

  In addition, in this embodiment, when the process of steps S901218B to S90120B is executed, a start winning is generated in the second starting winning opening 9014, and when the winning effect process of step S901217B is executed, a symbol is designated. A set of three commands, that is, a command, a variation category command, and a second reserved storage number addition designation command are collectively transmitted within one timer interrupt.

  In the second start opening switch passing process, the same process as in step S901215A may be performed, and the winning effect process in step S901217B may not be performed if the time saving state is achieved. That is, the winning effect process of step S901217B may be executed only in the normal state (low base state) to transmit the symbol designating command and the variation category command.

  Further, also in the second starting opening switch passing process, the same process as in step S901216A may be performed, and the winning effect process in step S901217B may not be performed if a big hit game is being performed. Further, in the second starting opening switch passing process, the winning effect effect process of step S901217B may not be executed (that is, the winning judgment process may not be executed for the second special symbol). ..

  FIG. 44 is a flow chart showing the winning effect processing in steps S901217A and S901217B. In the winning effect processing, the CPU 9056 first compares the big hit determination random numbers (random R′) extracted in steps S901214A and S901214B with the normal big hit determination value shown in the left column of FIG. It is confirmed whether or not match (step S90220). In this embodiment, at the timing of starting the fluctuation of the special symbol and the effect symbol, whether or not to be a big hit or a small hit in the special symbol normal process, which will be described later, determines the big hit type, or the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation pattern setting process. However, apart from that, at the timing when the game ball starts winning in the first starting winning opening 9013 or the second starting winning opening 9014, before the variable display based on the starting winning is started, By executing the effect processing at the time of winning, it is confirmed in advance whether or not it is a big hit or a small hit, and which judgment value range the value of the big hit type and the variation pattern type random number is. By doing so, the variable display result and the variation pattern type are predicted in advance before the variable display of the effect symbol is executed, and the look-ahead notice effect is executed based on the determination result at the time of winning as described later. To do.

  If the big hit determination random number (random R') does not match the normal big hit determination value (N in step S90220), the CPU 9056 sets a positive change flag indicating that the game state is the positive change state (high probability state). It is confirmed whether or not it has been done (step S90221). If the probability variation flag is set, the CPU 9056 compares the big hit determination random number (random R′) extracted in steps S901214A and S901214B with the probability variation big hit determination value shown in the right column of FIG. It is confirmed whether or not they match (step S90222). It is to be noted that a plurality of variable displays may be executed during the period from the confirmation of whether or not the probability change state is present in step S90221 at the time of winning the start prize until the actual start of the variable display based on the starting prize. There is. Therefore, the game state is changing during the period from the confirmation of whether the state is the probability variation state in step S90221 at the time of winning the start prize until the time when the variable display based on the starting prize is actually started (for example, the variation start is started. If a sudden big hit or sudden sudden big hit occurs before, it may change from the normal state to the sudden change state.) Therefore, the game state determined in step S90221 at the time of start winning and the game state determined at the start of fluctuation (see step S9061 described later) do not always match. In order to prevent such a discrepancy, the game that is accompanied by a change in the game state in the currently stored pending memory is identified, and the start winning determination is made based on the changed game state. Good.

  If the big hit determination random number (random R′) does not match the big hit determination value at the time of probability variation (N in step S902222), the CPU 9056 compares the big hit determination random number (random R′) extracted in steps S901214A and S901214B with FIG. The small hitting judgment values shown in (B) and (C) are compared to confirm whether or not they match (step S90223). In this case, the CPU 9056, when there is a start winning into the first starting winning opening 9013 (when executing the winning effect processing of step S901217A), the small hit determination table (first It is determined whether or not it matches the small hit determination value set for the special symbol). Further, when there is a start winning a prize to the second starting winning opening 9014 (when executing the winning effect processing of step S901217B), the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. 30C. It is determined whether or not it matches the small hit determination value set in.

  If the big hit determination random number (random R') does not match the small hit determination value (N in step S90223), the CPU 9056 sets the EXT data "00(H)" indicating that the "hit" occurs to the symbol designating command. A setting process is performed (step S90224).

  Next, the CPU 9056 performs a process of determining the current gaming state (step S90225). In this embodiment, the CPU 9056 determines in step S90225 whether the gaming state is the probability variation state and whether it is the time saving state (specifically, whether the probability variation flag or the time saving flag is set). To judge. It is to be noted that, after confirming whether or not the state is the probable variation state and the time saving state at the step S90225 at the time of starting winning, until a variation display based on the starting winning is actually started, a plurality of Floating display may be executed. Therefore, the game state changes during the period from the confirmation of whether the state is the probability variation state or the time saving state in step S90225 at the time of starting winning, until the fluctuation display based on the starting winning actually starts. (For example, when a probability variation big hit or a sudden probability variation big hit occurs before the start of fluctuation, the normal state is changed to the probability variation state.) Therefore, the game state determined in step S90225 at the time of start winning and the game state determined at the start of fluctuation (see step S9061 described later) do not always match. In order to prevent such a discrepancy, the game that is accompanied by a change in the game state in the currently stored pending memory is identified, and the start winning determination is made based on the changed game state. Good.

  Then, the CPU 9056 sets each threshold value for the deviation according to the determination result of step S90225 (step S90226). In this embodiment, a threshold value determination program for performing threshold value determination is incorporated in advance, and by determining whether or not it is greater than the threshold value, the value of the variation pattern type determination random number falls within any of the determination value ranges. Whether or not is determined, and the value of the EXT data set in the variation category command shown in FIGS. 38 and 39 is determined.

  For example, the CPU 9056 sets the threshold value 219 when it is determined that the gaming state is the probability change state or the time saving state. In this case, the CPU 9056 determines in step S90232 described later whether or not the value of the random number for fluctuation pattern type determination is equal to or less than the threshold value 219, and when the value is equal to or less than the threshold value 219 (that is, 1 to 219). Determines to set "08 (H)" as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 38). If it is not equal to or less than the threshold 219 (that is, 220 to 251), it is determined to set “09 (H)” as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 38).

  Further, for example, when the CPU 9056 determines that the gaming state is the normal state, it sets the threshold values 79, 89, 99, 169, 169, 199, 214 and 229 regardless of the total number of pending storages. In this case, the CPU 9056 determines in step S90232 described later whether or not the value of the fluctuation pattern type determination random number is equal to or less than the threshold value 79, and when the value is equal to or less than the threshold value 79 (that is, 1 to 79). Determines to set "00(H)" as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 38). If the threshold is 89 or less (that is, 80 to 89), it is determined that "01(H)" is set as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 38). If the threshold value is less than or equal to 99 (that is, 90 to 99), it is determined to set “02(H)” as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 38). If the threshold is 169 or less (that is, 100 to 169), it is determined to set “03(H)” as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 38). When the threshold value is 199 or less (that is, 170 to 199), it is determined that “04 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 38). If the threshold value is 214 or less (that is, 200 to 214), it is determined that "05 (H)" is set as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 38). If the threshold value is 229 or less (that is, 215 to 229), it is determined to set “06 (H)” as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 38). If it is not equal to or less than the threshold value 229 (that is, if it is 230 to 251), it is determined that "07 (H)" is set as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 38).

  In the example of the threshold value determination shown above, since the threshold values are determined to be 79, 89, 99, 169, 199, 214, and 229 in the ascending order, the threshold values determined later are It will never fall below the threshold of the previous order. That is, when it is determined whether or not the threshold value is 89 or less after determining whether or not the threshold value is 79 or less, the value does not fall within the range of 1 to 79 that is less than or equal to the threshold value in the previous order, and 80 to 89. Will be determined. Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the threshold values are determined to be 79, 89, 99, 169, 199, 214 and 229 in order from the smallest value is shown. It may be determined as 199, 169, 99, 89 and 79. This also applies to the case of making a determination using another threshold value described below.

  Note that the threshold value in the normal state (low probability/low base state) may be always set without performing the game state determination in step S90225. Even with such a configuration, since the range of the judgment value is made common to at least the fluctuation pattern type that is "out of super reach", it is determined whether or not "out of super reach". be able to.

  When the big hit determination random number (random R′) matches the small hit determination value (Y in step S90223), the CPU 9056 designates the EXT data “04 (H)” indicating that the small hit is a symbol. Processing for setting the command is performed (step S90227).

  Next, the CPU 9056 sets a threshold for small hits (step S90228). In addition, in this embodiment, the CPU 9056 sets the threshold 251 and determines that the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or less than the threshold 251 (1 to 251) in step S90232 described later. , It is determined to set “18 (H)” as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 39). In the case of a small hit, it may be determined that the EXT data “18(H)” is set as it is without performing the threshold determination.

  When the big hit determination random number (random R′) matches with the big hit determination value in step S90220 or step S90222, the CPU 9056 determines the big hit based on the big hit type determination random number (random 1′) extracted in steps S901214A and S901214B. The type is determined (step S90229). In this case, the CPU 9056, when there is a start winning into the first starting winning opening 9013 (when executing the winning effect processing of step S901217A), the jackpot type determination table (first winning combination shown in FIG. 30D). (For special symbols) 90131a is used to determine whether the big hit type is "normal big hit", "probability variation big hit", or "sudden probability variation big hit". Further, when there is a start winning to the second starting winning opening 9014 (when executing the winning effect effect processing of step S901217B), the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. 30(E) Using 90131b, it is determined whether the type of big hit is "normal big hit", "probabilistic big hit" or "sudden positive big hit".

  Next, the CPU 9056 performs a process of setting the EXT data corresponding to the jackpot type determination result in the symbol designating command (step S90230). In this case, when it is determined that the "normal big hit" is reached, the CPU 9056 performs a process of setting EXT data "01(H)" indicating that the "normal big hit" is set in the symbol designating command. Further, when it is determined that the "probable variation big hit" is determined, the CPU 9056 performs a process of setting the EXT data "02(H)" indicating that the "probability variation big hit" is the symbol designating command. Further, when it is determined that the "sudden probability big hit", the CPU 9056 performs a process of setting the EXT data "03(H)" indicating that the "sudden probability big hit" is the symbol designating command.

  Then, the CPU 9056 sets each threshold for the big hit in accordance with the big hit type determined in step S90229 (step S90231).

  For example, the CPU 9056 sets the thresholds 74 and 149 when it is determined that the "normal big hit" is made. In this case, the CPU 9056 determines in step S90232 described later whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or less than the threshold value 74, and when it is equal to or less than the threshold value 74 (that is, 1 to 74). Determines to set "10 (H)" as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 39). If the threshold is 149 or less (that is, 75 to 149), it is determined to set “11 (H)” as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 39). If it is not equal to or less than the threshold value 149 (that is, if it is 150 to 251,) it is determined to set “12 (H)” as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 39).

  In addition, for example, the CPU 9056 sets the threshold values 38 and 79 when it is determined that the “probable variation big hit” has occurred. In this case, the CPU 9056 determines in step S90232 described later whether or not the value of the random number for fluctuation pattern type determination is equal to or less than the threshold value 38, and when the value is equal to or less than the threshold value 38 (that is, 1 to 38). Determines to set "13 (H)" as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 39). If the threshold is 79 or less (that is, 39 to 79), it is determined that "14 (H)" is set as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 39). If it is not equal to or less than the threshold value 79 (that is, 80 to 251), it is determined to set “15 (H)” as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 39).

  In addition, for example, the CPU 9056 sets the threshold value 100 when it is determined that the “sudden probability big hit”. In this case, the CPU 9056 determines in step S90232 described later whether or not the value of the random number for fluctuation pattern type determination is 100 or less, and if it is 100 or less (that is, 1 to 100). Determines to set "16 (H)" as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 39). If the threshold is not 100 or less (that is, 101 to 251), it is determined to set “17 (H)” as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 39).

  Next, the CPU 9056 uses the threshold value set in steps S90226, S90228, and S90231 and the fluctuation pattern type determination random number (random 2') extracted in steps S901214A and S901214B to determine which value of the fluctuation pattern type determination random number. It is determined whether or not it falls within the range of the determination value of (step S90232).

  Note that in steps S90226, S90228, and S90231, instead of setting a predetermined threshold value, a fluctuation pattern type determination table (see FIGS. 31 and 32) is set, and in step S90232, the fluctuation pattern type set in step S90232. The determination table may be used to determine the range of the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type and which variation pattern type.

  Then, the CPU 9056 performs a process of setting the EXT data according to the determination result in the variation category command (step S90233). Specifically, the CPU 9056 determines whether the variation pattern type is determined in step S90232, and thus “00(H)” to “0B(H)” and “10” as shown in FIGS. 38 and 39. (H)" to "18(H)" is set in the EXT data of the variable category command.

  In addition, in this embodiment, even when it is determined that a big hit or a small hit in the winning determination, it is uniformly determined which range the value of the variation pattern type determination random number falls within. When it is determined that a big hit or a small hit is reached, the range of the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type may not be determined. Then, a symbol designating command indicating that the winning determination has been made when it becomes a big hit or a small hit may be transmitted, and a variation category command that comprehensively indicates that it is a variation pattern type of a big hit or a small hit may be transmitted. .. Then, for example, although the effect control microcomputer 90100 does not specifically indicate which variation pattern type, the variation that is comprehensively represented as one of the jackpot variation pattern types Based on the reception of the category command, a look-ahead notice effect described later may be executed.

  45 and 46 are flowcharts showing the special symbol normal process (step S90300) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol normal processing, the CPU 9056 confirms the value of the total number of pending storages (step S9051). Specifically, the count value of the total pending storage number counter is confirmed. If the total pending storage number is 0 and the customer waiting demo designation command has not been transmitted yet, the CPU 9056 confirms whether 30 seconds have passed since the last executed variable display was terminated (step S9051A). It should be noted that whether 30 seconds have elapsed since the last executed variable display was ended, for example, when a value of Y is first determined in step S9051, a value corresponding to 30 seconds is set in a predetermined timer, It can be determined by checking whether the timer has timed out. If 30 seconds have elapsed, the CPU 9056 performs control for transmitting a customer waiting demonstration designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90100 (step S9051B), and ends the processing. Note that, for example, when the CPU 9056 transmits the customer waiting demo designation command in step S9051B, the CPU 9056 sets the customer waiting demo designation command transmitted flag indicating that the customer waiting demo designation command has been transmitted. Then, when the special symbol normal processing after the next timer interruption is executed after transmitting the customer waiting demo designation command, the customer waiting is repeated based on that the customer waiting demo designation command transmitted flag is set. It may be controlled not to send the demo designation command. Further, in this case, the customer waiting demonstration designation command transmitted flag may be reset when the next variable display of special symbols is started. Further, in this embodiment, a case where the customer waiting demonstration designation command is transmitted and the customer waiting demonstration display is started 30 seconds after the last executed variable display is finished is shown. Not limited to this, for example, the customer waiting demonstration display may be started after one minute has elapsed.

  If the total pending storage number is not 0, the CPU 9056 confirms whether the second pending storage number is 0 (step S9052). Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the second reserved storage number counter is 0. If the second reserved storage number is not 0, the CPU 9056 is a special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether the special symbol process processing is performed for the first special symbol or the special symbol process processing is performed for the second special symbol). Is set to data indicating "second" (step S9053). If the second reserved memory number is 0 (that is, only the first reserved memory number is accumulated), the CPU 9066 sets data indicating "first" to the special symbol pointer (step S9054).

  In this embodiment, by performing the processes of steps S9052 to S9054, the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed with respect to the variable display of the first special symbol. In other words, the second start condition for starting the variable display of the second special symbol is controlled so as to take precedence over the first start condition for starting the variable display of the first special symbol.

  In the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is configured to be preferentially executed as shown in this embodiment, a big hit determination random number (random R′) in the winning effect production process shown in FIG. 44. It is possible to execute only the process of comparing the value of R with the big hit determination value in the low probability state and not to compare it with the big hit determination value in the probability variation state (high probability state) (specifically, step S90220). Only the processing of step S90221 and step S90222 may be omitted). With such a configuration, when the variation display of the second special symbol is configured to be executed with priority, between the determination result of the big hit in the determination at the time of winning and the determination result of the big hit at the time of the actual variation start. It is possible to prevent the deviation.

  Next, in the RAM 9055, the CPU 9056 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number of one indicated by the special symbol pointer and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 9055 (step S9055). Specifically, the CPU 9056, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number=1 in the first reserved storage buffer. Is read and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 9055. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 9056 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number=1 in the second reserved storage buffer. It is stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 9055.

  Then, the CPU 9056 subtracts 1 from the count value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the content of each storage area (step S9056). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 9056 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first reserved storage number counter, and in the reserved specific area and the first reserved storage buffer. Shift the contents of each storage area. Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the count value of the second reserved storage number counter is decremented by 1, and the contents of each reserved area in the reserved specific area and the second reserved storage buffer are shifted. To do.

  That is, in the case where the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 9056 displays the first reserved storage buffer of the RAM 9055 in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number=n (n=2, 3, 4). Each stored random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first number of pending storages=n-1. When the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, each is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second number of reserved memories=n (n=2, 3, 4) in the second reserved memory buffer of the RAM 9055. The random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number=n-1. Further, the CPU 9056 adds the values (the values indicating “first” or “second”) stored in the storage areas corresponding to the total number of pending storages=m (m=2 to 8) in the pending specific area. Store in the storage area corresponding to the number of reserved storages=m-1.

  Therefore, the order in which the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective first reserved memory numbers (or the respective second reserved memory numbers) are always extracted is always the first reserved memory number (or, The second reserved memory number)=1, 2, 3, 4 and the order. Further, the order in which the respective values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective total reserved storage numbers are extracted is always the same as the order of the total reserved storage numbers=1-8.

  Then, the CPU 9056 decrements the value of the total pending storage number by 1. That is, the count value of the total pending storage number counter is decremented by 1 (step S9058). The CPU 9056 saves the value of the total pending storage number counter before the count value is subtracted by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 9055.

  In addition, the CPU 9056 controls to transmit a background designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90100 according to the current game state (step S9060). In this case, the CPU 9056 controls to transmit the probability variation state background designation command when the probability variation flag indicating the probability variation state is set. Further, the CPU 9056 performs control to transmit the time saving state background designation command when only the time saving flag indicating the time saving state is set and the probability variation flag is not set. If neither the probability variation flag nor the time saving flag is set, the CPU 9056 controls to transmit the normal state background designating command.

  In addition, specifically, when the effect control command is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 90100, the CPU 9056 sets the address of the command transmission table (preliminarily set for each command in the ROM) according to the effect control command. Set it to a pointer. Then, the address of the command transmission table corresponding to the effect control command is set in the pointer, and the effect control command is transmitted in the effect control command control process (step S9028). In this embodiment, when the variation of the special symbol is started, the background designation command, the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, the reserved storage number subtraction designation command (the first reserved storage number subtraction) for each timer interrupt. The designated command or the second reserved storage number subtraction designated command) is transmitted in order to the effect control microcomputer 90100. Specifically, when the fluctuation of the special symbol is started, first, a background designation command is transmitted, a variation pattern command is transmitted after 4 ms has elapsed, a display result designation command has been transmitted after 4 ms has elapsed, and further 4 ms has elapsed. The reserved storage count subtraction designation command (the first reserved storage count subtraction designation command or the second reserved storage count subtraction designation command) is transmitted. In addition, when the variation of the special symbol is started, the symbol variation designation command (first symbol variation designation command, second symbol variation designation command) is also transmitted, but the symbol variation designation command is the same timer interrupt as the variation pattern command. Is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 90100.

  In the special symbol normal process, first, the data indicating "first" indicating that the process is executed targeting the first starting winning opening 9013, that is, indicating that the process is performed targeting the first special symbol "first" Or data indicating "second" indicating that the process is executed for the second start winning opening 9014, that is, indicating "second" indicating that the process is executed for the second special symbol. The data is set in the special symbol pointer. Then, in the subsequent processing in the special symbol process processing, processing according to the data set in the special symbol pointer is executed. Therefore, the processes of steps S90300 to S90310 can be shared between the case of targeting the first special symbol and the case of targeting the second special symbol.

  Next, the CPU 9056 reads a random R′ (random number for jackpot determination) from the random number buffer area and executes the jackpot determination module. In this case, the CPU 9056 is for the jackpot determination which is extracted in step S901214A of the first starting opening switch passage processing or step S901214B of the second starting opening switch passage processing and stored in advance in the first pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer. Read the random number and judge the big hit. The jackpot determination module compares a predetermined jackpot determination value or a jackpot determination value (see FIG. 30) with a jackpot determination random number, and if they match, executes a process of determining a jackpot or a jackpot. It is a program to do. That is, it is a program that executes the processing of the big hit judgment and the small hit judgment.

  In the jackpot determination process, the probability of a jackpot is higher when the gaming state is the probable variation state than when the gaming state is the non-probability variation state (normal state). More specifically, the probability variation big hit determination table in which a large number of jackpot determination values are set in advance (a table in which the numerical values on the right side of FIG. 30A in ROM 9054 are set) and the number of jackpot determination values A normal big hit judgment table (a table in which the numerical values on the left side of FIG. 30A in ROM 9054 are set) which is set to be smaller than the big hit judgment table is provided. Then, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the gaming state is the probability variation state, and when the gaming state is the probability variation state, performs the jackpot determination process using the probability variation big jackpot determination table, and the gaming state is normal. When it is in the state, the jackpot determination table for normal time is used to perform the jackpot determination process. That is, the CPU 9056 determines that the special symbol is a big hit when the value of the random number for random determination (random R′) matches any of the big hit determination values shown in FIG. 30(A). When it is determined to be a big hit (step S9061), the process proceeds to step S9071. In addition, to decide whether or not to be a big hit, it is to decide whether or not to shift to the big hit gaming state, but to decide whether or not to make a stop symbol in the special symbol display device a big hit symbol But also.

  It should be noted that whether or not the current gaming state is the probability variation state is confirmed by whether or not the probability variation flag is set. The probability variation flag is set when shifting the game state to the probability variation state, and reset when ending the probability variation state. Specifically, it is determined to be a "probability variation jackpot" or "a sudden variation jackpot", and is set in the process of ending the jackpot game. After the jackpot game is over, it is reset when the next jackpot occurs.

  If the value of the big hit determination random number (random R′) does not match any of the big hit determination values (N in step S9061), the CPU 9056 uses the small hit determination table (see FIGS. 30B and 30C). Use to perform a small hit determination process. That is, when the value of the random number for random determination (random R') matches the small hit determination value shown in FIGS. 30B and 30C, the CPU 9056 determines to make a small hit for the special symbol. . In this case, the CPU 9056 confirms the data indicated by the special symbol pointer, and when the data indicated by the special symbol pointer is “first”, the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) shown in FIG. 30(B) ) Is used to decide whether to make a small hit. Further, when the data indicated by the special symbol pointer is "second", it is determined whether or not to make a small hit using the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. 30(C). . When it is determined to be a small hit (step S9062), the CPU 9056 sets a small hit flag indicating that it is a small hit (step S9063), and proceeds to step S9075.

  If the value of the random R′ does not match either the big hit determination value or the small hit determination value (N in step S9062), that is, if the value is out of alignment, the process directly proceeds to step S9075.

  In step S9071, the CPU 9056 sets a big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit. Then, as a table used for determining the jackpot type to any of a plurality of types, the jackpot type determination table indicated by the special symbol pointer is selected (step S9072). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 9056 selects the jackpot type determination table 90131a for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 30(D). Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 9056 selects the big hit type determination table 90131b for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 30(E).

  Next, the CPU 9056 uses the selected jackpot type determination table to determine the type (“normal jackpot”, “normal jackpot”, or “type” corresponding to the value of the random number (random 1′) for jackpot type determination stored in the random number buffer area. "Sudden variation jackpot" or "sudden variation jackpot") is determined as the type of jackpot (step S9073). In this case, the CPU 9056 determines the jackpot type which is extracted in step S901214A of the first starting opening switch passage processing or step S901214B of the second starting opening switch passage processing and stored in advance in the first pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer. Read the random number for use and determine the type of jackpot. Further, in this case, as shown in FIGS. 30D and 30E, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, it is compared with the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. Therefore, the probability of sudden probability jackpot being selected is high.

  Further, the CPU 9056 sets the data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 9055 (step S9074). For example, when the big hit type is "normal big hit", "01" is set as the data indicating the big hit type, and when the big hit type is "probable variation big hit", "02" is set as the data indicating the big hit type, When the big hit type is "sudden change big hit", "03" is set as data showing the big hit type.

  Next, the CPU 9056 determines a stop symbol of the special symbol (step S9075). Specifically, when neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, "-" which is the deviating symbol is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol. When the big hit flag is set, depending on the big hit type decision result, one of the big hit symbols "1", "3", "7", "9" is decided as a stop symbol of the special symbol. To do. That is, when the jackpot type is determined to be "a sudden sudden change jackpot", "1" is determined as a stop symbol of the special symbol, and when "normal jackpot" is determined, "3" is determined as a stop symbol of the special symbol. However, when the "probability variation big hit" is determined, "7" is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol. Further, when the small hit flag is set, "5" which is a small hit symbol is determined as a stop symbol of the special symbol.

  In this embodiment, the big hit type is first determined, and the stop symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the determined big hit type is shown. However, the method of determining the big symbol type and the stop symbol of the special symbol is The invention is not limited to the one shown in the embodiment. For example, a table in which the stop symbols of the special symbols are associated with the jackpot types is prepared in advance, and the stop symbols of the special symbols are first determined based on the random number for determining the jackpot type, and the corresponding jackpots are determined based on the determination result. The type may be determined.

  Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S90301) (step S9076).

  FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing a variation pattern setting process (step S90301) in the special symbol process process. In the fluctuation pattern setting process, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S9091). When the big hit flag is set, the CPU 9056 uses the big hit fluctuation pattern type determination tables 90132A to 90132C (FIG. 31(A )-(C)) (step S9092). Then, the process proceeds to step S90100.

  When the big hit flag is not set, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S9093). When the small hit flag is set, the CPU 9056 uses the small hit variation pattern type determination table 90132D (FIG. 31(D) as a table to be used for determining the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types. ) Reference) is selected (step S9094). Then, the process proceeds to step S90100.

  If the small hit flag is also not set, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the time saving flag indicating the time saving state is set (step S9095). In this embodiment, the time saving flag is set when the jackpot game based on the normal jackpot is completed, and the hour saving flag is set, and the jackpot game based on the probability variation jackpot is also entered into the probability changing state and the hour saving state. The time saving flag is set because it is also transferred to. Therefore, if it is determined to be Y in step S9095, in addition to when the normal short-hit game based on the big jackpot is only controlled to the short-time state, after the big-hit game based on the probable variation big hit, it is controlled to the time-shortened state with the positive variation state. Sometimes it is done.

  If the time saving flag is not set (N in step S9095), that is, if the game state is the normal state, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the total pending storage number is 3 or more (step S9096). If the total number of pending storages is less than 3 (N in step S9096), the CPU 9056 determines that the variation pattern type determination table 90135A for discontinuity is used as a table used to determine one of the plurality of variation pattern types. (See FIG. 32A) is selected (step S9097). Then, the process proceeds to step S90100.

  When the total number of pending storages is 3 or more (Y in step S9096), the CPU 9056 determines that the variation pattern type for a deviation is a variation pattern type determination table. 90135B (see FIG. 32B) is selected (step S9098). Then, the process proceeds to step S90100.

  If the time saving flag is set (Y in step S9095), that is, if the gaming state is the probability changing state or the time saving state, the CPU 9056 determines the variation pattern type to be one of a plurality of types. As the table to be used, the variation pattern type determination table 90135C for deviation (see FIG. 32C) is selected (step S9099). Then, the process proceeds to step S90100.

  In this embodiment, by performing the processing of steps S9095-S9099, when the gaming state is the normal state and the total number of pending storages is 3 or more, the deviation variation shown in FIG. 32(B). The pattern type determination table 90135B is selected. If the gaming state is the probability variation state or the time saving state, the out-of-shift variation pattern type determination table 90135C shown in FIG. 32(C) is selected. In this case, the non-reach CA2′-3 may be determined as the variation pattern type in the process of step S90100 described below, and when the variation pattern type of the non-reach CA2′-3 is determined, the process of step S90102 is performed. Then, the non-reach PA1′-2 of the shortened fluctuation is determined as the fluctuation pattern (see FIG. 34). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is the probability variation state or the time saving state, or when the total number of pending storages is 3 or more, the variation display of the shortening variation may be displayed. In this embodiment, the variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation used in the probability variation state and the time saving state (see FIG. 32C) and the variation pattern type determination table for shortened variation based on the number of pending storages (see FIG. 32 (see FIG. 32B) is a different table, but a common table may be used as the variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation.

  In this embodiment, even when the game state is the probability change state or the time saving state, when the total pending storage number is almost 0 (for example, 0, 0 or 1) The variable display of the shortened variation may not be displayed. In this case, for example, when the CPU 9056 determines Y in step S9095, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the total number of pending storages is substantially 0, and if the total number of pending storages is approximately 0, the variation pattern type for deviation. The determination table 90135A (see FIG. 32A) may be selected.

  Next, the CPU 9056 reads a random 2′ (random number for fluctuation pattern type determination) from the random number buffer area (first pending storage buffer or second pending storage buffer) and selects it in the processing of step S9092, S9094, S9097, S9098, or S9099. The fluctuation pattern type is determined to be one of a plurality of types by referring to the table (step S90100).

  Next, the CPU 9056 uses the hit variation pattern determination tables 90137A and 90137B (see FIG. 33) as tables to be used for determining one of the plurality of variation patterns based on the variation pattern type determination result of step S90100. ), any one of the deviation variation pattern determination tables 90138A (see FIG. 34) is selected (step S90101). In addition, the random number 3′ (random number for fluctuation pattern determination) is read from the random number buffer area (first reserved memory buffer or second reserved memory buffer), and the fluctuation pattern determination table selected in the process of step S90101 is referred to The pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of types (step S90102). When the random number 3'(fluctuation pattern determination random number) is not extracted at the timing of the start winning, the CPU 9056 uses the variation pattern determination random number for generating the variation pattern determination random number 3'. The value may be directly extracted from the random number counter, and the variation pattern may be determined based on the extracted random number value.

  Next, the CPU 9056 performs control for transmitting the symbol variation designation command indicated by the special symbol pointer to the effect control microcomputer 90100 (step S90103). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 9056 controls to transmit the first symbol variation designation command. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 9056 controls to transmit the second symbol variation designation command. Further, the CPU 9056 performs control for transmitting the effect control command (fluctuation pattern command) corresponding to the determined fluctuation pattern to the effect control microcomputer 90100 (step S90104).

  Next, the CPU 9056 sets, in the fluctuation time timer formed in the RAM 9055, a value according to the fluctuation time corresponding to the selected fluctuation pattern (step S90105). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the display result designation command transmission process (step S90302) (step S90106).

  In addition, when it is determined that it is out of alignment, instead of suddenly determining the variation pattern type, first, it may be determined whether or not to reach by a lottery process using a random number for reach determination. Then, the variation pattern type may be determined by executing the processing of steps S9095 to S90100 based on the determination result of whether or not to reach. In this case, the variation pattern type determination table for non-reach (including the variation pattern types of non-reach CA2′-1 to non-reach CA2′-3 shown in FIG. 32) and the variation pattern type determination table for reach ( 32) including normal CA2′-4 to normal CA2′-6 and super CA2′-7 variation pattern types shown in FIG. 32, and any variation pattern type determination based on the reach determination result. The table may be selected to determine the variation pattern type.

  Also, when determining whether or not to reach by the lottery process using the random number for reach determination, the reach of the reach is determined according to the total number of pending storage (may be the first pending storage number or the second pending storage number). The reach determination tables having different selection ratios may be selected to determine whether or not the reach should be performed so that the reach probability becomes lower as the number of pending storages increases. In this case, the CPU 9056, for example, in the determination as to whether or not "super reach out" or "non-reach out" in the winning effect process, matches the determination value assigned to the common range in the reach determination table. By determining whether or not to reach, it may be determined in advance whether or not the reach is reached. In addition, considering that the execution ratio of the notice production is reduced, as shown in this embodiment, “super reach is lost” depending on the variation pattern type without performing the lottery process using the random number for reach determination. It is preferable to perform a pre-reading notice effect by making a pre-determination as to whether or not "out of reach" occurs.

  FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the display result designation command transmission process (step S90302). In the display result designation command transmission process, the CPU 9056 transmits any one of the display result 1 designation to the display result 5 designation effect control command (see FIG. 35) in accordance with the determined type of big hit, small hit, or loss. Control. Specifically, the CPU 9056 first confirms whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S90110). If not set, the process moves to step S90116. When the jackpot flag is set and the jackpot type is "normal jackpot", control is performed to transmit the display result 2 designation command (steps S90111, S90112). Whether or not the "normal big hit" can be specifically determined by checking whether or not the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S9074 of the special symbol normal processing is "01". . Further, when the type of the big hit is “probable variation big hit”, the CPU 9056 controls to transmit the display result 3 designation command (steps S90113, S90114). Whether or not the "probable variation big hit" can be specifically determined by checking whether or not the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S9074 of the special symbol normal processing is "02". . Then, when it is neither "normal big hit" nor "probability variation big hit" (that is, when it is "sudden probability variation big hit"), the CPU 9056 controls to transmit the display result 4 designation command (step S90115).

  On the other hand, when the big hit flag is not set (N in step S90110), the CPU 9056 confirms whether the small hit flag is set (step S90116). If the small hit flag is set, the CPU 9056 controls to transmit the display result 5 designation command (step S90117). When the small hit flag is also not set (N in step S90116), that is, when the flag is out of alignment, the CPU 9056 controls to transmit the display result 1 designation command (step S90118).

  Then, the CPU 9056 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol changing process (step S90303) (step S90119).

  FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing a special symbol changing process (step S90303) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol changing process, the CPU 9056 first confirms whether the reserved storage number subtraction designation command (the first reserved storage number subtraction designation command or the second reserved storage number subtraction designation command) has already been transmitted ( Step S901121). Whether or not the pending storage number subtraction designation command has already been transmitted indicates, for example, that the pending storage number subtraction designation command has been transmitted when the pending storage number subtraction designation command is transmitted in step S901122 described later. The storage number subtraction designation command transmitted flag may be set, and in step S901121, it may be confirmed whether or not the reserved storage number subtraction designation command transmitted flag is set. Also, in this case, the set storage number subtraction designation command transmitted flag is set to be reset by the special symbol stop process or the jackpot end process, which will be described later, when terminating variable display of the special symbol or terminating the jackpot. Good.

  Next, if the reservation storage number subtraction designation command has not been transmitted, the CPU 9056 performs control to transmit the reservation storage number subtraction designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90100 (step S901112). In this case, when the value indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 9056 performs control to transmit the first reserved storage number subtraction designation command. Further, when the value indicating “second” is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 9056 controls to transmit the second reserved storage number subtraction designation command.

  Next, the CPU 9056 subtracts 1 from the variable time timer (step S901125), and when the variable time timer times out (step S901126), performs control to send a symbol finalization designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90100 (step S901127). Then, the CPU 9056 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol stop process (step S90304) (step S901128). If the variable time timer has not timed out, the process is terminated as it is.

  50 is a flowchart showing a special symbol stop process (step S90304) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S90131). If the big hit flag is set, the CPU 9056, if set, the probability variation flag indicating the probability variation state, the time saving flag indicating the time saving state, the number of times the special symbol can change in the time saving state Is reset (step S90132), and control for transmitting a big hit start designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90100 is performed (step S90133). Specifically, when the type of big hit is "normal big hit", a big hit start 1 designation command (command A001 (H)) is transmitted. If the type of the big hit is "probable variation big hit", the big hit start 2 designation command (command A002(H)) is transmitted. If the type of the big hit is the sudden probability big hit, the small hit/sudden sudden big hit start designation command (command A003(H)) is transmitted. Whether the type of jackpot is "normal jackpot", "probability variation jackpot", or "sudden variation jackpot" is data indicating the jackpot type stored in the RAM 9055 (data stored in the jackpot type buffer). It is judged based on.

  Further, a value corresponding to the big hit display time (a time at which, for example, the effect display device 909 is notified that the big hit has occurred) is set in the big hit display time timer (step S90134). In addition, the number of times of opening (for example, 15 times in the case of "normal big hit" or "probability variation big hit", 2 times in the case of "a sudden probability variation big hit") is set in the special winning opening release counter (step S90135). .. Also, the round time per round in the big hit game is set. Specifically, in the case of sudden probability big hit, 0.1 second is set as the round time, and in the case of normal big hit or probability big hit, the round time is set to 29 seconds. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the special winning opening opening preprocessing (step S90305) (step S90136).

  If the big hit flag is not set in step S90131, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the value of the hour/hour counter that indicates the number of times the special symbol can fluctuate in the hour/short state is 0 (step S90137). If the value of the hour/hour counter is not 0, the CPU 9056 decrements the value of the hour/hour counter by -1 (step S90138). Then, when the value of the time saving counter after subtraction becomes 0 (step S90139), the CPU 9056 resets the time saving flag (step S90140).

  Next, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S90141). If the small hit flag is set, the CPU 9056 sends a small hit/suddenly probable variation big hit start designation command (command A003(H)) to the effect control microcomputer 90100 (step S90142). Further, a value corresponding to the small hit display time (a time at which the effect display device 909 notifies that the small hit has occurred) is set in the small hit display time timer (step S90143). In addition, the number of times of opening (for example, twice) is set in the special winning opening opening number counter (step S90144). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the small hit start preprocessing (step S90308) (step S90145).

  If the small hit flag is not set (N in step S90141), the CPU 9056 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S90300) (step S90146).

  FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing a big hit ending process (step S90307) in the special symbol process process. In the big hit ending process, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the big hit end display timer is set (step S90160), and if the big hit end display timer is set, moves to step S90164. When the big hit end display timer is not set, the big hit flag is reset (step S90161), and control for transmitting the big hit end designation command is performed (step S90162). Here, in the case of "normal big hit", the big hit end 1 designation command (command A301(H)) is transmitted, and in the case of "probability variation big hit" big hit end 2 designation command (command A302(H)) ) Is transmitted, and if it is "a sudden probability big hit", a small hit/a sudden probability big hit end designation command (command A303(H)) is transmitted. Then, the jackpot end display timer is set to a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the jackpot end display is being performed on the image display device 909 (big hit end display time) (step S90163), and the process ends.

  In step S90164, 1 is subtracted from the value of the jackpot end display timer. Then, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the value of the big hit end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the big hit end display time has elapsed (step S90165). If not, the process ends.

  If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (Y in step S90165), the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the jackpot game to be finished this time is based on the normal jackpot (step S90166). Whether or not to end the big hit game based on the normal big hit, specifically, whether or not the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S9074 of the special symbol normal process is "01". It can be determined by checking. When the big hit game based on the normal big hit is finished (Y in step S90166), the CPU 9056 sets the time saving flag and shifts the game state to the time saving state (step S90167). Further, the CPU 9056 sets a predetermined number of times (100 times in this example) in the time saving number counter (step S90168).

  Unless the big hit game based on the normal big hit is finished (that is, when the big hit game based on the probability variation big hit or sudden probability big hit is terminated), the CPU 9056 sets the probability variation flag to the probability state. Along with the shift (step S90169), the time saving flag is set to shift the game state to the time saving state (step S90170).

  Then, the CPU 9056 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S90300) (step S90171).

  In addition, in this embodiment, when the probability variation state is controlled by executing the above processing, the time saving state is also controlled. Therefore, as the gaming state, the normal state (low probability/low base state) ), a short-time state (low probability/high base state), and a stochastic state (high probability/high base state).

  FIG. 52 is a flow chart showing an example of a program of special symbol display control processing (step S9032) executed by the game control microcomputer 90560 (specifically, CPU 9056) mounted on the main board 9031. In the special symbol display control process, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 3 (step S903201). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 3 (that is, if the special symbol changing process is being executed), the CPU 9056 sets the special symbol display control data for the special symbol variation display for the special symbol display control data setting. A process for setting or updating the output buffer is performed (step S903202). In this case, the CPU 9056 sets or updates the special symbol display control data for performing variable display of the special symbol indicated by the special symbol pointer (first special symbol or second special symbol). For example, if the fluctuating speed is 1 frame/0.2 seconds, the value of the special symbol display control data set in the output buffer is incremented by 1 every 0.2 seconds. Then, after that, the display control process (see step S9022) is executed, and the drive signal is output to the special symbol display devices 908a and 908b according to the contents of the output buffer for the special symbol display control data setting, The variable display of the special symbols on the special symbol display devices 908a and 908b is executed.

  If the value of the special symbol process flag is not 3, the CPU 9056 confirms whether the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 (step S903203). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 (that is, in the case of shifting to the special symbol stop process), the CPU 9056 is a special symbol for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol set in the special symbol normal process. A process of setting the display control data in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data is performed (step S903204). In this case, the CPU 9056 sets the special symbol display control data for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) indicated by the special symbol pointer. Then, after that, the display control process (see step S9022) is executed, and the drive signal is output to the special symbol display devices 908a and 908b according to the contents of the output buffer for the special symbol display control data setting, The stop symbols of the special symbols are stopped and displayed on the special symbol display devices 908a and 908b. After the process of step S903204 is executed and the special symbol display control data for stop symbol display is set, the setting data is not changed, so the latest special symbol display control data is displayed in the display control process of step S9022. Based on this, the latest stop symbol will be stopped and displayed until the next variable display is started. If the value of the special symbol process flag is either 2 or 3 in step S903201 (that is, either the display result designation command transmission process or the special symbol changing process), for the special symbol variation display. The special symbol display control data may be updated. In this case, in order not to cause a discrepancy between the variation time recognized on the game control microcomputer 90560 side and the variation time recognized on the effect control microcomputer 90100 side, variation also occurs in the display result designation command transmission process. The time timer may be configured to be decremented by 1.

  In this embodiment, the case where the special symbol display control data is set in the output buffer according to the value of the special symbol process flag is shown, but in the special symbol process process, the start flag is set at the start of fluctuation of the special symbol. At the same time, the end flag may be set at the end of the variation of the special symbol. Then, in the special symbol display control process (step S9032), the CPU 9056 starts updating the value of the special symbol display control data based on the start flag being set, and based on the end flag being set. The special symbol display control data for stopping and displaying the stop symbol may be set.

  Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. 53 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by a production control microcomputer 90100 (specifically, a production control CPU 90101) as a production control means mounted on the production control board 9080. When the power is turned on, the effect control CPU 90101 starts execution of main processing. In the main process, first, an initialization process for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing a timer for determining the activation interval (for example, 4 ms) of effect control is performed (step S90701). .. After that, the effect control CPU 90101 shifts to the loop processing for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (step S90702). When the timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 90101 sets the timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. In the main process, if the timer interrupt flag is set, the effect control CPU 90101 clears the flag (step S90703) and executes the following effect control process.

  In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 90101 first analyzes the received effect control command, and sets a flag according to the received effect control command, etc. (command analysis process: step S90704).

  Next, the effect control CPU 90101 performs effect control process processing (step S90705). In the effect control process process, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from among the processes corresponding to the control state, and the display control of the effect display device 909 is executed.

  Next, the effect control CPU 90101 performs a fourth symbol process process (step S90706). In the fourth symbol process processing, among the processes according to the control state, the process corresponding to the current control state (fourth symbol process flag) is selected and the fourth symbol display areas 909c and 909d of the effect display device 909 are selected. Display control of the fourth symbol is executed.

  Next, a random number updating process of updating the count value of the counter for generating a random number such as a jackpot symbol determining random number is executed (step S90707). After that, the process moves to step S90702.

  FIG. 54 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a command reception buffer for storing the effect control command received from the game control microcomputer 90560 of the main board 9031. In this example, a ring buffer type command receiving buffer capable of storing six 2-byte effect control commands is used. Therefore, the command receiving buffer is composed of the 12-byte area of the receiving command buffers 1-12. Then, a command reception number counter indicating which area to store the received command is used. The command reception number counter has a value of 0-11. The ring buffer format is not always required.

  The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 90560 is received by an interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal and is stored in the buffer area formed in the RAM. In the command analysis process, which command (see FIGS. 35 and 36) is the effect control command stored in the buffer area is analyzed. The interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal is executed prior to the timer interrupt process executed every 4 ms.

  55 to 57 are flowcharts showing a specific example of the command analysis process (step S90704). The effect control command received from the main board 9031 is stored in the received command buffer, but in the command analysis processing, the effect control CPU 90101 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

  In the command analysis processing, the effect control CPU 90101 first confirms whether or not a received command is stored in the command reception buffer (step S90611). Whether it is stored or not is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the received command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 90101 reads the received command from the command reception buffer (step S90612). After reading, the value of the read pointer is incremented by +2 (step S90613). The reason why +2 is performed is that two bytes (one command) are read.

  If the received effect control command is the variation pattern command (step S90614), the effect control CPU 90101 stores the received variation pattern command in the variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM (step S90615). Then, the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S90616).

  If the received effect control command is the display result specifying command (step S90617), the effect control CPU 90101 forms the received display result specifying command (display result 1 specifying command to display result 6 specifying command) in the RAM. The display result designation command storage area is stored (step S90618).

  If the received effect control command is the symbol confirmation designation command (step S90619), the effect control CPU 90101 sets the confirmation command reception flag (step S90620).

  If the received production control command is a big hit start designation command (commands A001 to A002 (H)) (step S90621), the effect control CPU 90101 sets a big hit start designation command reception flag (step S90622). In this case, for example, when the big hit start 1 designation command is received, the big hit start 1 designation command reception flag is set, and when the big hit start 2 designation command is received, the big hit start 2 designation command reception flag is set. set.

  If the received effect control command is a small hit/abrupt probability sudden big hit start designation command (command A003(H)) (step S90623), the effect control CPU 90101 sets a small hit/abrupt probability sudden change big hit start command reception flag. (Step S90624).

  If the received production control command is a big hit end designation command (commands A301 to A302(H)) (step S90625), the effect control CPU 90101 sets a big hit end designation command reception flag (step S90626). In this case, for example, when the big hit end 1 designation command is received, the big hit end 1 designation command reception flag is set, and when the big hit end 2 designation command is received, the big hit end 2 designation command reception flag is set. set.

  If the received production control command is a small hit/suddenly probable variation big hit end designation command (command A303(H)) (step S90627), the effect control CPU 90101 sets a small hit/suddenly probable variation big hit end designation command reception flag. (Step S90628).

  If the received production control command is any of the symbol designating commands (step S90651), the production control CPU 90101 temporarily stores the received design designating command in the symbol designating command storage area formed in the RAM (step S90651). S90652).

  If the received production control command is any variation category command (step S90653), the production control CPU 90101 temporarily stores the received variation category command in the variation category command storage area formed in the RAM (step S9063). S90654).

  If the received effect control command is the first reserved storage number addition designation command (step S90655), the effect control CPU 90101 sets the first reserved storage number stored in the first reserved storage number storage area formed in the RAM. The value is incremented by 1 (step S90656). Further, the effect control CPU 90101, the symbol designation command temporarily stored in the symbol designation command, the variation category command temporarily stored in the variation category command storage area, and the received first reserved storage number addition designation command. , And stores it in the first vacant storage area of the first start-up winning command storage area formed in the RAM (step S90657).

  If the received effect control command is the second reserved storage number addition designation command (step S90658), the effect control CPU 90101 sets the second reserved storage number to be stored in the second reserved storage number storage area formed in the RAM. The value is incremented by 1 (step S90659). Further, the effect control CPU 90101, the symbol designating command temporarily stored in the symbol designating command, the variation category command temporarily stored in the variation category command storage area, and the received second reserved storage number addition designating command. , And stores it in the first vacant storage area of the second start prize winning command storage area formed in the RAM (step S90660).

  FIG. 58 is an explanatory view showing a specific example of the start winning command storage area and the active display storage area. Of these, FIG. 58(A) shows a specific example of the first start-winning command storage area, FIG. 58(B) shows a specific example of the second start-winning command storage area, and FIG. 58(C). Shows a specific example of the active display storage area. As shown in FIG. 58(A), in the first start prize-winning command storage area, areas (storage areas 1 to 4) corresponding to the maximum value of the first reserved memory number (4 in this example) are secured. There is. Further, in the second start prize winning command storage area, areas (storage areas 1 to 4) corresponding to the maximum value of the second reserved storage number (4 in this example) are secured. In this embodiment, as shown in steps S901218A to S901220A of the first starting opening switch passing processing and steps S901218B to S901220B of the second starting opening switch passing processing of FIG. 42, the first starting winning opening 9013 or the second starting. When there is a start winning to the winning opening 9014, within one timer interrupt, a symbol designating command, a variation category command, and a reserved storage number addition designation command (first reserved storage number addition designation command or second reserved storage number) Three commands (addition designation command) are transmitted as a set. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 58, in each of the storage areas 1 to 4 of the first start prize-winning command storage area and the second start prize-winning command storage area, a symbol designating command, a variation category command, and a reserved storage number addition designation A storage area is secured so that commands can be associated and stored.

  In this embodiment, since the command transmission is performed in the order of the symbol designation command, the variation category command, and the reserved storage number addition designation command within one timer interrupt, the effect control CPU 90101 designates the symbol in the command analysis process. When the command and the variation category command are received, they are temporarily stored in the symbol designating command storage area and the variation category command storage area, respectively. Then, when the command for specifying addition of the number of reserved storages is received, if the command for specifying addition of the number of reserved storages is received, it is understood that the first reserved memory is increased by 1, and the command for specifying addition of the number of reserved storages is issued. If it is received, it can be seen that the second reserved memory is increased by 1, so if the first reserved memory number addition designating command is received, the temporarily stored symbol designating command and variable category command The 1 hold memory number addition designation command is stored in the first start prize winning command storage area, and if the 2nd hold memory number addition designation command is received, the 2nd hold memory is also stored along with the temporarily stored symbol designation command and variable category command. The number addition designation command is stored in the command storage area for the second start winning a prize (in FIG. 58, the commands are stored in all the storage areas 1 to 4 of the command storage area for the first start winning a prize). An example is shown in which commands are stored only in the storage area 1 of the storage areas 1 to 4 of the command storage area at the time of starting winning).

  58. Each command stored in the starting winning command storage area shown in FIG. 58 is sequentially executed in steps S90664 and S90668, which will be described later, at the timing of starting the variable display of the effect symbols each time the variable display of the effect symbols is started. To be deleted. In this case, in this embodiment, since the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed, first, the stored contents of the storage area 1 of the second start prize-winning command storage area shown in FIG. 58(B) are deleted. .. Next, if the second reserved memory does not newly occur, only the first reserved memory is stored, so at the timing of starting the variable display of the effect symbol next, the first shown in FIG. 58(A). The contents stored in the first storage area 1 of the start prize winning command storage area are deleted, and the contents of the first start prize winning command storage area are shifted. For example, when the variable display of a new effect design is started in the storage state shown in FIG. 58(A), each command stored in storage area 1 is deleted and each command stored in storage area 2 is deleted. The commands are shifted to the storage area 1, the commands stored in the storage area 3 are shifted to the storage area 2, and the commands stored in the storage area 4 are shifted to the storage area 3.

  Further, in this embodiment, the symbol designating command, the variation category command, and the reserved storage number addition designating command received at the time of the occurrence of the start winning are also referred to as the command at the time of the starting winning when they are comprehensively expressed. In addition, among the commands at the time of starting winning, the reserved storage number addition designation command, which is a command for designating information capable of recognizing that the first reserved storage number or the second reserved storage number has increased, is comprehensively expressed. In some cases, it is also called reserved storage information. In addition, whether or not it is a big hit or a small hit determined in the winning effect production process (see FIG. 44) at the time of starting winning, a result of determination of a big hit type, a symbol designating command that is a command showing a result of determination of a variation pattern type, and When the variable category command is comprehensively expressed, it is also called a winning determination result specification command or determination result information.

  In addition, the information regarding the display mode of the specific display (holding display, active display) is stored in the first start winning a prize command storage area, the second starting award command storage area, and the active display storage area. Specifically, the “display mode pattern”, the “change timing”, and the “operation frequency” are stored.

  The “display mode pattern” is a change pattern of the display mode of the specific display, and any one of Pt1′ to Pt4′ is stored. Pt1' is a display mode pattern that does not change from white, Pt2' is a display mode pattern that changes from white to blue, and Pt3' is a display mode pattern that changes from white to blue and then to red. Yes, Pt4' is a display mode pattern that changes from white to red. The number of changes in the display mode is not limited to once or twice, and a display mode pattern in which the display mode can be changed three times or more may be provided. Further, a display mode pattern that starts from a display mode other than white (for example, a display mode pattern that starts display in blue or red) may be provided.

  The “change timing” is the timing when the display mode of the specific display changes, and is stored when the display mode is a display mode pattern (display mode pattern other than Pt1′). Specifically, "active" indicating that it is the timing displayed as the active display, "first" indicating that it is the timing displayed as the first hold display, and the second Either the "second" indicating that it is the timing displayed as the hold display or the "third" indicating that the timing is displayed as the third hold display is stored. It

  The "operation frequency" is the frequency of switching the display position (advance position, retreat position) of the hold display, and either "high frequency" with high switching frequency or "low frequency" with low switching frequency. Is stored.

  If the received effect control command is the first reserved storage number subtraction designation command (step S90661), the effect control CPU 90101 subtracts 1 from the value of the first reserved storage number stored in the first reserved storage number saving area ( Step S90662). Next, the effect control CPU 90101 determines whether or not the high base state flag indicating the high base state is set (step S90663A), and if it is set, moves to step S90664. If not set, the first hold display and the active display are updated (step S90663B). Specifically, the active display in the active display portion 9018d is erased, and the first hold display is shifted by one (for example, the first first hold display of the hold storage display portion 9018c is shifted to the active display portion 9018d. If the second to fourth first hold displays on the hold storage display unit 9018c are lit, the first hold display displayed second is shifted to the first display area. Then, the first hold display displayed third is shifted to the second display area, and the first hold display displayed fourth is shifted to the third display area.

  Next, the effect control CPU 90101 updates the active storage area (step S90663C). Specifically, the information about the display mode pattern, the change timing, and the operation frequency stored in the first storage area of the first start-up winning command storage area is stored in the active storage area.

  Next, the effect control CPU 90101, the command at the time of the start winning prize stored in the first storage area of the command storage area at the time of the first starting prize (the symbol designating command, the variation category command, and the first reserved storage number addition designation). (Command) and information regarding the display mode of the specific display (display mode pattern, change timing, and operation frequency) are deleted, and the contents of the first start prize-winning command storage area are shifted (step S90664).

  If the received effect control command is the second reserved storage number subtraction designation command (step S90665), the effect control CPU 90101 subtracts 1 from the value of the second reserved storage number stored in the second reserved storage number saving area ( Step S90666). Next, the effect control CPU 90101 determines whether or not the high base state flag is set (step S90667A), and if not set, shifts to step S90668. If it is set, the second hold display is updated (step S90667B). Specifically, the active display in the active display portion 9018d is erased, and the second hold display is shifted one by one (for example, the first second hold display of the hold storage display portion 9018c is shifted to the active display portion 9018d. When the second to fourth second hold displays of the hold storage display unit 9018c are lit, the second hold display displayed second is shifted to the first display area. Then, the second hold display displayed on the third is shifted to the second display area, and the second hold display displayed on the fourth is shifted to the third display area.

  Next, the effect control CPU 90101 updates the active storage area (step S90667C). Specifically, the information about the display mode pattern, the change timing, and the operation frequency stored in the first storage area of the second start-winning command storage area is stored in the active storage area.

  Next, the effect control CPU 90101, the command at the time of start winning stored in the first storage area of the second start winning time command storage area (designation command, variation category command, and first reserved storage number addition specification). (Command) and information regarding the display mode of the specific display (display mode pattern, change timing, and operation frequency) are deleted, and the contents of the second start prize-winning command storage area are shifted (step S90668).

  If the received effect control command is the normal state background designating command (step S90669), the effect control CPU 90101 causes the effect display device 909 to change the background screen to a background screen corresponding to the normal state (for example, a background screen with a blue background color). ) (Step S90670). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the game state is a normal state (low probability/low base state), a background screen corresponding to the normal state is displayed to produce an effect mode according to the normal state (hereinafter, It is controlled to the normal production mode). Further, the effect control CPU 90101 resets the high base state flag if set (steps S90671A and S90671B), and switches the hold display displayed on the hold storage display unit 9018c from the second hold display to the first hold display. (Step S90671C).

  When the received production control command is the time saving state background designation command (step S90672), the effect control CPU 90101 causes the background screen in the effect display device 909 to be a background screen corresponding to the time saving state (for example, a background screen with a green background color). ) (Step S90673). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the game state is a time-saving state (low probability/high base state), a background screen corresponding to the time-saving state is displayed to produce an effect mode (hereinafter, It is also controlled to a time saving effect mode). Further, the effect control CPU 90101 sets a time saving state flag if not set (steps S90674A and S90674B), and switches the hold display displayed on the hold storage display unit 9018c from the first hold display to the second hold display (step S90674A, S90674B). S90674C).

  If the received effect control command is the probability variation state background designation command (step S90676), the effect control CPU 90101 changes the background screen in the effect display device 909 to a background screen corresponding to the probability variation state (for example, a background screen with a red background color). ) (Step S90677). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the game state is a probability variation state (high probability/high base state), a background screen corresponding to the probability variation state is displayed to produce an effect mode according to the probability variation state (hereinafter, It is also controlled to the probability variation production mode). Further, the effect control CPU 90101 proceeds to step S90674A.

  If the received effect control command is any other command, the effect control CPU 90101 sets a flag according to the received effect control command (step S90679). For example, if the received production control command is a customer waiting demo designation command, a customer waiting demo designation command reception flag indicating that the customer waiting demo designation command has been received is set. Then, the process proceeds to step S90611.

  FIG. 59 is a flow chart showing the effect control process process (step S90705) in the main process shown in FIG. In the effect control process process, the effect control CPU 90101 first executes a hold display control process for controlling the display mode of the hold display (step S90800A). Hereinafter, the effect of changing the display mode of the hold display may be referred to as "prefetching notice effect".

  Next, the effect control CPU 90101 performs any one of steps S90800 to S90807 according to the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is executed. In the production control process process, the display state of the production display device 909 is controlled and the variable display of the production symbol is realized, but the control relating to the variable display of the production symbol in synchronization with the variation of the first special symbol is also the second. The control related to the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the change of the special symbol is also executed in one effect control process process. The variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the change of the first special symbol and the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the change of the second special symbol may be configured to be executed by another effect control process process. Good. Further, in this case, it may be possible to determine which special symbol variable display is being executed depending on which effect control process process is performing variable display of the effect symbol.

  Fluctuating pattern command reception waiting process (step S90800): It is confirmed whether a varying pattern command is received from the game controlling microcomputer 90560. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the fluctuation pattern command reception flag set in the command analysis process is set. If the variation pattern command is received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to the value corresponding to the effect pattern variation start processing (step S90801).

  Production symbol variation start processing (step S90801): control is performed so that the variation of the production symbol is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the effect during the process of changing the effect design (step S90802).

  Production symbol variation process (step S90802): The switching timing of each variation state (variation speed) that constitutes the variation pattern is controlled, and the end of the variation time is monitored. Then, when the variation time ends, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the effect symbol variation stop processing (step S90803).

  Production symbol variation stop processing (step S90803): The variation of the production symbol is stopped and the display result (stopped symbol) is derived and displayed. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit display process (step S90804) or the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S90800).

  Big hit display processing (step S90804): After the end of the variable time, control is performed to display a screen for notifying the big hit on the effect display device 909. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the in-round process (step S90805).

  Processing during round (step S90805): Display control during round is performed. Then, when the round end condition is satisfied, if the final round has not ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the post-round processing (step S90806). If the final round has ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the big hit ending process (step S90807).

  Post-round processing (step S90806): display control between rounds is performed. Then, when the round start condition is satisfied, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the in-round process (step S90805).

  Big hit end production process (step S90807): In the production display device 909, display control is performed to notify the player that the big hit game state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the variable pattern command reception waiting process (step S90800).

  FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the hold display control process. In the hold display control process, the effect control CPU 90101 confirms whether or not a new start prize has been generated and a new start prize command has been received (step S903901). Specifically, if a new command is stored in the first start prize-winning command storage area or the second start prize-winning command storage area shown in FIG. 58, a new start winning occurs and a new start winning prize is generated. It can be determined that the command has been received. If no new start winning award command has been received, the hold display control process is ended as it is.

  If a command for starting winning is newly received, it is determined whether or not the high base state flag is set (step S903902), and if it is not set (low base state), a new hold is made. It is determined whether the storage is the first reserved storage (step S903903). Specifically, when the storage area storing the new start-winning command is the first start-winning command storage area, it is determined that the new reserved memory is the first reserved memory. If it is the second hold storage, the hold display control process is ended as it is.

  If it is the first hold storage, it is determined whether or not all the display mode patterns of the first hold display are Pt1′ (step S903904). Specifically, when the display mode pattern other than Pt1′ is stored in the first starting winning prize storage area shown in FIG. 58A, all the display mode patterns of the first hold display are Pt1′. If it is determined that there is no display mode pattern other than Pt1′ in the first start winning prize storage area, it is determined that all the display mode patterns of the first hold display are Pt1′. When the first hold display of the display manner pattern other than Pt1′ exists, the new display manner pattern of the first hold display is determined as Pt1′ (step S903905), while the first hold of the display manner pattern other than Pt1′ is determined. If no display is present, a display mode pattern determination lottery for determining a new display mode pattern for the first hold display is performed (step S903906). Specifically, the display mode pattern determination lottery is performed using the display mode pattern determination lottery table shown in FIG.

  FIG. 61 is an explanatory diagram showing a display mode pattern determination lottery table. In the display mode pattern determination lottery table shown in FIG. 61, the display mode pattern (Pt1′ to Pt1′ to Pt1′ to Pt1′ to Although the determination value corresponding to Pt4′) is assigned, the ratio of the assigned determination value is shown in the example shown in FIG. 61 to simplify the description. The effect control CPU 90101 extracts, for example, a random number for display mode pattern determination lottery, and determines the determination item to which a determination value that matches the extracted random number is assigned.

  FIG. 61(A) is a first display mode pattern determination lottery table used when the number of reserved memories is 1, and FIG. 61(B) is a first display mode pattern determination lottery table used when the number of reserved memories is 2 or more. It is a display mode pattern determination lottery table. Note that, here, the “reserved storage number” means the first reserved storage number when the newly generated reserved storage is the first reserved storage (that is, when the display mode pattern determination lottery in step S903906 is executed). That is, when the newly generated pending storage is the second pending storage (that is, when the display mode pattern determination lottery in step S903924 is executed), it is the second pending storage number.

  First, the first display mode pattern determination lottery table shown in FIG. 61A will be described. For example, when the winning determination result is a probability big jackpot or a normal jackpot (when the symbol designating command is C401 (H) or C402 (H)), Pt1' is 20%, Pt2' is 30% Thus, Pt4' is determined at a rate of 50%.

  For example, when the winning determination result is a sudden change big hit or a small hit (when the symbol designating command is C403 (H) or C404 (H)), Pt1' is 25% and Pt2' is 35%. In proportion, Pt4′ is determined at a rate of 40%.

  For example, when the winning determination result is out of super reach (when the symbol designating command is C400 (H) and the variation category command is C607 (H) or C609 (H)), Pt1' is 50% ratio Thus, Pt2' is determined at a rate of 30% and Pt4' is determined at a rate of 20%.

  For example, when the winning determination result is other, Pt1′ is determined at a rate of 90% and Pt2′ is determined at a rate of 10%.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, since the display mode of the specific display can be changed only once for each change, Pt3′ in which the number of changes is two when the number of reserved memories is one. Is a configuration that is not selected. If the display mode of the specific display can be changed a plurality of times during one change, Pt3′ may be selectable even when the number of pending storages is one.

  Next, the second display mode pattern determination lottery table shown in FIG. 61(B) will be described. For example, when the winning determination result is a probability variation big hit or a normal big hit (when the symbol designating command is C401 (H) or C402 (H)), Pt1' is 10% and Pt2' is 20%. Thus, Pt3' is determined at a rate of 30% and Pt4' is determined at a rate of 40%.

  For example, when the winning determination result is a sudden change big hit or a small hit (when the symbol designating command is C403 (H) or C404 (H)), Pt1' is 15% and Pt2' is 20%. In proportion, Pt3' is determined to be 30%, and Pt4' is determined to be 35%.

  For example, when the winning determination result is out of super reach (when the symbol designating command is C400 (H) and the variation category command is C607 (H) or C609 (H)), Pt1' is 40% Then, Pt2′ is determined at a rate of 30%, Pt3′ is determined at a rate of 20%, and Pt4′ is determined at a rate of 10%.

  For example, when the winning determination result is other, Pt1′ is determined at a rate of 90% and Pt2′ is determined at a rate of 10%.

  As a result, the degree of expectation for each display mode pattern is Pt1′<Pt2′<Pt3′<Pt4′. Further, the expectation degree indicated by the display mode of the hold display is white<blue<red. It should be noted that a display mode pattern that can be selected only when a big hit or a specific big hit may be provided. Further, a display mode (for example, rainbow) that can be changed only in the display mode pattern may be provided.

  In the present embodiment, the display mode pattern is determined at the same rate when the winning determination result is the probability variation big hit and when it is the normal big hit. It may be decided to decide. Similarly, the display mode pattern may be determined at different rates depending on whether the winning determination result is a sudden change big hit or a small hit.

  Further, the proportion of determining the display mode pattern may be different depending on more detailed conditions. For example, the display mode pattern may be determined at different rates based on the type of reach effect indicated by the variation category command, the presence/absence of pseudo-repeating, or the number of pseudo-repeating.

  After step S903905 or step S903906, when the display mode pattern other than Pt1′ is determined, the effect control CPU 90101 executes the change timing determination lottery for determining the change timing of the display mode of the specific display ( N in step S903907, S903908). Specifically, the change timing determination lottery table is used to perform the change timing determination lottery.

  FIG. 62 is an explanatory diagram showing a change timing determination lottery table. In the change timing determination lottery table shown in FIG. 62, according to the winning determination result (probability variation jackpot or normal jackpot, sudden variation jackpot (abrupt confirmation jackpot) or small hit, super-reach miss, etc.) and number of reserved memories (1 to 4). The determination value corresponding to the change timing (active, first, second, and third) is assigned, but in the example shown in FIG. 62, the assigned determination value is used to simplify the description. Is shown. The effect control CPU 90101 extracts, for example, a random number for change timing determination lottery, and determines the determination item to which a determination value that matches the extracted random number is assigned.

  Note that, here, the “number of reserved memories” means the number of first reserved memories when the newly generated reserved memory is the first reserved memory (that is, when the change timing determination lottery in step S903908 is executed). That is, when the newly generated pending storage is the second pending storage (that is, when the change timing determination lottery in step S903926 is executed), it is the second pending storage number.

  FIG. 62(A) is a first change timing determination lottery table used when the number of changes is 1 (that is, when the display mode pattern is Pt2′ or Pt4′), and FIG. 62(B) is It is the second change timing determination lottery table used when the number of changes is 2 (that is, when the display mode pattern is Pt3′).

  First, the first change timing determination lottery table shown in FIG. 62A will be described. For example, when the number of reserved memories is "4", and the winning determination result is a probability variation big hit or a normal big hit (when the symbol designating command is C401 (H) or C402 (H)), the "third" is At a rate of 40%, "second" is determined at a rate of 30%, "first" is determined at a rate of 40%, and "active" is determined at a rate of 10%.

  For example, when the number of reserved memories is "4" and the winning determination result is a sudden probability big hit or a small hit (when the symbol designating command is C403 (H) or C404 (H)), "third" Is 37%, the "second" is 33%, the "first" is 17%, and the "active" is 13%.

  For example, when the number of reserved memories is "4" and the winning determination result is out of super reach (the symbol designating command is C400 (H) and the variation category command is C607 (H) or C609 (H)). In the case), the ratio of "3rd" is 13%, "2nd" is 17%, "1st" is 33%, and "active" is 37%. It

  For example, if the number of reserved memories is “4” and the winning determination result is other, the “third” is 10%, the “second” is 20%, and the “first” is Is determined at a rate of 30%, and “active” is determined at a rate of 40%.

  In addition, for example, when the number of reserved memories is "3" and the winning determination result is a probability variation big hit or a normal big hit (when the symbol designating command is C401 (H) or C402 (H)), "the second one" Is 50%, the "first" is 30%, and the "active" is 20%.

  For example, when the number of reserved memories is "3" and the winning determination result is a sudden probability big hit or a small hit (when the symbol designating command is C403 (H) or C404 (H)), "second" Is 40%, the "first" is 35%, and the "active" is 25%.

  For example, when the number of reserved memories is “3” and the winning determination result is out of super reach (the symbol designating command is C400 (H) and the variation category command is C607 (H) or C609 (H)). In the case), the "second" is determined at a rate of 25%, the "first" is determined at a rate of 35%, and the "active" is determined at a rate of 40%.

  For example, when the number of reserved memories is “3” and the winning determination result is other, the ratio of “second” is 20%, “first” is 30%, and “active” is It is determined at a rate of 50%.

  In addition, for example, when the number of reserved memories is "2" and the winning determination result is a probability big hit or a normal big hit (when the symbol designating command is C401 (H) or C402 (H)), the "first Is determined at a rate of 70%, and “active” is determined at a rate of 30%.

  For example, if the number of stored memories is "2" and the winning determination result is a sudden probability big hit or a small hit (when the symbol designating command is C403 (H) or C404 (H)), the "first" Is determined at a rate of 60%, and “active” is determined at a rate of 40%.

  For example, when the number of reserved memories is “2” and the winning determination result is out of super reach (the symbol designating command is C400 (H) and the variation category command is C607 (H) or C609 (H)). In the case), "first" is determined at a rate of 40% and "active" is determined at a rate of 60%.

  For example, when the number of reserved memories is “2” and the winning determination result is other, the “first” is determined at a rate of 30% and the “active” is determined at a rate of 70%.

  Further, for example, when the number of reserved storages is "1", "active" is determined at a rate of 100%.

  Next, the second change timing determination lottery table shown in FIG. 62B will be described. For example, when the number of reserved memories is "4", and the winning determination result is a probability variation big hit or a normal big hit (when the symbol designating command is C401 (H) or C402 (H)), "third" and 30% of the "2nd" combination, 25% of the "3rd" and "1st" combination, and 20% of the "3rd" and "active" combination Then, the combination of the "second" and the "first" is 13%, the combination of the "second" and the "active" is 7%, and the combination of the "first" and the "active" is 7%. The combination is determined at a rate of 5%.

  For example, when the number of reserved memories is "4" and the winning determination result is a sudden probability big hit or a small hit (when the symbol designating command is C403 (H) or C404 (H)), "third" And the combination of "the second" is 20%, the combination of "the third" and "the first" is 25%, and the combination of "the third" and "active" is 25%. In terms of proportion, the combination of "second" and "first" is 15%, the combination of "second" and "active" is 10%, and "first" and "active" The combination is determined at a rate of 5%.

  For example, when the number of reserved memories is "4" and the winning determination result is out of super reach (the symbol designating command is C400 (H) and the variation category command is C607 (H) or C609 (H)). In the case of), the combination of the "third" and the "second" is 5%, the combination of the "third" and the "first" is 10%, the "third" and the "third" The combination of "active" is 15%, the combination of "second" and "first" is 25%, the combination of "second" and "active" is 25%, The combination of "first" and "active" is determined at a rate of 20%.

  For example, if the number of reserved memories is "4" and the winning determination result is other, the combination of "3rd" and "2nd" is 5%, "3rd" and "1". The combination of "the second" is 7%, the combination of "the third" and "active" is 13%, the combination of the "second" and "the first" is 20%, The combination of "second" and "active" is determined at a rate of 25%, and the combination of "first" and "active" is determined at a rate of 30%.

  In addition, for example, when the number of reserved memories is "3" and the winning determination result is a probability variation big hit or a normal big hit (when the symbol designating command is C401 (H) or C402 (H)), "the second one" 50% of the combination of "1" and "1st", 30% of the combination of "2nd" and "active", and 20% of the combination of "1st" and "active" Is decided.

  For example, when the number of reserved memories is "3" and the winning determination result is a sudden probability big hit or a small hit (when the symbol designating command is C403 (H) or C404 (H)), "second" And the combination of "first" is 40%, the combination of "second" and "active" is 35%, and the combination of "first" and "active" is 25%. ,It is determined.

  For example, when the number of reserved memories is “3” and the winning determination result is out of super reach (the symbol designating command is C400 (H) and the variation category command is C607 (H) or C609 (H)). Case), the combination of "second" and "first" is 25%, the combination of "second" and "active" is 35%, "first" and "active" 40% of the combinations are determined.

  For example, when the number of reserved memories is “3” and the winning determination result is other, the combination of the “second” and the “first” is 20%, the “second” and the “active”. The combination of "" is determined at a rate of 30%, and the combination of "first" and "active" is determined at a rate of 50%.

  Further, for example, when the number of reserved storages is “2”, the combination of “first” and “active” is determined at a rate of 100%.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the higher the reliability of the big hit is, the more the display mode changes at an early timing after the hold display is started. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The reliability of the big hit may be low as the display mode changes at an early timing after the hold display is started.

  Note that in the present embodiment, the change timing is determined using the change timing determination table shown in FIG. 62, but the change timing is determined at different rates based on which display mode is changed. It may be done. For example, in the case of changing to red, a higher timing than in the case of changing to blue (eg, “active”) may be determined as the change timing.

  In the present embodiment, the change timing is determined at the same rate when the winning determination result is the probability variation big hit and when it is the normal big hit, but the change timing is determined at different rates. It may be that. Similarly, the change timing may be determined at different rates depending on whether the winning determination result is a sudden change big hit or a small hit.

  Further, the ratio of determining the change timing may be different depending on more detailed conditions. For example, the change timing may be determined at different ratios based on the type of reach effect indicated by the variation category command, the presence/absence of pseudo-repetition, or the number of pseudo-repetitions.

  After the execution of Y in step S903907 or step S903908, the effect control CPU 90101 stores the determination result (display mode pattern and change timing) in the first start prize-winning command storage area (step S903909), and sets a low frequency as the operation frequency. It is stored (step S903910). Then, a new first hold display in white is started (step S903911).

  If the high base state flag is set in step S903902, it is determined whether the new pending storage is the second pending storage (step S903921). Specifically, if the storage area in which the new start-winning command is stored is the second start-winning command storage area, it is determined that the new reserved memory is the second reserved memory. If it is the first hold storage, the hold display control process is ended as it is.

  If it is the second hold storage, it is determined whether the display mode pattern of all the second hold displays is Pt1′ (step S903922). Specifically, when a display mode pattern other than Pt1′ is stored in the second starting prize winning storage area shown in FIG. 58B, all the display mode patterns of the second hold display are Pt1′. When it is determined that there is no display mode pattern other than Pt1′ in the second start winning prize storage area, it is determined that all the display mode patterns of the second hold display are Pt1′. When the second hold display of the display mode pattern other than Pt1′ exists, the new display mode pattern of the second hold display is determined as Pt1′ (step S903923), while the second hold of the display mode pattern other than Pt1′ is determined. If no display is present, a display mode pattern determination lottery for determining a new display mode pattern for the second hold display is performed (step S903924). Specifically, the display mode pattern determination lottery is performed using the display mode pattern determination lottery table shown in FIG.

  After step S903923 or step S903924, when the display mode pattern other than Pt1′ is determined, the effect control CPU 90101 executes the change timing determination lottery for determining the change timing (N in step S903925, S903926). ). Specifically, the change timing determination lottery table is used to perform the change timing determination lottery.

  After the execution of Y in step S903925 or step S903926, the effect control CPU 90101 stores the determination result (display mode pattern and change timing) in the second start prize-winning command storage area (step S903927), and sets a low operation frequency. It is stored (step S903928). Then, a new second hold display in white is started (step S903929).

  FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S90800) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 59. In the variation pattern command reception waiting process, the effect control CPU 90101 confirms whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S90811). If the variation pattern command reception flag is set, the variation pattern command reception flag is reset (step S90812). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the effect design variation start process (step S90801) (step S90813). As described above, in this embodiment, the display result designation command is also transmitted when the power is restored (see step S9044). However, as shown in FIG. Based on the receipt of the variation pattern command, it shifts to the effect symbol variation start process and starts the variation display of the effect symbol, so the variation of the effect symbol is not received by the display result designation command without receiving the variation pattern command. The display does not start.

  64 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation start process (step S90801) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 59. In the effect symbol variation start processing, the effect control CPU 90101 first reads a variation pattern command from the variation pattern command storage area (step S908001). Next, the effect control CPU 90101 displays the effect design display result (stop) according to the variation pattern command read in step S908001 and the data stored in the display result specification command storage area (that is, the received display result specification command). (Symbol) is determined (step S908002). That is, by the process of step S908002 is executed by the effect control CPU 90101, the display result of the variable display of the identification information (the stop of the effect symbol) according to the variable display pattern (variation pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determination means A display result determining means for determining (pattern) is realized. When the pseudo pattern is specified by the variation pattern command, the effect control CPU 90101, in step S908002, creates a chance eye symbol (for example, “223” or “445”) as a temporary stop symbol in the pseudo sequence. , A combination of a big hit symbol that does not reach and a symbol that is offset by one symbol) are also determined. Further, the effect control CPU 90101 stores data indicating the determined stop symbol of the effect symbol in the effect symbol display result storage area. Note that in step S908002, the effect control CPU 90101 may determine whether or not it is a big hit based on the received variation pattern command, and may determine the stop symbol of the effect symbol based on only the variation pattern command. ..

  FIG. 65 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a stop symbol of the effect symbol in the effect display device 909. In the example shown in FIG. 65, when the received display result designation command indicates “normal big hit” (when the received display result designation command is the display result 2 designation command), the effect control CPU 90101 stops. As a design, the combination of the effect designs in which the three designs have the same even number is determined. Further, when the received display result designation command indicates “probable variation big hit” (when the received display result designation command is the display result 3 designation command), the effect control CPU 90101 has 3 symbols as a stop symbol. A combination of effect symbols arranged in the same odd number symbol is determined.

  Further, when the received display result designation command indicates "suddenly probable variation big hit" or "small hit" (when the received display result designation command is the display result 4 designation command or the display result 5 designation command), The effect control CPU 90101 determines a combination of effect symbols such as "135" as a stop symbol. Then, in the case of "disappearance" (when the received display result designation command is the display result 1 designation command), a combination of effect symbols other than the above is determined. However, when the reach effect is involved, a combination of effect symbols having two left and right symbols is determined. Also, the combination of the three symbols derived and displayed on the effect display device 909 is the "stop symbol" of the effect symbol.

  The production control CPU 90101 extracts, for example, a random number for determining the stop symbol, and uses the stop symbol determination table in which the data indicating the combination of the effect symbols and the numerical values are associated with each other, the stop symbol of the effect symbol. decide. That is, the stop symbol is determined by selecting the data indicating the combination of the effect symbols corresponding to the numerical values that match the extracted random numbers.

  In addition, as for the effect design, a stop design that reminds of a big hit (a combination of designs in which the left, middle, and right are all the same) is called a big hit. In addition, in this embodiment, when the probability variation big hit is stopped and displayed in a state where the left-middle-right is aligned with the odd symbols, it is recalled that the odd symbols are probability variation jackpots. A pattern that evokes such a sudden change jackpot is called a probability variation pattern. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the normal big hit is displayed in a stopped state in which the left, middle and right are evenly arranged in the even symbols, it is recalled that the even symbols are not sure-variable big hits (normally big hits). .. Such a pattern that reminds us that it will not be a probability variation jackpot is called a non-probability variation pattern. In addition, a stop design that reminds the user of disengagement is called a disengagement design.

  Next, the effect control CPU 90101 executes a notice effect (a notice effect excluding the look-ahead notice effect. For example, a step-up notice effect, a character notice effect, and a dialogue notice effect) on the effect display device 909 during the variable display of the effect symbol. A notice effect setting process for determining whether or not or setting a notice aspect of notice effect is executed (step S908003).

  Then, the effect control CPU 90101 executes operation frequency determination processing for determining the operation frequency of the specific display (hold display, active display) (step S908003A).

  Next, the effect control CPU 90101 selects a change pattern, a notice effect when the notice effect is executed, and a process table corresponding to the change effect when the notice effect is executed (step S908004). Then, the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step S908005).

  FIG. 66 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of the process table. The process table is a table in which process data that the production control CPU 90101 refers to when performing control of the production device is set. That is, the effect control CPU 90101 controls the effect display devices (effect parts) such as the effect display device 909 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table is composed of data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer set values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data are collected. In the display control execution data, data and the like indicating the form of each variation constituting the variation mode during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the effect design are described. Specifically, data relating to the change of the display screen of the effect display device 909 is described. Further, the process timer set value is set with the change time in the form of the change. The effect control CPU 90101 refers to the process table, and performs control to display effect symbols in a variation mode set in the display control execution data only for the time set in the process timer set value.

  The process table shown in FIG. 66 is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 9080. Further, the process table is prepared according to each variation pattern. When it is determined to execute the notice effect, the effect control CPU 90101 selects the process table corresponding to the notice effect in step S90804.

  In the process table used when performing effect control for a variation pattern involving reach effect, the left symbol is stopped and displayed when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of variation, and the right symbol is stopped when the predetermined time has elapsed. Process data indicating display is set. It should be noted that instead of setting the symbols to be stopped and displayed in the process table, the images for displaying the symbols are synthesized and generated according to the determined stop symbols, the temporary stop symbols in the pseudo-relation and the sliding effect. May be.

  Further, the effect control CPU 90101, according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1), an effect device (effect display device 909 as effect parts, effect parts). The control of the various lamps and the speaker 9027 as a part for effect is executed (step S908006). For example, a command is output to the VDP 90109 to display an image according to the variation pattern on the effect display device 909. In addition, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp driver board 9035 in order to control the turning on/off of various lamps. Further, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound output board 9070 in order to output sound from the speaker 9027.

  In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 90101 controls so that the effect pattern is variably displayed by the change pattern corresponding to the change pattern command on a one-to-one basis. However, the effect control CPU 90101 controls the change pattern command. The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to.

  Next, the effect control CPU 90101 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern command in the fluctuation time timer (step S908007).

  Then, the effect control CPU 90101 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect during the process of changing the effect design (step S90802) (step S908008).

  FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the operation frequency determination process. In the operation frequency determination process, the effect control CPU 90101 performs a process (steps S90450 to S904506) for determining whether or not to execute the change effect in the variation to be started, the type of the change effect when executing, and the specific display of the execution target. After the execution, the processing (steps S904507 to S904511) for determining the operation frequency of each specific display is executed.

  First, the effect control CPU 90101 determines whether or not the red specific display is displayed (step S904500), and if it is displayed, the process proceeds to step S904507. As described above, in the present embodiment, since the display mode is changed only for the single specific display, when the red specific display (specific display of the most reliable display mode) is already displayed, Even if the change effect is executed, further change in the display mode cannot be expected, so the change effect cannot be executed. It should be noted that even if it is not possible to expect a further change in the display mode, the change effect may be able to be executed, and if the gaming machine is capable of changing the display mode of a plurality of specific displays, it is the most reliable. The change effect may be executable even when the specific display in the high display mode is displayed.

  When the red specific display is not displayed, the effect control CPU 90101 executes the change effect execution lottery for determining whether or not to execute the change effect in the variation to be started (step S904501). Specifically, the change effect execution lottery is performed using the change effect execution lottery table shown in FIG. 68(A).

  FIG. 68A is an explanatory diagram showing a change effect execution lottery table. In the change effect execution lottery table shown in FIG. 68(A), the presence/absence of execution of a change effect and the type of change effect when the change effect is executed depending on the presence/absence of a change schedule of the specific display in the start fluctuation Although the determination values corresponding to (first change effect, second change effect) are assigned, in the example shown in FIG. 68(A), the ratio of the assigned determination values is shown in order to simplify the description. Has been done. The effect control CPU 90101 extracts, for example, a random number for change effect execution lottery, and determines it as a decision item to which a determination value that matches the extracted random number is assigned.

  It should be noted that, regarding whether or not there is a plan to change the specific display in the variation to be started, the command storing area for the command for starting winning a prize shown in FIG. In the case of the storage area, the variation to be started is the variation based on the second reserved memory, it is determined based on the second start winning award command storage area). At this point, the start winning award command storage area is not updated (steps S90664 and S90668) based on the start of the variation, so the information about the variation to be started is one of the starting winning award command storage areas. It is stored in the eye storage area. Therefore, "active" is stored as the change timing in the first storage area, "first" is stored as the change timing in the second storage area, and change in the third storage area is stored. If the "second" is stored as the timing or the "third" is stored as the change timing in the fourth storage area, it is determined that there is a change schedule.

  For example, when there is a change schedule, the execution of the first change effect is determined at a rate of 70%, and the execution of the second change effect is determined at a rate of 30%. When there is no change plan, it is determined that the first change effect is executed at a rate of 3%, the second change effect is performed at a rate of 7%, and the change effect is not executed at a rate of 90%. It

  In this way, when there is a planned change, any change effect is executed. That is, the display mode can be changed only when the change effect is executed.

  In this way, when there is a change schedule, the first change effect is executed at a higher rate than the second change effect, and when there is no change schedule, the second change effect is the first change effect. Is configured to run at a higher rate than. As a result, the display mode of the specific effect is changed at a higher rate when the first change effect is executed than when the second change effect is executed. Therefore, it indicates whether or not the display mode of the specific display has changed depending on the type of change effect.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the first change effect and the second change effect are provided as the types of change effects, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a change effect in which the display mode of the specific display always changes at the time of execution may be provided.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the operation frequency is determined after determining the type of change effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the operation frequency of the specific display is determined before the type of change effect, and the type of change effect is determined based on the operation frequency (for example, if the frequency is low, the second change effect is likely to be selected). Good.

  After step S904501, the effect control CPU 90101 determines whether to execute the change effect (step S904502), and if not, shifts to step S904507. When the change effect is executed, it is determined whether there is a change schedule (step S904503), and when there is no change schedule (that is, when the change effect is executed but the display mode does not change), a blue specific display. Is displayed (step S904503A), and if not displayed, execution target determination lottery for determining the specific display of the execution target of the change effect is executed (step S904503B). Specifically, the execution target determination lottery table is used to perform the execution target determination lottery.

  FIG. 68B is an explanatory diagram showing an execution target determination lottery table. In the execution target determination lottery table shown in FIG. 68(B), a change effect execution target according to the number of pending memories (active display, first pending display, second pending display, third pending display). Although the determination value corresponding to is assigned, the ratio of the assigned determination value is shown in the example shown in FIG. 68(B) in order to simplify the description. The effect control CPU 90101 extracts, for example, a random number for execution target determination lottery, and determines a determination item to which a determination value that matches the extracted random number is assigned.

  Note that, here, the “reserved storage number” is the first reserved storage number when the fluctuation to be started is the fluctuation based on the first reserved storage, and is the fluctuation based on the second reserved storage when the fluctuation to be started is the fluctuation based on the first reserved storage. It is the second number of reserved memories. It should be noted that at this stage, the number of pending storages is not subtracted (steps S90662 and S90666) based on the start of fluctuation.

  For example, when the number of held storages is “4”, the active display is targeted for execution at a rate of 40%, the first pending display is targeted for execution at a rate of 20%, and the second is displayed. It is determined at 20% that the hold display of No. is executed, and at 20% that the third hold display is executed.

  For example, when the number of held storages is "3", the active display is targeted for execution at a rate of 60%, the first pending display is targeted for execution at a rate of 20%, and the second display is performed. It is decided at a rate of 20% that the pending display of is executed.

  For example, when the number of reserved storages is “2”, the active display is determined to be executed at a rate of 80%, and the first suspended display is determined to be executed at a rate of 20%.

  For example, when the number of pending storages is “1”, the active display is determined to be executed at a rate of 100%.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the active display is configured to be easily executed. As a result, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for fluctuations during execution.

  Note that, in the present embodiment, only the hold display that is already displayed can be determined as the execution target of the change effect, but here, the execution target of the change effect in which the display mode does not change (so-called gasse effect) is set. In order to determine, a pending display that is not displayed may be the execution target. For example, when the number of stored memories is “3” (that is, when only the active display, the first suspended display, and the second suspended display are displayed when the change effect is executed). Also, the third hold display can be determined as the execution target of the change effect, and when the third hold display is determined as the execution target, the change effect is displayed in the display area of the third hold display. It may be performed (the hammer swings in the case of the first change effect, and the arrow passes by in the case of the second change effect).

  In S904503A, when the blue specific display is displayed, the blue specific display is determined as the execution target of the change effect (step S904504). As a result, the player can be expected to further change the display mode of the specific display whose display mode has already changed to blue. Even when the specific display in which the display mode is already changed to blue is displayed, a change effect (a change effect in which the display mode does not change) in which another specific display (white specific display) is executed. (So-called production) may be performed. However, even if the specific display that has already changed to blue has been displayed, it is possible that the player will be stressed if he frequently executes the gasse effect that targets the other specific display. Be done. Therefore, even with a configuration capable of executing a gaze effect in which a specific display that is different from the specific display that has already changed to blue is executable, a change effect that targets the specific display that has already changed to blue is executed. It is desirable to perform at a high rate.

  In step S904503, if there is a change schedule, the specific display (active display or hold display) that is the change schedule is determined as the execution target of the change effect (step S904505). As described above, at this time point, the start winning award command storage area is not updated (steps S90664 and S90668) based on the start of the change, so the specific display corresponding to the storage area 1 is changed. If it is a schedule, "Active" is displayed. If the specific display corresponding to the storage area 2 is scheduled to change, "1st" is displayed. If the specific display corresponding to the storage area 3 is scheduled to change, "2nd" is displayed. If the specific display corresponding to the storage area 4 is scheduled to change, "third" is determined as the execution target of the change effect.

  After performing any of steps S904503B, S904504, and S904505, the effect control CPU 90101 sets the type of change effect to be executed and the specific display of the execution target (step S904506). A process table corresponding to the change effect of the content set here is selected in step S908004 and step S908006 or step S908105 described later is executed, whereby the change effect is executed.

  Next, the effect control CPU 90101, the hold specific value K for specifying what number of the hold display (that is, the first hold display if K=1, two if K=2. "1" is set to the eye hold display, the third hold display if K=3, and the fourth hold display if K=4 (step S904507), and the operation frequency of each specific display is set. The operation frequency determination lottery for determining is executed. Specifically, the operation frequency determination lottery table is used to perform the operation frequency determination lottery.

  FIG. 68C is an explanatory diagram showing an operation frequency determination lottery table. In the operation frequency determination lottery table shown in FIG. 68(C), the presence/absence of a change in the display mode of the specific display (the change schedule of the Kth hold display) and the change effect (change effect to the Kth hold display) are shown. The determination values corresponding to the operation frequency (high frequency, low frequency) are assigned according to the above. However, in the example shown in FIG. 68C, the ratio of the assigned determination values is It is shown. The effect control CPU 90101 extracts, for example, a random number for operation frequency determination lottery, and determines the determination item to which a determination value that matches the extracted random number is assigned.

  Whether or not the display mode of the specific display is scheduled to change is determined by referring to the starting winning command storage area shown in FIG. Specifically, if the reserved specific number K=1, “active” is stored as the fluctuation timing in the first storage area, or if the reserved specific number K=2, the fluctuation timing in the second storage area. “1st” is stored, or if the reserved specific number K=3, then “second” is stored as the change timing in the third storage area, or the reserved specific number K=4. For example, when the “third” is stored as the change timing in the fourth storage area, it is determined that there is a change schedule.

  Further, the “change effect” is determined based on the type of change effect set in step S904506 and the execution target. For example, if the specific hold number K=1, the active display is set as the execution target, and if the specific hold number K=2, the first pending display is set as the execution target, the specific hold number K. =3, the second hold display is set as an execution target, and the hold specific number K=4, the third hold display is set as an execution target. It is determined that the change effect is executed.

  For example, when there is a change schedule and the first change effect is executed, the low frequency is determined to be 20% and the high frequency is determined to be 80%. When there is a change schedule and the second change effect is executed, the low frequency is determined at a rate of 30% and the high frequency is determined at a rate of 70%.

  Further, for example, when there is no change schedule and the first change effect is executed, the low frequency is determined to be 40% and the high frequency is determined to be 60%. When there is no change schedule and the second change effect is executed, the low frequency is determined to be 45% and the high frequency is determined to be 55%. When there is no change schedule and the change effect is not executed, the low frequency is determined at a rate of 90% and the high frequency is determined at a rate of 10%.

  As described above, as the operation mode of the specific display that is the execution target of the change effect, a high frequency is easily determined rather than a low frequency. Therefore, the specific display having the high frequency of operation is more likely to be the target of change effect execution than the specific display having the low frequency.

  Further, the specific display having the change schedule has a configuration in which the high frequency is more easily determined as the operation frequency than the specific display having no change schedule. Therefore, whether or not there is a change is suggested by the operation frequency.

  In the present embodiment, the high frequency and the low frequency are provided as the operation frequencies, but a fixed operation frequency that can be selected only when the change effect is executed may be provided. The player is informed that the change effect will be executed by performing the confirmation operation frequency.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the high frequency is selected as the operation frequency in the specific display having the change schedule at a higher rate than in the specific display having no change schedule. It is not limited. For example, when the specific display with the planned change is displayed, the high frequency is selected as the operation frequency at a higher rate as compared with the case where the specific display with the planned change is not displayed (that is, the changed frequency). Even if the specific display has no plan, a high frequency is likely to be selected as the operation frequency when a specific display having a change schedule is displayed as another specific display). In addition, the higher the frequency, the higher the frequency may be selected for the specific display that is displayed closer to the specific display that is scheduled to change.

  Next, the effect control CPU 90101 stores the operation mode of the Kth hold display (step S904509). For example, if K=1, it is the first storage area, if K=2, it is the second storage area, if K=3, it is the third storage area, and if K=4. “High frequency” or “low frequency” is stored as the operation mode in the fourth storage area. The reserved specific number K and the number of pending storages (the first pending storage number if the variation to be executed is a variation based on the first pending storage, and the second pending storage number if the variation to be performed is a variation based on the second pending storage ) Is the same value (step S904510), and if they are not the same value, 1 is added to the reserved specific number K (step S904511), and the process proceeds to step S904508 again. In this way, the operation frequency for all stored storages is determined one by one. The operation frequency determination process ends when the number of reserved specifics K and the number of reserved storages have the same value.

  Note that, in step S904508, an operation mode other than the operation frequency may be determined instead of or in addition to the operation frequency. For example, it may be determined whether the mole displayed as the specific display is in a pop-out mode or in a rotating mode.

  FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing the effect of the effect of changing the effect design (step S90802) in the effect control process. In the effect symbol fluctuation process, the value of the process timer is decremented by 1 (step S908101), and the value of the fluctuation time timer is decremented by 1 (step S908102). When the process timer times out (step S908103), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer set value set next in the process table is set in the process timer (step S908104). Also, the control state for the effect device is changed based on the display control execution data, the lamp control execution data, and the sound number data set next (step S908105).

  After that, the effect control CPU 90101 determines whether or not the display position fixing flag indicating that the display position of the specific display is fixed is set (step S904700A), and if it is set, the process proceeds to step S904707. .. The display position fixing flag is a flag that is set during the execution of the first change effect, that is, during the execution of the first change effect, the processing of steps S904701 to S904706 (processing for changing the display position of the specific display). ) Is not executed.

  Note that, in the present embodiment, the configuration is such that switching of the display positions of all the specific displays is restricted during execution of the first change effect, but at least the display position of the specific display that is the execution target of the first change effect. If the display position of the other specific display is limited, the display position of the other specific display may not be limited.

  If the display position fixing flag is not set in step S904700A, the effect control CPU 90101 determines whether or not it is the preset display position change timing (step S904700B). In the present embodiment, the display position change timing is even seconds after the start of fluctuation, that is, the display position can be changed every 2 seconds. The display position change timing may be determined by lottery, or may be determined for each variation pattern.

  When it is the display position change timing (Y in step S904700B), the specific display specific number R (R=1 indicates the first specific display (that is, active) when specifying the specific display number. Display), if R=2, the second specific display (that is, the first reserved display), if R=3, the third specific display (that is, the second reserved display), R =4, 1 is set to the fourth specific display (that is, the third reserved display) (step S904701), and whether to switch the display position of the specific display specified by the specific display specific number R Display position switching lottery for determining whether or not is executed (step S904702). Specifically, the display position switching lottery table is used to perform the display position switching lottery.

  FIG. 70 is an explanatory diagram showing a display position switching lottery table. In the display position switching lottery table shown in FIG. 70, the determination value corresponding to the presence/absence of switching of the display position is assigned according to the operation frequency, but in the example shown in FIG. 70, the assignment value is assigned to simplify the description. The ratio of the determined judgment values is shown. The effect control CPU 90101 extracts, for example, a random number for display position switching lottery, and determines the determination item to which a determination value that matches the extracted random number is assigned.

  For example, when the operation frequency is high, the display position is switched at a rate of 70% and the display position is not switched at a rate of 30%. Further, for example, when the operation frequency is low, the display position is switched at a rate of 20% and the display position is not switched at a rate of 80%.

  When it is determined to switch the display position (Y in step S904703), if the display position of the R-th specific display is the retracted position, it is switched to the advanced position, and if it is the advanced position, it is switched to the retracted position (step S904704). Then, the value of the specific display specific number R is the number of pending storages (the first pending storage number if the variation to be executed is based on the first pending storage, and the second if the variation to be executed is based on the second pending storage. It is determined whether or not the value is the same as the value obtained by adding 1 to (reserved storage number) (step S904705), and if it is not the same value, 1 is added to the specific display specific number R and the process proceeds to step S904702 again. In this way, the presence/absence of switching of the display positions of all the specific displays is determined one by one. If the values are the same, the process moves to step S904707.

  In step S904707, the effect control CPU 90101 sets the display position fixing flag (step S904707A) if it is the execution timing of the first change effect (Y in step S904707), and the display mode of the specific display of the execution object of the change effect. Is determined to be changed (step S904708). If the change is scheduled, the display position of the specific display to be executed is switched to the advance position (step S904709). If the change is not scheduled, the display position of the specific display to be executed is switched to the retracted position (step S904710). Thereby, when the first change effect is executed, the display mode is changed if the display position of the specific display of the execution object of the first change effect is the advance position, and the display mode is not changed if it is the retracted position. It has become.

  In step S904711, the effect control CPU 90101 resets the display position fixing flag if the change effect end timing (Y in step S904711), if set (step S904711A), and specifies the execution target of the change effect. It is determined whether or not the display mode of (1) is to be changed (step S904712), and if the display mode is to be changed, the display mode of the specific display of the execution target is changed (step S904713). In step S904713, the specific display is changed to a display mode corresponding to the type of change effect (for example, when the first change effect is executed, the expression mode is switched from the expressionless expression mode to the display mode in which the eyes are open and sweat is displayed. On the other hand, when the second change effect is executed, the display mode is switched from the expressionless display mode to the display mode in which tears are shed), and then the color changes to blue or red. Note that when the color is changed to blue or red, the expressionless display mode is switched again.

  If the variation time timer has timed out (step S908111), the effect control CPU 90101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value according to the effect symbol variation stop processing (step S90803) (step S908112).

  FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol fluctuation stop process (step S90803) in the effect control process process. In the effect symbol variation stop process, first, the effect control CPU 90101 confirms whether or not a stop symbol display flag indicating that the effect symbol stop symbol is displayed is set (step S908301). If the stop symbol display flag is set, it moves to step S908305. In this embodiment, when the big hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the effect symbol, the stop symbol display flag is set in step S908304. Then, the stop symbol display flag is reset when the fanfare production is executed. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag is set means that the jackpot symbol has been stopped and displayed, but the fanfare production has not yet been executed, so the process of displaying the stop symbol of the effect symbol in step S908302 is executed. Without that, the process moves to step S908305.

  When the stop symbol display flag is not set, the effect control CPU 90101 performs control to stop and display the determined stop symbol (delayed symbol, big hit symbol) (step S908302).

  After that, the effect control CPU 90101 clears the operation frequency storage area in the start prize winning command storage area and the active display storage area (step S905301). As described above, in the present embodiment, the operation frequency is updated for each change.

  When the big hit symbol and the small hit symbol are not displayed in the process of step S908302 (that is, when the outlying symbol is displayed) (N in step S908303), the effect control CPU 90101 controls the effect control CPU 90101. Shifts to step S908311.

  When the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the process of step S908302 (Y in step S908303), the effect control CPU 90101 sets the stop symbol display flag (step S908304), and receives the big hit start designation command. It is confirmed whether or not the big hit start designation command reception flag indicating that or the small hit/abrupt probability big hit start designation command reception flag is set (step S908305). . When the big hit start designation command reception flag or the small hit / sudden change big hit start designation command reception flag is set, the effect control CPU 90101 resets the stop symbol display flag (step S908306), and responds to the fanfare effect. A process table is selected (step S908307). If the big hit start designation command reception flag or the small hit/suddenly probable variation big hit start designation command reception flag is set, the effect control CPU 90101 resets the set flag.

  Then, the effect control CPU 90101 sets the process timer setting value to the process timer to start the process timer (step S908308), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number). According to the data 1 and the movable member control data 1, a rendering device (a rendering display device 909 as a rendering component, various lamps as a rendering component, a speaker 9027 as a rendering component, and a movable member 9078 as a rendering component and rendering. Control of blade accessory 9079a, 9079b) is executed (step S908309).

  Then, the effect control CPU 90101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value according to the big hit display process (step S90804) (step S908310).

  When it is determined that neither the big hit nor the small hit (N in step S908303), the effect control CPU 90101 resets a predetermined flag (step S908311). For example, the effect control CPU 90101 resets the first symbol variation designation command reception flag and the second symbol variation designation command reception flag. The effect control CPU 90101 may reset the command reception flag immediately after being referenced in the effect control process process or the fourth symbol process process (for example, as shown in step S90811 of FIG. 63, a variation pattern). The variable pattern command reception flag may be reset immediately after confirming the command reception flag). However, for example, the symbol variation designation command is referred to in both the production control process process and the fourth symbol process process, so as shown in this embodiment, the production symbol variation stop process at the end of variation, etc. It is desirable to reset in or in the big hit end effect processing when the big hit ends. Then, the effect control CPU 90101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value according to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S90803) (step S908312).

  72 and 73 are explanatory diagrams showing display examples of the effect display device 909 when the change effect is executed. For example, FIGS. 72(A1) to (A3) show display examples in the case where the first change effect for the hold display in which the display position is the advance position is executed. For example, as shown in FIG. 72(A1), an active display 9051 and three hold displays 9052 to 9054 are displayed as specific displays, and the display mode of any specific display is white. As for the display position of each specific display, only the first reserved display 9052 is the advance position, and the other specific displays (active display 9051, reserved displays 9053, 9054) are the retracted positions. Next, as shown in FIG. 72(A2), the first change effect for the first hold display 9052 whose display position is the advance position is executed. At this time, the first hold display 9052 hit by the hammer X is switched to a display mode in which the eyes are opened and sweat is discharged. Then, as shown in FIG. 72(A3), the display mode of the first hold display 9052 on which the first change effect is executed changes from white to blue.

  In addition, for example, FIGS. 72(B1) to (B3) show display examples in the case where the first change effect for the hold display in which the display position is the retracted position is executed. For example, as shown in FIG. 72(B1), an active display 9051 and three hold displays 9052 to 9054 are displayed as specific displays, and the display mode of any specific display is white. Further, the display position of each specific display is the retracted position. Then, as shown in FIG. 72(B2), the first change effect for the first hold display 9052 whose display position is the retracted position is executed. At this time, the hammer X in the first change effect does not hit the first hold display 9052. Then, as shown in FIG. 72(B3), the display mode of the first hold display 9052 in which the first change effect is executed does not change.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the display mode of the specific display changes in a different ratio depending on the display position of the specific display that is the execution target of the first change effect (100% changes in the advance position, the retracted position). If so, it does not change 100%).

  In addition, for example, FIGS. 73(A1) to (A3) show display examples in the case where the second change effect for the hold display in which the display position is the advance position is executed. For example, as shown in FIG. 73(A1), an active display 9051 and three hold displays 9052 to 9054 are displayed as specific displays, and the display mode of any specific display is white. As for the display position of each specific display, only the first reserved display 9052 is the advance position, and the other specific displays (active display 9051, reserved displays 9053, 9054) are the retracted positions. Then, as shown in FIG. 73(A2), a second change effect is executed for the first hold display 9052 whose display position is the advance position. At this time, the first hold display 9052 hit by the arrow Y is switched to a display mode in which tears are shed (a display mode different from that when hit with the hammer X in the first change effect). Then, as shown in FIG. 73(A3), the display mode of the first hold display 9052 on which the second change effect is executed changes from white to blue.

  Further, for example, FIGS. 73(B1) to (B3) show display examples in the case where the second change effect targeting the hold display in which the display position is the retracted position is executed. For example, as shown in FIG. 73(B1), an active display and three hold displays 9052 to 9054 are displayed as the specific display 9051, and the display mode of any specific display is white. Further, the display position of each specific display is the retracted position. Next, as shown in FIG. 73(B2), a second change effect is executed for the first hold display 9052 whose display position is the retracted position. At this time, the first hold display 9052 hit by the arrow Y is switched to a display mode in which tears are shed (a display mode different from that when hit with the hammer X in the first change effect). Then, as shown in FIG. 73(B3), the display mode of the first hold display 9052 on which the second change effect is executed changes from white to blue.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the second change effect is executed, the display mode can be changed regardless of whether the display position of the specific display is the advance position or the retreat position. Is becoming In addition, even when the second change effect is executed, a pattern in which the shot Y does not hit the specific display is provided as a pattern in which the display mode of the specific display to be executed does not change.

  As described above, according to this embodiment, it is a gaming machine capable of performing variable display, and a mode involving operation (in this example, a mode in which the display position is switched to the advance position or the retreat position, A specific display (in this example, an active display corresponding to a change in execution) corresponding to a variable display in a mode in which the expressionless expression is switched to a display mode in which eyes are opened to sweat and tears are switched to a display mode) The display mode of the specific display (in this example, the display color (white, blue, red)) can be displayed, and the displayed shape, pattern, position, range, etc. (In this example, the active display is displayed by performing steps S90663B and S90667B in the effect control microcomputer 90100, and the hold display is displayed by performing steps S903911 and S903929). Then, a part that changes the display mode of the specific display by performing step S904713) and a suggestive effect that suggests a change in the display mode of the specific display (in this example, change effect (first change effect, second change effect)). ) Can be executed suggestive effect execution means (in this example, in the effect control microcomputer 90100, the change effect is set in step S904506, the process table corresponding to the change effect is selected in step S908004, and steps S90806 and S908105 are executed. (A part that executes a change effect by performing).

  Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, the specific display means performs the specific display operation mode (display position (advance position, retract position) in this example. It is possible to change the display mode of the specific display at different ratios depending on other operation modes such as (high frequency, low frequency) and display direction (for example, downward or rightward). By performing steps S904707 to S904709, the effect control microcomputer 90100 displays the specific display at a rate of 100% when the display position of the specific display that is the execution target of the first change effect is the advance position. On the other hand, when the display position of the specific display that is the execution target of the first change effect is the retracted position, the display mode of the specific display is not changed (the display mode of the specific display is changed at a rate of 0%. )) decided. This allows the player to pay attention to the operation mode of the specific display.

  In the present embodiment, the gaming machine is capable of displaying both the active display and the hold display, and both of them can be displayed in a mode involving operation, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, only one of the active display and the hold display may be displayed in a mode that involves an operation. Further, for example, only one of the active display and the hold display may be displayed.

  Further, although the active mode and the hold mode have the same operation mode and display mode, the present invention is not limited to this, and the active mode and the hold mode can be displayed in different operation modes and display modes. May be

  Further, in the present embodiment, the display mode pattern and the change timing are determined at the time of the start winning, and the presence/absence of the change effect and the operation frequency are determined at the start of the variation, but the determination timing is not limited to this. Absent. For example, the display mode pattern may not be determined at the time of starting winning, but whether or not the display mode is changed during the variation may be determined at each variation start (that is, the change timing is also determined at the variation start time). Alternatively, the presence/absence of a change effect and the operation frequency may be determined at the time of winning the start prize.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the maximum four hold displays can be displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if both the first hold display and the second hold display can be displayed, a maximum of eight hold displays can be displayed.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, a change effect that suggests a change in the display mode of a single specific display is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a change in the display mode of a plurality of specific displays is collectively performed. It may be possible to execute the change effect suggested by. For example, a change effect may be executed that suggests that two arrows are shot toward different specific displays and the display mode of the specific display hit by the arrows changes.

  It should be noted that in the present embodiment, only when a part of a plurality of types of suggestive effects is executed (first change effect), it differs depending on whether the display position of the specific display is the advance position or the retreat position. Although it has been decided that the display mode of the specific display changes in proportion, when executing all kinds of suggestive effects, the specific display of the specific display changes in different proportions depending on whether the display position of the specific display is the advance position or the retreat position. The display mode may be changed.

  Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, the suggestive effect executing means causes the first suggestive effect (first change effect in this example) and the second suggestive effect (second change effect in this example). It is possible to execute any one of a plurality of suggestive effects including and (in this example, the effect control microcomputer 90100 executes any change effect by performing steps S90804, S908006, and S908105. The specific display means can display the specific display in different operation modes depending on whether the suggested effect to be executed is the first suggested effect or the second suggested effect (in this example, effect control). For executing the first change effect, the microcomputer 90100 for use switches the display mode from the expressionless expression to the display mode in which the eyes are open and sweating is performed to display the specific display, while the second change is performed. When the effect is executed, the expression mode is switched from the expressionless expression mode to the tear mode to display the specific display. The operation frequency may be changed depending on which suggested effect is executed.). .. This allows the player to pay attention to the operation mode of the specific display.

  In the present embodiment, the display mode of the specific display after the change effect is executed is different depending on the executed change effect, but before or during the change effect is executed. The display mode of the specific display may be different depending on the change effect to be executed. For example, when a change effect in which an apple falls from the sky is executed, the display mode of the specific display may be switched to a mode in which the mouth is opened before the apple is displayed, or after the apple is displayed. The display mode of the specific display may be switched by opening the mouth before the apple reaches the specific display.

  Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, the specific display means performs the specific display operation mode (in this example, operation frequency (high frequency, low frequency). It is possible to change the display mode of the specific display at different ratios depending on the (advance position, retreat position) and the display direction (for example, downward or rightward). The control microcomputer 90100 executes step S904508 using the operation frequency determination lottery table shown in FIG. 68C, so that the operation frequency of the specific display that is the execution target of the change effect is high or low. The change rate of the display mode is different depending on the frequency.) This allows the player to pay attention to the operation mode of the specific display.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the specific display means displays the specific display in a mode that involves an operation regardless of whether or not the display mode is changed (in this example, the display position (extend (The position, the retreat position) are switched), and the suggestion effect executing means can execute the suggestion effect at different rates depending on the operation mode of the specific display (in this example, the effect control microcomputer 90100 is By executing step S904508 using the operation frequency determination lottery table shown in FIG. 68(C), a change effect (first change effect, first change effect when the operation frequency is high frequency is compared to when the operation frequency is low frequency). 2 change production) is easy to execute). This allows the player to pay attention to the operation mode of the specific display.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the specific display means can display the specific display by switching between a specific operation mode (in this example, the advance position) and a non-specific operation mode (in this example, the retracted position). In the example, the effect control microcomputer 90100 can execute steps S904704, S904709, and S904710), and when the operation mode of the specific display when the suggested effect is executed is the specific operation mode, the display of the specific display is performed. It is possible to change the mode (in this example, the effect control microcomputer 90100 executes steps S904707 to S904713 so that the display position of the specific display that is the execution target of the first change effect is the advance position. The display mode of the specific display can be changed). This allows the player to pay attention to the operation mode of the specific display.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the suggestion effect execution means includes a plurality of types of suggestions including a first suggestion effect (first change effect in this example) and a second suggestion effect (second change effect in this example). It is possible to execute any of the suggested effects (in this example, the effect control microcomputer 90100 executes any of the change effects by performing steps S90804, S908006, and S908105), and the specific display means is The specific display can be displayed by switching between the specific operation mode (in this example, the advance position) and the non-specific operation mode (in this example, the retracted position) (in this example, the effect control microcomputer 90100 executes steps). (S904704, S904709, S904710 can be executed), and when the operation mode of the specific display is the specific operation mode when the first suggestive effect is executed, the display mode of the specific display can be changed (in this example, The effect control microcomputer 90100 can change the display mode of the specific display by executing steps S904707 to S904713 when the display position of the specific display that is the execution target of the first change effect is the advance position. On the other hand, when the second suggestion effect is executed, the display mode of the specific display can be changed regardless of the operation mode of the specific display (in this example, the effect control microcomputer 90100 executes steps S904711 to S904713). By doing so, the display mode of the specific display can be changed regardless of whether the display position of the specific display that is the execution target of the second change effect is the advance position or the retreat position). Thereby, the effect of production can be improved.

  Further, in the present embodiment, it is possible to suggest that the display state of the specific display controls the advantageous state (in this example, the effect control microcomputer 90100 displays the display shown in FIG. 61 in steps S903906 and S903924). By determining the display mode pattern using the mode pattern determination lottery table, the display mode changes the reliability of the big hit (white <blue <red) is suggested), and the display mode of the specific display changes depending on the operation mode of the specific display. It is possible to indicate whether or not (in this example, the effect control microcomputer 90100 determines the operation frequency by using the operation frequency determination lottery table shown in FIG. 68C in step S904508. Therefore, the reliability (low frequency <high frequency) for changing the display mode of the specific display is determined). Thereby, the effect of production can be improved.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a specific display (specific display on the suggesting side) that indicates whether or not the display mode changes by the operation mode and a specific display (suggestion that indicates whether or not the display mode changes) The specific display) is the same specific display, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the specific display of the suggesting side and the specific display of the suggesting side may be different from each other. Good. For example, it may be suggested that the display mode of the specific display B displayed adjacent to the specific display A changes depending on whether or not the operation frequency of the specific display A is high.

  In the present embodiment, two types of suggestive effects are provided, but only one type of suggestive effect may be provided, or three or more types of suggestive effects may be provided. It may be that

  Further, in the present embodiment, the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol may be executed according to the starting winning order in which the game balls have won the first starting winning opening 9013 and the second starting winning opening 9014. ..

  Further, in this embodiment, the pending change pattern and the change timing are determined by different lottery, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a plurality of data including information on the pending change pattern and the changing timing (that is, data in which which display mode changes at which timing is predetermined) are provided, and the pending change according to any of the data is performed. It may be determined by lottery whether to perform.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the hold display is displayed at a timing before the next change after the hold display is started (for example, during the change being executed when the hold display is started). Although the aspect is configured so that it cannot be changed, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is possible to change the display aspect of the hold display at a timing before the next change after the hold display is started. Good. For example, the display mode of the hold display may be changeable during the change being executed when the hold display is started.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the operation frequency of the hold display is always low from the start of the display of the hold display to the start of the next variation, but the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, the frequency may be high, or either high frequency or low frequency may be selected by lottery at the time of winning the start prize. In that case, it is desirable that the display mode of the hold display can be changed at a timing before the start of the next change after the start of the hold display.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the operation frequency of the specific display displayed at the start of fluctuation is determined, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the operation frequency of all displayable specific displays (one active display and four reserved displays) may be always determined regardless of the number of stored storages that are actually stored. For example, in consideration of the case where a start winning occurs and a third or fourth hold display is displayed during a change in which two hold memories are stored, the third or the fourth hold is displayed at the start of the change. It is also possible to determine the operation frequencies of all displayable specific displays including the second hold display (all the operation frequencies of one active display and four hold displays are determined at the start of each change). Good.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the starting winning command storage area for storing information on the hold display and the active display storage area for storing information on the active display are provided, respectively. The information regarding the pending display and the information regarding the active display may be stored in a common storage area. In that case, in steps S904501, S904503B, S904508, and S904702, the processing is performed by referring to the common storage area.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the presence/absence of display position switching is determined by lottery based on the operation frequency, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a fixed operation pattern (a pattern in which which display position is switched at which timing) is provided for each operation frequency, and the display position may be switched based on the operation pattern. .. For example, as a high-frequency operation pattern, an operation pattern that repeats displaying for 2 seconds at the retracted position and then for 3 seconds at the advanced position is provided, and as the low-frequency operation pattern for 5 seconds at the retracted position. It is also possible to provide an operation pattern in which the display is repeated and then displayed at the advance position for 8 seconds.

  When determining whether or not to execute the change effect, if the specific display whose display mode has already changed is displayed, the execution rate of the change effect may be increased. For example, when the blue specific display is already displayed, the change effect execution rate may be increased. As a result, the player can be expected to further change the display mode of the specific display whose display mode has already changed. In the gaming machine in which the display mode can be changed in a plurality of stages, if there is a specific display that has already been changed to the final stage display mode, even if a change effect for which the specific display is executed is executed. Since it is not possible to give the player a sense of expectation, it is possible to limit the execution of the change effect whose execution target is the specific display.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the operation frequency of the specific display is determined one by one, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation frequencies of a plurality of specific displays may be collectively determined. For example, a combination of operation frequencies (high frequency, low frequency) in each specific hold may be selected.

  In the present embodiment, the display position of the specific display, which is the target of execution of the first change effect, is forcibly switched (if it is changed, the display position is switched to the advance position and changed. If not, switch to the retreat position. See steps S904707 to S904710.) However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display position of the specific display of the execution target is the advancing position by chance when the first change effect is executed. The display mode of the specific display may be changed (for example, when the display position is switched to the advance position in step S904704). Specifically, the final display mode (which display mode is changed) is determined at the time of starting winning (at that time, the change timing is not determined), and the specific display is not yet changed to the final display mode. On the other hand, if the first change effect can be executed, and the timing at which the first change effect is executed matches the timing at which the display mode of the specific display is controlled to the advanced position, the display mode of the specific display May be changed.

  In that case, if the variation corresponding to the specific display is started (that is, when the active display is displayed as the specific display) and the final display mode is not changed, the active display mode is displayed. May be forcibly changed to the final display mode. Specifically, the first change effect may be executed and the display position of the active display may be forcibly switched to the advance position to change to the final display mode, or the display position of the active display may be changed regardless of the display position. The final display mode may be changed by executing a change effect that may change the display mode (the second change effect may be used or another change effect may be used).

  Further, the specific display may be displayed so that the movement is different depending on the display mode. For example, when the specific display is white, it may be displayed by rotating, when it is blue, it may be displayed as jumping, and when it is red, it may be displayed as running around.

  Note that in the present embodiment, by determining the display mode pattern with the selection ratio shown in FIG. 61, the reliability with respect to changing to red is white<blue. For example, since the ratio of big hits and small hits is extremely lower than the ratio of big hits, and in general, the number of reserved memories at the time of winning is more than two than one, so that FIG. Focusing on the case where the winning determination result in the second display manner pattern determination lottery table of B) is SP reach or other, Pt4 for the case where Pt1′ to Pt4′ (display manner pattern including white) is selected ′ (Display mode pattern that changes from white to red) and Pt3′ (display mode that changes from blue to red) when Pt2′ and Pt3′ (display mode pattern including blue) are selected The pattern is more frequently selected. As a result, blue is more likely to change to red than white.

  In addition, a suggestive effect that suggests a change in the display mode of the changed specific display whose display mode has already been changed, and a display mode of another specific display that is different from the changed specific display while the changed specific display is being displayed. The suggestive effect that suggests the change may be executed at least in part in a common manner. Specifically, description will be made using Modification 1 below. The description of the same parts as those in the above-described embodiment will be omitted.

  In Modification 1, the effect control microcomputer 90100 can change the display mode of the plurality of specific displays. Specifically, the processing of steps S903904, S903905, S903922, and S903923 in FIG. 60 in the above-described embodiment (that is, a new pending storage is performed while the specific display of the display mode pattern in which the display mode changes is already displayed. When it occurs, the display mode of the plurality of specific displays can be changed by not executing the process of setting the display mode pattern of the new pending display to Pt1').

  FIG. 74 is an explanatory diagram showing a display example of the effect display device 9 when executing the second change effect in the first modification. For example, as shown in FIG. 74(1), an active display 9051 and three hold displays 9052 to 9054 are displayed as specific displays, and the display form of the first hold display 9052 is blue, and The display mode of the specific display (active display 9051, hold display 9053, 9054) is white. Further, the display position of each specific display is the retracted position. At this time, as shown in FIG. 74(1), the common second change effect (effect in which the arrow Y is shot) is executed regardless of which specific display is to be executed.

  When the first hold display 9052 whose display mode has already changed to blue is to be executed, as shown in FIGS. 74(2) and (3), the arrow Y hits the first hold display 9052. However, the display mode changes from blue to red.

  When the specific display (specifically, the second hold display 9053) different from the first hold display 9052 whose display mode has already changed to blue is set as an execution target, FIG. As shown in 5), the arrow Y hits the second hold display 9053, and the display mode changes from white to blue.

  As described above, in this modified example 1, the suggestion effect execution means causes the changed specific display whose display mode has already been changed (for example, the first reserved display shown in FIGS. 74(1) and (2)). 9052) suggestive effect suggesting a change in the display mode (for example, the second change effect shown in FIGS. 74(1) and (2)) and the changed specific display in the state where the changed specific display is displayed. Suggestive effect (for example, FIGS. 74(1), (4), and FIG. 74(1), (4), which indicates a change in display mode of another specific display (for example, the second hold display 9053 shown in FIGS. 74(1), (4))). The second change effect shown in (5) can be executed in a mode in which at least a part is common (for example, a mode in which the arrow Y flies as shown in FIG. 74(1)). As a result, the effect contents can be made to have an unexpected effect, and the effect effect can be improved.

  In the first modification, the specific display that suggests a change in the suggestion effect executed in a manner that is at least partially common to the suggestion effect that suggests a change in the display mode of the changed specific display is the changed specific display. Although it is assumed that it is a pending display adjacent to, it is not limited to this. For example, a hold display and an active display that are not adjacent to each other may be used.

  Further, in the first modification, the case where a single changed specific display is displayed has been described, but similar processing is performed even when a plurality of changed specific displays are displayed. Good.

  Further, although this modified example 1 has been described using the example of the second change effect, the present invention is not limited to this, and, for example, the first suggesting a change in the display mode of the changed specific display in which the display mode has already been changed is suggested. In a mode in which at least a part is common, the change effect and the first change effect that suggests a change in the display mode of another specific display different from the changed specific display while the changed specific display is displayed It may be executed (for example, the hammer is displayed in a common mode of moving left and right, and then stopped at the upper part of the specific display of the execution target).

  In addition, the specific display means includes at least the specific display corresponding to the variable display, the normal mode, the first specific mode having a higher degree of expectation than the normal mode, and the second specific mode that suggests the effect content. Can be displayed in the display mode of, and the production of the content suggested by the specific display of the second specific mode can be performed, and after the specific display is displayed in the second specific mode, the specific display of the second specific mode The display mode of the specific display may be changed from the second specific mode to the first specific mode when the effect of the content suggested by is executed. Specifically, description will be made using Modification 2 below. The description of the same parts as those in the above-described embodiment will be omitted.

  In Modification 2, as a display mode of the hold display displayed on the hold storage display unit 18c, a normal display mode showing reliability for a big hit (probability change/normal/sudden probability big hit) or a small hit, and a predetermined effect And a production suggestion display mode for suggesting the execution of.

  The normal display mode includes “white” displayed in white, “red” displayed in red, and “gold” displayed in gold, and includes a big hit (probability change/normal/sudden change big hit) and The reliability of being a small hit is gold> red> white.

  In the effect suggestion display mode, by displaying the character "special", the first special suggestion mode that indicates that it is a subject of advance notice of the special zone effect, and by displaying the character "special?", the special zone effect is displayed. Displaying the second special suggestion mode that suggests that it is the subject of advance notice, the pseudo-link suggestion mode that indicates that the pseudo-link is executed by displaying the characters "NEXT", and the character "SP" And an SP suggestion mode suggesting that it develops into a super reach. The first special suggestion mode is a display mode that can be selected only when the special zone effect is foretold, while the second special suggestion mode is selected regardless of whether the special zone effect is foretold. It is a display mode to obtain. The pseudo-relationship suggestion mode is a display mode that can be selected only when the pseudo-ream mode is executed, and the SP suggestion mode is a display mode that can be selected only when the super reach is developed.

  The special zone effect is an effect in which a special background different from a normal background is displayed by one change or a plurality of continuous changes. In addition, the special zone effect has a structure in which the greater the number of executions, the higher the reliability with respect to a big hit (probability change/normal/sudden probability big hit) or a small hit. Hereinafter, starting the execution of the special zone effect may be referred to as “rushing into the special zone”.

  Immediately before entering the special zone, a successful entry effect is executed. The rush success effect is an effect indicating that it has been decided to rush into the special zone after suggesting that the special zone is entered (for example, an effect of displaying “success!” after displaying “special zone chance!”). ). In addition, when the player does not rush into the special zone, a rush failure effect may be executed to give the player a sense of expectation by suggesting that the player will enter the special zone. For example, similar to the successful entry effect, after suggesting to enter the special zone, an effect indicating not to enter the special zone (for example, “Special zone chance!” is displayed and then “Failure...” is displayed. (Production) can be executed as a rush failure production. Hereinafter, the successful entry effect and the unsuccessful entry effect may be collectively referred to as a “rush announcement effect”.

  The rush advance notice effect is an effect that is performed for 3 seconds from the start of fluctuation. When entering the special zone, the special zone effect is started 3 seconds after the start of fluctuation (at the end of the successful entry effect). In addition, when the variation time of the variation for executing the rush announcement effect is shorter than 3 seconds, the rush announcement effect is forcibly ended 1 second before the variation stop. At that time, when the player enters the special zone, the successful player effect is forcibly ended and the special zone effect is started.

  In the second modification, the display mode of displaying the hold display and the active display is determined when the corresponding hold storage occurs (at the time of starting winning). Specifically, when the start winning is generated, first, the change mode of the normal display mode (holding change pattern and change timing) is determined, and then it is determined whether or not to display in the effect suggestion display mode. When it is determined not to display in the effect suggestion display mode, the hold display is started in the normal display mode from the timing of the start winning. When it is determined to display in the effect suggestion display mode, the display of the hold display is started in the effect suggestion display mode from the timing of the start winning, and when the effect of the suggestion content is executed (for example, 5 seconds after starting the special zone production, 5 seconds after re-changing in the pseudo-repeating, 5 seconds after starting the super reach), or when it is decided not to execute (for example, rush failure) It is adapted to change to a normal suggestion display mode when an effect is executed).

  FIG. 75 is an explanatory diagram showing a display example in the case of displaying the hold display in the second special suggestion mode in the second modification. First, (1) while the active display 9051 and the two hold displays 9052 and 9053 are being displayed, (2) a new hold storage is generated and the hold display 9054 corresponding to the second hold storage is displayed as the second hold display 9054. It is displayed in a special suggestion mode (“special?”). At this time, it is decided to execute the special zone effect in which the reserved memory is the subject of advance notice. Further, at this time, it is assumed that the pending change pattern that changes from “white” to “red” and further changes to “gold” is determined, and the first and second change timings are determined.

  Then, (3) the fluctuation ends at the gap, and (4) the next fluctuation starts. At this time, the active display 9051 corresponding to the new change is displayed and the hold display is shifted. Then, the entry notice effect is executed (the image P is displayed). When 3 seconds have passed after that, (5) it is informed that it was a successful entry effect (image P is switched and displayed), and it enters the special zone (image Q is displayed). At a timing 5 seconds after that, the display mode of the hold display 9053 displayed in (6) the second special suggestion mode changes to “red”.

  After that, although not shown in the figure, the fluctuation ends at a gap and the next fluctuation starts. At this time, the active display corresponding to the new change is displayed and the hold display is shifted. Then, the display mode of the hold display, which was displayed in "red", changes to "gold".

  As described above, in the second modification, the specific display unit displays at least the normal display (in this example, “white”) in the specific display (in this example, hold display, active display) corresponding to the variable display. ), a first specific mode (in this example, “red”) having a higher degree of expectation than the normal mode, and a second specific mode (in this example, performance suggestion display mode (first special suggestion mode)) that suggests the effect content. , Second special suggestion manner, pseudo-relation suggestion manner, SP suggestion manner)) (in this example, as shown in FIG. 75, “white” or “red”). Or a second special suggestion mode can display a hold display), and effect execution means capable of executing the effect suggested by the specific display of the second specific mode (in this example, FIG. 75(5), ( 6), it is possible to execute the special zone effect suggested in the second special suggestion mode, and the specific display means displays the specific display in the second specific mode, and then performs the second specific mode. When the production of the content suggested by the specific display of the mode is executed, the display mode of the specific display can be changed from the second specific mode to the first specific mode (in this example, as shown in FIG. 75, Five seconds after the special zone effect is started, the hold display 9053 displayed in the second special suggestion mode can be changed to “red”). As a result, it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the specific aspect.

  In the second modification, a single display mode (“white” or “red”) is provided as each of the “normal mode” and the “first specific mode”. A plurality of display modes may be provided as at least one of the “first specific modes”. Further, although it is decided that a plurality of display modes (first special suggestion mode, second special suggestion mode, pseudo-relational suggestion mode, SP suggestion mode) are provided as the "second specific mode", the "second specific mode" ", a single display mode may be provided.

  In addition, the effect suggested by the "specific display of the second specific mode" is not limited to the one described above, and the step-up notice effect that develops in stages, the character notice effect in which the character appears, and the dialogue effect that displays the dialogue. Any effect may be used, such as a button effect that prompts the player to operate the operation button 90120 and an effect effect that changes the display mode of the hold display and the active display.

  Further, in the second modification, the display mode in which the effect is suggested by the characters (“special”, “special?”, “NEXT”, “SP”) is the “second specific mode”. May indicate the content of the effect.

  Further, in this modification 2, 5 seconds after the special zone effect, the pseudo continuous effect, or the super reach effect is started, "after the specific display is displayed in the second specific mode, the specific display in the second specific mode" is performed. When the presentation of the content suggested by is executed,” the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be the time when the effect of the content suggested by the specific display of the second specific mode is executed, or the timing before and after the time.

  Further, in this modified example 2, each effect is started "when the effect indicated by the specific display in the second specific mode is executed after the specific display is displayed in the second specific mode". It is decided to unify after 5 seconds, but it is not limited to this. For example, a different timing is preset for each effect of the suggestive content (for example, if the effect of the suggestive content is pseudo-relation, 3 seconds after the start of the pseudo-relation, if the effect of the suggestive content is super reach, start the super reach 4 seconds later), or any one of a plurality of timings may be determined by lottery. In the case of determination by lottery, it may be different depending on whether or not the lottery ratio is a big hit. Thereby, an expectation can be given by the timing when the display mode of the hold display or the active display changes from the second specific mode to the first specific mode.

  Further, in the second modification, the pending change pattern and the change timing are determined by different lottery, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a plurality of data including information on the pending change pattern and the changing timing (that is, data in which which display mode changes at which timing is predetermined) are provided, and the pending change according to any of the data is performed. It may be determined by lottery whether to perform.

  Further, the change timing of the display mode of the hold display or the active display may not be determined in advance, and for example, whether or not the display mode of the hold display or the active display is changed each time a change is started. May be determined by lottery. Further, the display mode after the change may not be determined in advance, and for example, which display mode is changed may be determined by a lottery at the change timing.

  Further, in the second modification, as the display mode of the hold display or the active display, the normal display mode and the effect suggestion display mode are determined by different lottery, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a plurality of display mode change patterns including a normal display mode and a display suggestion display mode may be provided, and which change pattern is used to change the display mode may be determined.

  In Modification 2, when the hold display or the active display is displayed in the effect suggestion display mode, it is not displayed in the normal display mode, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if the hold display or active display in the normal display mode is displayed as an image having a lower display priority than the hold display or active display in the effect suggestion display mode, the hold display in the effect suggestion display mode or Even while the active display is being displayed, the same display as in the second modification can be performed without interrupting the display control of the normal display mode (the change control of the display mode at the change timing).

  Further, in the second modification, the performance executing means may not execute the performance of the content suggested by the specific display in the second specific mode even if the specific display is displayed in the second specific mode (for example, Even when the special zone effect is not executed, the hold display or the active display can be displayed in the second special suggestion mode, that is, when the hold display or the active display is displayed in the second special suggestion mode. , The special zone effect which is the suggestion content may not be executed.), the specific display means is in the second specific aspect even when the effect of the content suggested by the specific display in the second specific aspect is not executed. It is possible to change the display mode of the specific display displayed as the first specific mode (for example, the special zone effect is not executed although the hold display or the active display is displayed in the second special suggestion mode). At any time, it may be changed to “red” which is the first specific mode). Accordingly, it is possible to maintain an expectation when the effect of the content suggested by the specific display of the second specific mode is not executed.

  Further, in this modification 2, the specific display means can display the specific display in the first specific mode having a higher degree of expectation than the second specific mode (for example, a big hit or a smaller hit than the second special suggestion mode). The hold display or the active display can be displayed in “red”, which has a high degree of reliability with respect to winning. Thereby, the expectation for the first specific aspect can be increased.

  Moreover, in this modification 2, the specific display means can display the specific display in the first specific mode having a higher degree of expectation than the effect of the content suggested by the specific display in the second specific mode (for example, The hold display or the active display can be displayed in "red", which has a higher degree of reliability with respect to a big hit or a small hit than the special zone effect). Thereby, the expectation for the first specific aspect can be increased.

  Moreover, in this modification 2, the specific display means can further change the display mode of the specific display changed from the second specific mode to the first specific mode (for example, the display mode of the hold display or the active display is produced. The suggestion display mode may be changed to “red” and further changed to “gold”). As a result, it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the display mode of the specific display after the change to the first specific mode.

  Moreover, in this modification 2, the specific display means has a plurality of types of second specific modes having different suggested contents (in the present example, the first special suggestive mode, the second special suggestive mode, the pseudo continuous suggestive mode, the SP suggestive mode). The specific display can be displayed by changing the display mode of the specific display from the second specific mode to the first specific mode at different rates based on the type of the second specific mode (for example, "red" is included). The ratio of which presentation suggestion display mode is displayed when the pending change pattern (other than P01) is set to "Red" at a different ratio depending on the type of presentation suggestion display mode. It's good. Thereby, the display mode of the specific display can be focused on.

  In the second modification, when the hold display or the active display is displayed in the pseudo continuous suggestion mode, the pseudo continuous production is always executed with the corresponding change, but the present invention is not limited to this. When the hold display or the active display is displayed in the suggestion mode, there may be provided a case of executing the pseudo continuous effect and a case of not executing the pseudo continuous effect. Similarly, when the hold display or the active display is displayed in the SP suggestion mode, there may be provided a case where the super reach effect is executed and a case where it is not executed.

  It should be noted that this modification 2 has a configuration in which it is possible to recognize (pre-read) that the change is accompanied by one or two pseudo-links based on the change category command received at the time of winning the start prize. Alternatively, the pseudo-relationship suggesting mode can be executed with the change involving the pseudo-repeating being performed twice as the notice target, but the pseudo-repeating suggestion mode may be executed even if the change involving the pseudo-repeating is performed as the noticeable object. ..

  Further, as the change mode in the pending change pattern, not only the normal display mode but also the effect suggestion display mode is included, and it is possible to collectively determine the change modes to the normal display mode and the effect suggestion display mode. Good. For example, a pending change pattern that changes from “white” to the first special suggestion display mode, a pending change pattern that changes from the second special suggestion display mode to “red”, or a change from “white” to the pseudo-relational suggestion mode, Further, a plurality of pending change patterns such as a pending change pattern that changes to “red” and a pending change pattern that changes from “white” to the SP suggestion display mode are provided, and which pending change pattern is selected. It may be that.

  Further, it is possible to determine the pending change pattern by using a common pending change pattern determination table regardless of the winning determination result, or a plurality of pending change pattern determination tables are provided and received. The pending change pattern may be determined using the pending change pattern determination table corresponding to the variation category command.

  Further, although the description is omitted in the second modification, it is determined at the start winning that the variation is accompanied by the pseudo-repetition including a plurality of re-variations, and it is determined that the hold display is displayed in the pseudo-repetitive suggestion mode. In this case, it may be possible to determine at which re-changing timing the pseudo-link suggestion mode is changed to the normal display mode (for example, “red” or “gold”). For example, if it is decided to change the display mode at the first re-variation timing, execution of the pseudo-relation including one re-variation will be suggested by the pseudo-relation suggestion mode, while the second re-variation timing is suggested. When it is decided to change the display mode at the change timing, the execution of the pseudo run including the re-change twice is suggested by the pseudo run suggesting mode. That is, when it is determined at the time of winning the start that it is a variation involving a pseudo-repetition including multiple re-variations and it is determined to display the hold display in the pseudo-repetition suggestion mode, the pseudo-revolution including one re-variation is determined. It may be possible to determine whether the execution of the ream is the suggestion target or the execution of the pseudo ream including two revariations is the suggestion target.

  Further, a plurality of display modes are provided as the pseudo-relational suggestion mode, and the number of re-variations may be suggested depending on which type of the pseudo-relational suggestion mode the pending display is displayed. For example, if the pseudo-relation suggestion modes A to C are provided and the pseudo-repeation is performed once again, it is easy to display the hold display in the pseudo-repair suggestion mode A, and the re-change is performed twice. In the case of pseudo-link, it is easy to display the hold display in the pseudo-link suggestion mode B. In the case of pseudo-link that makes three re-changes, it is easy to display the hold display in the pseudo-link suggestion mode C. Good.

  In Modification 2, the special zone effect is started 3 seconds after the change is started, but the start timing (rush timing) of the special zone effect is not limited to this. For example, the special zone effect may be started at the timing of starting the change or at a predetermined timing during execution of a predetermined effect (for example, super reach effect). In addition, if the variation involves pseudo-relation, the special zone effect may be started at the first re-variation timing or the second re-variation timing. Further, at which timing of the plurality of timings the special zone effect is started may be determined by lottery.

  In addition, a game machine that can be executed by combining arbitrary controls of the controls in the game machine shown in the above-described embodiment, modification 1 and modification 2 may be used.

  In addition, the specific display of the second specific mode involves an action, and the content suggested by the specific display of the second specific mode is different at a different rate depending on the operation mode of the specific display of the second specific mode when the suggestive effect is executed. As the effect is executed (for example, the execution ratio of the special zone effect suggested in the second special suggestion mode is different depending on the display position of the specific display of the second special suggestion mode when the change effect is executed) Good. This allows the player to pay attention to the operation mode of the specific display of the second specific mode.

  Further, the specific display of the second specific aspect involves an action, and the content suggested by the specific display of the second specific aspect is different at a different rate depending on the operation mode of the specific display of the second specific aspect before the suggestive effect is executed. As the effect is executed (for example, the execution ratio of the special zone effect suggested in the second special suggestion mode is different depending on the operation frequency of the specific display in the second special suggestion mode before the change effect is executed) Good. This allows the player to pay attention to the operation mode of the specific display of the second specific mode.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, in order to notify the effect control microcomputer 90100 of a change pattern indicating a change time and a change mode such as the type of reach effect and the presence/absence of pseudo-relation, 1 is set when the change is started. Although an example in which one fluctuation pattern command is transmitted has been shown, the fluctuation pattern may be notified to the effect control microcomputer 90100 by two or more commands. Specifically, in the case of notifying by two commands, the game control microcomputer 90560 uses the first command to determine whether or not there is a pseudo-relation and whether or not there is a sliding effect (before the reach, the so-called so-called A command indicating the change time and change mode before the second stop) is transmitted, and the second command indicates the type of reach and the presence/absence of re-lottery production, etc., after the reach (so-called the first case if the reach is not reached). You may make it transmit the command which shows the fluctuation|variation time of (after 2 stop) or a fluctuation mode. In this case, the effect control microcomputer 90100 may perform effect control in the variable display based on the variable time derived from the combination of the two commands. It should be noted that the gaming control microcomputer 90560 notifies the variation time by each of two commands, and the specific variation mode executed at each timing is selected by the production control microcomputer 90100. You can When sending two commands, two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt, and after a predetermined period has elapsed after sending the first command (for example, the next timer interrupt). (In) the second command may be transmitted. It should be noted that the variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the transmission order can be changed as appropriate. By thus notifying the variation pattern by using two or more commands, it is possible to reduce the amount of data that must be stored as the variation pattern command.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, “different ratios” are not limited to those having different ratios due to the relationship such as A:B=70%:30% or A:B=30%:70%. It is a concept including a relationship in which the ratio is different due to the relationship of A:B=100%:0% (that is, one allocation is 100% and the other allocation is 0%).

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, a case has been described in which, for example, a plurality of types of special symbols and effect symbols “1” to “9” are variably displayed and the display result is derived and displayed, but the variable display is such a mode. I can't stop. For example, the variably displayed symbol does not necessarily have to be the same as the derivatized displayed symbol, and a symbol different from the variably displayed symbol may be derivatized and displayed. Further, it is not always necessary to variably display a plurality of types of symbols, and the variable display may be performed using only one type of symbol. In this case, for example, the variable display may be performed by alternately lighting and blinking the one type of symbol display. And, even in this case, one type of symbol used for the variable display may be finally displayed and displayed, or a symbol different from the one type of symbol may be finally displayed and displayed. It may be one.

  In the above-described embodiment, the game machine (so-called first-type game machine) that shifts to the big hit game state based on the variable display result of the special symbol and the effect symbol has been described, but the variable provided in the game area. A gaming machine (so-called second-class gaming machine) that shifts to a jackpot gaming state based on the fact that a gaming ball has won (V winning) a specific winning opening (V winning opening) in a winning ball device (so-called accessory), , And may be applied to a gaming machine in which the first type and the second type are combined.

  Further, in the present embodiment, it is possible to shift to the probability changing state based on the type of big hit that has occurred, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a special area through which a game ball can pass is provided in the special winning opening, and when the game ball passes through the specific area during the big hit, the state changes to a probability change state, while the specific area during the big hit is played. May be a state in which a normal state is entered when the vehicle does not pass. In that case, by changing the ease of passage of the game ball to the specific area depending on the type of big hit, it is possible to realize a substantial probability variation big hit and non-probability variation big hit. For example, the ease of passage of the game ball to the specific area may be changed by changing the opening time of the special winning opening depending on the type of big hit. Specifically, the big hit type with a long opening time of the big winning opening is a big hit (substantial probability variation big hit) where the game balls easily pass to the specific area, and the big hit type with a short opening time of the big winning opening is played to the specific area. It may be a big hit (substantially uncertain variation big hit) in which a ball is hard to pass.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the game control microcomputer 90560 side determines whether or not to be a big hit and the winning determination of the variation pattern type (pre-reading determination), and a command (symbol designating command) indicating the winning determination result. , The variable category command) is transmitted, and the look-ahead notice effect is executed on the side of the effect control microcomputer 90100 based on the command indicating the winning determination result, but not limited to such a mode, for example, Alternatively, the effect control microcomputer 90100 may be configured to perform a winning determination (prefetch determination). In this case, for example, the game control microcomputer 90560 transmits a command that specifies only the value of the big hit determination random number (random R') and the variation pattern type determination random number (random 2') extracted when the start winning occurs. In this way, the effect control microcomputer 90100 may be configured to perform the winning determination (prefetch determination) based on the value of the random number designated by those commands.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the production control board 9080, the audio output board 9070, and the lamp driver board 9035 are provided as the boards on which the circuit for controlling the production apparatus is mounted. You may mount on one board. Furthermore, a first effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling the effect display device 909 and the like is mounted, and a circuit for controlling other effect devices (a lamp, an LED, a speaker 9027, etc.) are installed. You may make it provide two boards with two effect control boards.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the game control microcomputer 90560 directly sends a command to the effect control microcomputer 90100, but the game control microcomputer 90560 uses another board (for example, FIG. 25). Sound output lamp 9070, lamp driver board 9035, or the like, or a sound/lamp board having the function of the circuit mounted on the sound output board 9070 and the function of the circuit mounted on the lamp driver board 9035. You may make it transmit a control command, and may be made to be transmitted to the production|generation control microcomputer 90100 in the production|generation control board 80 via another board|substrate. In that case, the command may be simply passed through on another board, or control means such as a microcomputer may be mounted on the voice output board 9070, the lamp driver board 9035, and the sound/lamp board so that the control means receives the command. According to the above, control related to voice control or lamp control is executed, and the received command is changed as it is or is changed to, for example, a simplified command, and the effect control microcomputer 90100 which controls the effect display device 9 is executed. It may be transmitted to. Even in that case, the effect control microcomputer 90100 performs the display control according to the effect control command directly received from the game control microcomputer 90560 in the above-described embodiment, similarly to the sound output board 9070 and the lamp driver. Display control can be performed in response to commands received from the board 9035 or the sound/lamp board.

  Further, in the above embodiment, a pachinko machine is taken as an example of the game machine, but the present invention is configured such that a medal is inserted and a predetermined bet number is set, and a plurality of kinds of bets are set according to the operation of the operation lever by the player. When the symbol is rotated and the symbol is stopped according to the operation of the stop button by the player, if the stop symbol combination becomes a specific symbol combination, a predetermined number of medals are applied to the player. It is also possible.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, an example in which a game medium is used as the game machine has been described, but the game machine according to the present invention is not limited to a game machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes, and a game ball. It can also be applied to an enclosed game machine that encloses a game medium such as, and gives a score when the condition for giving a prize is satisfied.

  Further, in the above embodiment, there is a probability variation big hit or a normal big hit as a big hit type, and based on the fact that it was decided as a probability variation big hit as a big hit type, the gaming machine controlled to the probability variation state after the big hit game was shown. , But is not limited to such a gaming machine. For example, a special variable winning ball device having a predetermined probability variation region provided therein (the probability variable region may be provided in only one special variable winning ball device, or a plurality of special variable winning balls are provided). Probability variation area may be provided in part of the device), the probability variation is determined based on the game ball passing through the probability variation area in the special variable winning ball device during the big hit game, and the big hit game It is also possible to apply the configuration shown in the above-described embodiment to a gaming machine that is controlled to the probable state after the end.

  INDUSTRIAL APPLICABILITY The present invention is suitably applied to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine in which a player can play a predetermined game.

1 Pachinko gaming machine 9 production display device 100 production control microcomputer 560 gaming control microcomputer 901 pachinko gaming machine 908a first special symbol display device 908b second special symbol display device 909 production display device 9013 first start winning opening 9014 2 start winning opening 9018c reserved storage display unit 9018d active display unit 9020 special variable winning ball device 9031 game control board (main board)
9056 CPU
90560 Game control microcomputer 9080 Performance control board 90100 Performance control microcomputer 90101 Performance control CPU
90109 VDP

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of performing variable display of identification information and controlling in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
Equipped with a variable display means capable of performing variable display of identification information,
The identification information includes first information and second information,
The display pattern of the identification information, a first display pattern for displaying the first information without displaying the second information, a second display pattern for displaying the first information and the second information, is provided ,
The variable display means performs the variable display by the first display pattern after the identification information starts changing in a predetermined direction, and stops the variable display by the second display pattern,
The display mode is different between the first information when displayed in the first display pattern and the first information when displayed in the second display pattern,
The variable display means,
In the special reach that develops after a lapse of a predetermined time after reaching the reach state, the first information is reduced and displayed, and the first information is reduced and displayed according to the effect sound output during the special reach. Display the information by performing a specific action,
When the variable display of the identification information is stopped, the first information is enlarged and then displayed, and then the first information is reduced and displayed,
When the variable display of the identification information is stopped, the second information is displayed so as to appear from the rear of the first information displayed in an enlarged manner,
further,
A specific display means capable of displaying a specific display corresponding to the variable display of the identification information in a mode accompanied by an operation, and capable of changing the display mode of the specific display;
Includes a suggested directing execution means, capable of performing the indicated effect suggesting a change in the specific display of the display mode,
The specific display means is capable of changing the display mode of the specific display at a different rate depending on the operation mode of the specific display when the suggestive effect is executed.